PA1581 - Prevost

PA1581 - Prevost
COACH MANUFACTURER
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
X3-45 COACH
PA1581
ST
PA1581 1 Edition
Date: January, 2011
Starting from vehicle: A-9926, B-9965, B-9971, B-9992, B-5002
Featuring: EPA 2010
Foreword
This Operator's Manual for the PREVOST X345 coach conforms with the new EPA 2010
regulations, featuring an engine with selective
catalytic reduction SCR system. This manual
has been prepared to thoroughly acquaint you,
the driver, with the equipment and features of
the coach in order for you to fully appreciate and
safely enjoy this vehicle. Prevost is committed to
the continuous improvement of coach quality,
reliability, durability and safety. With innovative
features, the X3 series coach was designed with
passenger and driver safety and comfort in mind.
This manual contains information available at the
time of publication. Because standard and
optional equipment is covered in this manual,
some of the optional equipment described may
not apply to your coach. If in doubt, refer to the
technical documentation package provided with
the coach.
Driver's controls and instruments incorporate
advanced technology for enhanced driving ease
and security. This manual describes the main
features, instruments and controls, and servicing
requirements for both standard and optional
equipment. Read this manual carefully to take
advantage of the coach's advanced features and
to ensure optimum safety and passenger comfort.
Keep this manual in the coach at all times. Make
sure this manual is kept with the coach when
ownership is transferred. Please use the
appropriate card at the end of this manual to
promptly notify Prevost of any change of address
or transfer of ownership. This will ensure we
provide fast and reliable coach service to all
coach operators.
i
DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE. are
used throughout this manual to emphasize
important points when necessary:
DANGER
Directs the operator’s attention to unsafe
practices which could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING
Directs the operator’s attention to unsafe
practices which could result in serious
personal injury or severe damage to the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Directs the operator’s attention to unsafe
practices where personal injury is not likely
but damage to vehicle components could
occur.
NOTE
Indicates supplementary information essential
to the proper operation of the vehicle.
The service life of the coach depends on the kind
of attention it receives. Pay close attention to the
DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.
Read the various notices and instructions posted
throughout the coach and attached to equipment.
Since continuous improvement is a primary focus at Prevost,
we reserve the right to make changes anytime, without notice,
and without incurring any obligation.
Before reproducing or copying this manual, in whole or in
part, written consent must be obtained from Prevost.
Table of Contents
iii
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................................................................................ 1
COACH EXTERIOR......................................................................................................... 5
COACH INTERIOR ....................................................................................................... 19
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS ............................................................................... 29
OTHER FEATURES ...................................................................................................... 89
STARTING AND STOPPING PROCEDURE............................................................... 123
SAFETY FEATURES AND EQUIPMENT.................................................................... 129
CARE AND MAINTENANCE....................................................................................... 143
TECHNICAL INFORMATION ...................................................................................... 163
ABBREVIATIONS ....................................................................................................... 175
APPENDIX A – SERVICE LITERATURE.................................................................... 177
APPENDIX B – TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE FOR MULTIPLEX VEHICLES .......... 181
APPENDIX C – ALLISON DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES ................. 187
APPENDIX D – SPHEROS PREHEATER FLASH CODES ........................................ 199
APPENDIX E – TPMS TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE................................................ 201
INDEX ......................................................................................................................... 203
Safety Precautions
1
SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES ................................................................................................................ 2
DEFENSIVE DRIVING PRACTICES............................................................................................................ 2
OTHER PRECAUTIONS .............................................................................................................................. 3
2
Safety Precautions
SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES
To ensure safe and reliable operation, heed the
following safety precautions.
•
Operation and maintenance of the vehicle
must be performed only by qualified
personnel.
•
Before driving, conduct a walk around
inspection and check that all baggage
compartment doors and equipment access
doors are securely shut.
•
Make sure good visibility is maintained at all
times. Keep windshields clean and free of
obstructions.
•
Adjust the driver's seat so that all controls
can be reached easily.
•
Always wear your safety belt when driving.
•
Check the instrument panel frequently. Do
not operate the vehicle when dials or
indicators do not indicate normal operating
conditions.
•
Always pay attention to pedestrians passing
in front and behind the vehicle. Always yield
to pedestrians at pedestrian walkways.
•
Do not drive over obstacles on the road.
Empty boxes, piles of leaves, and snowdrifts
could conceal hidden dangers that could
damage the vehicle suspension and
underbody.
•
When turning or changing lanes, signal your
intention well in advance.
•
•
Do not run the engine or HVAC system with
access doors left open. Close compartment
doors before operating any equipment.
•
Do not remove the surge tank filler cap or
the cooling system pressure cap when the
engine is hot. Let the engine cool down
before removing filler caps.
•
Do not attempt to push or pull-start the
vehicle.
•
The service life of the vehicle depends on
the kind of maintenance it receives. Always
record any problems and report them
immediately to maintenance personnel.
DEFENSIVE DRIVING PRACTICES
•
For city driving, allow a four to six second
travel interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Increase this travel interval to
six to eight seconds for highway driving.
Increase time interval for driving at night or
in foul weather.
•
Be prepared to stop when approaching an
intersection. The stopping distance of the
vehicle increases with the weight and speed.
•
Establish eye-to-eye contact with other
drivers and with pedestrians. Use, high
beam and low beam headlights, turn signals
and horn as needed.
•
On highway, don't stare at the road ahead.
Keep your eyes moving. Check mirrors and
dashboard instruments frequently.
When approaching to make a right turn,
reduce the space between the vehicle and
the curb to make sure another vehicle
cannot pass on the right. Since the vehicle
makes wide turns, allow enough space to
make safe turns.
•
To keep the vehicle from drifting across
lanes during highway driving, always look
over the horizon on the road ahead.
•
Adjust your speed to road conditions, traffic
and visibility. Never exceed the posted
speed limits.
•
Switch from high beams to low beams when
meeting or following other vehicles within
500 feet (150 meters).
•
If another vehicle is following close behind,
reduce your speed to let the vehicle pass.
•
•
Never leave the vehicle unattended with the
engine running or with the key in the ignition.
Turn off the engine, remove keys and apply
the parking brake before leaving the vehicle.
For additional information about safe
operation and defensive driving practices,
contact the local department of motor
vehicles authority.
•
Shut-off the engine before refueling, adding
oil, performing maintenance or servicing
tasks, unless stated otherwise.
•
Fuel is highly flammable and explosive. Do
not smoke when refueling. Keep away from
open flames or sparks.
Safety Precautions
OTHER PRECAUTIONS
DANGER
Make sure that electrical current or air
pressure is removed before performing any
work. A part may be energized even if the
ignition switch is OFF. A part may be under
pressure even if all tanks are empty. Before
performing any work on the vehicle, refer to
wiring diagrams and/or air schematics to
thoroughly understand the system.
CAUTION
Disconnect all electronic control modules
before welding. If modules (ECM, TCM, ECU,
ABS) are not disconnected before welding is
done, there is a high risk of destroying the
electronic components (EPROM, Chip). Refer
to procedure described in Maintenance
Manual.
3
Coach Exterior
5
ENGINE COMPARTMENT COMPONENTS................................................................................................ 7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT........................................................................................................................... 8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CURB-SIDE DOOR ..................................................................................... 8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT REAR DOORS............................................................................................. 8
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM ACCESS DOOR...................................................................... 9
ENGINE RADIATOR DOOR ........................................................................................................................ 9
CATALYTIC CONVERTER ACCESS DOOR .............................................................................................. 9
CONDENSER COMPARTMENT (A/C)...................................................................................................... 10
EVAPORATOR COMPARTMENT ............................................................................................................. 10
COOLANT HEATER COMPARTMENT..................................................................................................... 11
FRONT ELECTRICAL AND SERVICE COMPARTMENT ........................................................................ 11
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENTS.................................................................................................................. 12
SPARE WHEEL COMPARTMENT ............................................................................................................ 13
FUEL AND DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) FILLER DOOR.................................................................. 13
ENTRANCE DOOR .................................................................................................................................... 14
DOOR OPERATION LOGIC.................................................................................................................. 14
EMERGENCY ENTRANCE DOOR OPENING ..................................................................................... 15
WHEELCHAIR LIFT ACCESS DOORS..................................................................................................... 15
REAR VIEW MIRRORS.............................................................................................................................. 15
BACK-UP CAMERA................................................................................................................................... 16
110-120 VOLTS CONNECTOR.................................................................................................................. 16
HUBODOMETER........................................................................................................................................ 16
TRAILER HITCH......................................................................................................................................... 16
6
Coach Exterior
X3-45 EXTERIOR VIEW (TYPICAL)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Engine air intake
Engine compartment curb-side door
Hinged rear fender
Baggage compartment
Fuel filler door
Condenser compartment
Entrance door control switch
Entrance door
Engine compartment rear doors
Rear-view mirrors
Spare wheel compartment
Front electrical and service compartment
Driver’s power window
Evaporator compartment and coolant heater compartment
Radiator door
Catalytic converter access door
Exhaust aftertreatment system access door
18606
Coach Exterior
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT COMPONENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT FEATURING VOLVO D13 ENGINE
01184
1. Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) & Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Assembly;
2. Transmission fluid dipstick (if equipped with Allison transmission);
3. Coolant fluid surge tank filler cap;
4. Coolant fluid surge tank sight glass;
5. Air filter restriction indicator;
6. Engine oil dipstick;
7. Belt tensioner control valve;
8. Starter selector switch and Engine rear start push-button switch, Engine compartment Lights Switch;
9. Power steering fluid reservoir;
10. Radiator fan;
11. Radiator fan drive mechanism support;
12. Alternators;
13. Engine oil filler tube;
14. Central A/C compressor;
15. Air filter;
16. Auxiliary A/C compressor (if equipped with parcel rack cooling system);
Coach Exterior
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CURB-SIDE DOOR
The engine compartment curb-side door
provides access to the following (if equipped):
•
Engine compartment rear doors release
handle;
•
Booster terminals;
•
Rear electrical panel;
•
Rear junction panel;
•
Battery compartment;
ENGINE COMPARTMENT R.H. SIDE
•
Fuel filter/water separator (Optional);
•
Air circuit fill valve and drain cock;
A telltale light illuminates when one or more
compartments are unlocked.
•
Sump tank access cap;
•
110 - 120 volt connector;
•
Lavatory
maintenance
connectors;
•
Fresh water reservoir fill connector;
valve
and
18607
ENGINE COMPARTMENT REAR DOORS
To open the engine compartment rear doors,
open the engine compartment curb side door
and pull the handle located on the rear door,
close to the bottom door hinge.
WARNING
Unless otherwise stated, do not run the
engine when the engine compartment is
open.
These doors swing out to provide access to the
following:
•
Engine;
•
Alternator(s);
•
Compressor(s);
•
Belt tension control valve (refer to chapter,
Care and Maintenance);
•
Engine starting selector (refer to chapter,
Starting and Stopping Procedures);
•
Coolant line shutoff valves;
•
Certification plates;
NOTE
•
Engine coolant surge tank and filler cap;
This compartment can be locked/unlocked
using the central locking system by pressing
the switch located on the L.H. side dashboard
panel.
•
Air filter restriction indicator;
•
Engine oil dipstick;
•
Power steering fluid reserve tank;
•
Allison automatic transmission fluid dipstick;
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CURB-SIDE DOOR
18559
This door can be locked or unlocked using the
exterior compartment key or, if so equipped, by
the central door locking system. To open, push
sideways on the small lever located between the
marker lights.
Coach Exterior
A catch holding each door open engages when
the door is fully open. Release the catches
before closing the doors. Close the L.H. door
first, then firmly shut the R.H. door.
9
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM ACCESS DOOR
The engine door must be
open before opening the
exhaust
aftertreatment
system access door. To
open the access door,
lower the latch release
lever, using a flat tip
screwdriver.
To close the door, lower the door and push
against the release lever spring to latch the door
shut.
ENGINE RADIATOR DOOR
Open the engine radiator door by pushing the
release lever sideways.
RADIATOR DOOR
OPENING ENGINE COMPARTMENT REAR DOORS
18608
Turn the lights ON in the engine compartment
using the switch on the rear start panel.
WARNING
Unless otherwise specified, do not run engine
when the engine compartment rear doors are
open. Close the engine compartment rear
doors before starting the engine.
18560
CATALYTIC CONVERTER ACCESS
DOOR
To gain access to the catalytic converter, open
the radiator door first. At the top of the radiator
compartment, pull the catch connecting rod to
unlock the catalytic converter access door and
lift the door open.
Hold the door open by inserting the support rod
free end into the receptacle located on the left
side of the DPF.
10
Coach Exterior
CONDENSER COMPARTMENT (A/C)
ACCESS TO THE CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING
After inserting the support rod into the
receptacle, make sure the rod supports the
door securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
WARNING
EVAPORATOR COMPARTMENT
The HVAC (Heating, Ventilating and AirConditioning) evaporator blower and coolant
heater are located in this compartment. The
compartment door release latch is located on
the right side of the baggage compartment and
to the left of the HVAC compartment door. Pull
the release latch then swing the HVAC
compartment door open.
External and internal temperatures remain hot
long after engine has been shutdown. Allow
the Exhaust Aftertreatment System to cool
before handling. Wear protective clothing and
glove while servicing.
CONDENSER COMPARTMENT (A/C)
Pull the release latch located inside the adjacent
baggage compartment to open the condenser
door.
The condenser compartment provides access to
the following:
•
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
•
Condenser;
•
Condenser fans and motors;
•
Filter dryer and moisture indicator;
•
Receiver tank;
22299
04023
EVAPORATOR COMPARTMENT
Coach Exterior
compartment and accessible
evaporator compartment door.
EVAPORATOR COMPARTMENT
through
11
the
22274
COOLANT HEATER COMPARTMENT
The water recirculating pump is also located in
the engine coolant heater compartment.
RECIRCULATION DAMPER
22302
In case of damage or malfunction of the
evaporator compartment door release latch, the
door can still be opened using the access hole
located forward of the compartment.
Insert a small rod through the access hole to
release the latch.
EVAPORATOR COMPARTMENT DOOR RELEASE LATCH
ACCESS HOLE
COOLANT HEATER COMPARTMENT
The vehicle may be equipped with the optional
preheater located aft of the evaporator
compartment, inside the engine coolant heater
FRONT ELECTRICAL AND SERVICE
COMPARTMENT
To open the front electrical and service
compartment door, pull the rod inside the
vehicle, next to the driver’s power window or use
the key to open from outside the coach. The
front electrical and service compartment
provides access to the following:
•
Front terminal block;
•
VECU with Volvo D13 engine;
•
Vehicle Electrical Center Front (VECF),
CECM and Multiplex Modules;
•
Relays and fuses;
•
ABS Electronic Control Unit (ECU);
•
Emergency door opening unlatch valve;
•
Windshield washer reservoir & headlights
washer reservoir (optional);
•
Accessory system fill valve;
•
Accessory air tank drain valve;
•
Jack and tools.
12
Coach Exterior
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENTS
The baggage compartments of the X3-45 Coach
provide 406 ft3 (11.5 m3) of storage capacity.
The compartments can be locked or unlocked
by using the exterior compartment key. Pull up
operating handle to release the latch, and then
pull the door open. Pressurized cylinders assist
the opening and closing of the baggage
compartment doors and hold the doors open.
FRONT SERVICE COMPARTMENT DOOR
18610
This compartment door can be locked/unlocked
using the exterior compartment key.
The light in the front electrical and service
compartment turns ON automatically when the
door is opened.
NOTE
Jack and tools are located inside the front
electrical and service compartment.
BAGGAGE DOOR LOCK AND LEVER
18043
To close, pull the door down by the handle rod.
Complete the closing of the door by returning
the operating handle to its initial position.
CAUTION
Do not slam shut the baggage compartment
doors. Damage to door weather-stripping or
locking mechanism could result.
Lights in the baggage compartments turn ON
automatically when the door is opened.
FRONT ELECTRICAL COMPARTMENT
06673
BAGGAGE DOOR CATCH
FRONT SERVICE COMPARTMENT
18611
18612
Coach Exterior
13
NOTE
For added safety, open the door until the
catch assist in holding the door in the open
position.
NOTE
SPARE WHEEL IN FRONT BUMPER COMPARTMENT 18614
The baggage compartment doors can be
locked/unlocked from the driver's position by
the optional central locking system. The switch
is on the L.H. control panel. Refer to "Controls
& Instruments" chapter.
WARNING
To avoid injury, keep hands clear of baggage
compartment door edge and door frame when
closing.
NOTE
To prevent theft and vandalism, always lock
the baggage compartment doors before
leaving the vehicle unattended.
SPARE WHEEL COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Although a powerful spring assists in reclining
the bumper, it remains heavy and rests low
when open. Caution should be used when
reclining.
Check that bumper is securely closed shut
before driving.
FUEL AND DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
(DEF) FILLER DOOR
The fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) filler
door is located on the R.H. side of the coach
providing easy filling. A spring keeps the door
either open or shut. A key is provided for
unlocking the door if the option was chosen.
The front bumper can be tilted downward to give
access to the spare wheel.
WARNING
The compartment behind the bumper is not
designed for miscellaneous storage. Never
store loose objects in this compartment since
they can interfere with the steering linkage
mechanism.
Pull the release handle located inside front
service compartment to tilt down the entire
bumper assembly.
FUEL & DEF FILLER DOOR
03046
NOTE
Provided the vehicle is parked on level
ground, an automatic nozzle will automatically
shut off when fuel tank is approximately 95%
full.
NOTE
The fuel & DEF filler door must be in the
unlocked position before closing
RELEASE HANDLE
18613
14
Coach Exterior
Refer to “Controls and Instruments” chapter for
more information.
CAUTION
Diesel exhaust fluid DEF will begin to
crystallize and freeze at 12°F (-11°C) and
expand by 7% when frozen. To allow
expansion without damaging the DEF tank, do
not fill the tank with more than 15.9 gallons
(60 liters).
CAUTION
Do not fill to more than 95% of the fuel tank
capacity. Do not "top off" the tank, doing so
may result in fuel spillage when the fuel
expands.
ENTRANCE DOOR
Lock or unlock the entrance door from outside
the vehicle by turning the key in the door lock
(counterclockwise to lock, clockwise to unlock).
From outside, open the door by pushing the
switch forward, close by pushing the switch
rearward.
ENTRANCE DOOR
18001
The only way to unlock the entrance door from
the inside is by sliding its lock lever to the left. If
the orange tab on the door-lock lever is visible,
the door is unlocked.
ENTRANCE DOOR & WIPER CONTROL PANEL
ENTRANCE DOOR EXTERIOR SWITCH
18599
From the inside, open the door by pressing the
door opening switch (L.H. button) on the R.H.
dashboard panel. Close by pressing the door
closing switch (R.H. button) on the dashboard.
06614
DOOR OPERATION LOGIC
If the switch is held in position until the door is
fully open or closed, the system holds pressure
in the door cylinder, locking the door in that
position. The door can be opened to any
position by releasing the switch (or button, if
inside) when the desired position is attained.
However, the door is not locked in any position
other than fully open or fully closed. The door
can then be opened or closed further by pushing
or pulling on the door.
A proximity sensor will finish the closing of the
door when it senses the door is almost shut.
Coach Exterior
This works even when the door is shut
manually.
EMERGENCY ENTRANCE DOOR OPENING
Refer to “Safety Features and Equipment”
chapter.
15
REAR VIEW MIRRORS
The vehicle is equipped with flat-type and
convex-type rear-view mirrors. Convex mirrors
give a wide angle view. Objects viewed in
convex-type rear-view mirrors appear smaller
and are actually closer than they appear.
WHEELCHAIR LIFT ACCESS DOORS
To open the optional wheelchair lift access
doors, the coach must be parked on a flat and
level surface with the parking brake on. Using
the exterior compartment doors key, unlock and
carefully lower the lift mechanism access door
which is part of the baggage compartment door.
The lift mechanism access door is located
directly below the wheelchair access door. A
handle at the left of the lift mechanism unlocks
and enables opening of the wheelchair access
door. If the parking brake is not activated, a
switch in the door will activate the parking brake
when it detects the door is open.
REAR VIEW MIRRORS
18668
To provide good visibility in cold weather, the
mirrors can be equipped with heating elements.
The elements are activated by a rocker switch
located on the dashboard. Refer to "Controls &
Instruments" chapter. Thermostats are used to
prevent continuous operation of the heating
elements.
CAUTION
WHEELCHAIR LIFT ACCESS DOORS
18615
Open the wheelchair access door completely
until it locks in the open position. To close the
door, pull on the tab located on the inside of the
door and slam the door shut. Refer to “Other
Features” for more information on operating the
optional wheelchair lift.
Do not attach stick-on type convex mirror
accessories to the heated mirror glass. This
could impede uniform heat distribution on the
mirror surface and could break the mirror
glass.
As an option, the mirrors may be equipped with
LED turning signal lights to give an additional
signal light when turning or changing lane for
extra safety or for other divers to see your signal
when driving too close, in rain, fog or when in
blind spot.
The mirrors are adjusted using the controls
located on the L.H. control panel. Refer to
"Controls & Instruments" chapter. Manual
adjustment is also possible.
WHEELCHAIR ACCESS DOOR OPERATING HANDLE 18616
16
Coach Exterior
BACK-UP CAMERA
An optional back-up camera is available which
provides the driver with visual assistance when
backing-up. Camera monitor is installed on the
dashboard L.H. side, on the windshield post. For
additional information, refer to "Controls &
Instruments".
110-120 VOLTS CONNECTOR
This connector is connected to the electric block
heater and uses a 110-120 VAC power source.
It is located near the engine compartment rear
doors release handle. (Refer to chapter “Starting
and Stopping Procedures”).
HUBODOMETER
13012
TRAILER HITCH
20 000 lb max. Gross trailer weight capacity
(optional)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a factory
installed trailer hitch which has been designed to
meet the following rating:
PRISE DE 110-120 VOLTS
06390
HUBODOMETER
An odometer is installed on the curb-side drive
axle wheel hub. The odometer calculates the
total distance in miles or kilometers (depending
on model installed) traveled by the coach since
manufacture, including factory road testing.
NOTE
It is normal for the hubodometer, the engine
ECM and the vehicle odometer to disagree on
the total mileage.
TRAILER HITCH
23337
•
Maximum gross trailer weight: 20,000 lb
(9072 kg)
•
Maximum tongue weight at 6 1/2 inches
(165 mm) or less from coupling receiver:
1,500 lb (680 kg)
DANGER
The draw bar and the ball used for towing the
trailer should be rated for 20,000 lbs capacity
or more.
Coach Exterior
WARNING
Pulling a trailer weighing more than the
recommended maximum gross weight may
cause engine and transmission overheating,
and also possible hitch failure.
17
coupling ball socket.
4. Two lengths of safety chain shall be used.
The strength rating (minimum breaking
force) of each individual chain and its
connecting means shall be equal to, or
exceed the trailer GVWR.
5. Towing vehicle must be equipped with
NOTE
Pulling a trailer over long distances is
considered as a "severe operating condition"
for the vehicle and therefore, power plant
requires more frequent servicing.
NOTE
The minimum requirement for a trailer
weighing up to 20,000 lbs when coupled to a
20,000 lb Prévost Trailer Hitch is as per the
following:
1. Trailer must comply with Federal Motor
Carrier Safety Regulations 393.52
regarding trailer breaking capability.
2. The trailer coupling attachments meet the
following minimum static test load
requirements :
o Longitudinal tension and compression:
(1.5 x GVWR of trailer)
o Transverse thrust: (0.5 x GVWR of
trailer)
o Vertical tension and compression: (0.5
x GVWR of trailer)
Loads indicated must be applied without
incurring loss of attachments or distortion or
failure which could affect the safe towing of
trailer.
3. The ball and trailer coupling should meet
the
following
minimum
test
load
requirements without incurring failure:
o Longitudinal tension and compression:
(Gross Trailer Weight of trailer x 3)
o Transverse thrust: (Gross Trailer
Weight of trailer x 1)
o Vertical tension and compression:
(Gross Trailer Weight of trailer x 1.3)
In this case, failure is identified as the point at
which the coupling or ball will accept no
additional test load without separation of the
ball from the coupling ball socket, or the
occurrence of a metal fracture of either
coupling ball or coupling assembly, which
results in separation of the ball from the
engine or transmission retarder. The
engine or the transmission retarder on the
vehicle must be functional at all time (to be
inspected frequently).
Coach Interior
19
ELECTRONIC DESTINATION SIGN ......................................................................................................... 20
UTILITY COMPARTMENTS....................................................................................................................... 20
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................................................... 20
AISLE MIRROR .......................................................................................................................................... 20
ADJUSTABLE HVAC REGISTERS........................................................................................................... 20
DRIVER'S SEAT – ISRI.............................................................................................................................. 21
MECHANICAL ISRI SEAT......................................................................................................................................21
PNEUMATIC ISRI SEAT ........................................................................................................................................22
SAFETY BELTS .....................................................................................................................................................23
TOUR GUIDE SEAT ................................................................................................................................... 24
MICROPHONE JACKS .............................................................................................................................. 24
PASSENGER SEATS................................................................................................................................. 24
SWIVEL SEATS .....................................................................................................................................................24
FOLDING TRAYS...................................................................................................................................................24
CARD TABLES ......................................................................................................................................................25
QUICK-LOUNGE SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................................25
OVERHEAD CONSOLE ............................................................................................................................. 25
ADJUSTABLE AIR REGISTERS............................................................................................................................26
SERVICE BELL ......................................................................................................................................................26
READING LIGHTS .................................................................................................................................................26
WINDOWS .................................................................................................................................................. 26
PANORAMIC WINDOWS ......................................................................................................................................26
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW................................................................................................................................27
VENTILATION HATCH............................................................................................................................... 27
OVERHEAD COMPARTMENTS................................................................................................................ 27
WASTE CONTAINER................................................................................................................................. 28
GALLEY...................................................................................................................................................... 28
LAVATORY ................................................................................................................................................ 28
20
Coach Interior
ELECTRONIC DESTINATION SIGN
Turn the optional destination sign lighting on and
off using the rocker switch located on the
dashboard. Refer to Controls & Instruments
chapter.
Depress the selecting switches until the desired
destination appears in the Liquid Crystal Display.
UTILITY COMPARTMENTS
18602
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
ELECTRONIC DESTINATION SIGN
23123
NOTE
The destination sign must be programmed with
a computer connected to the RS-232 connector
prior to first use. Follow the instructions on the
computer disk to install and run the software.
Push on the valve button located in the footoperated control housing to unlock the steering
wheel for tilt and telescopic adjustment (refer to
“Controls and Instruments“ chapter).
UTILITY COMPARTMENTS
Two lockable utility compartments are located at
the base of the windshield. Another utility
compartment is located on the console, and
includes a 12 volt appliance socket.
TILT AND TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT
18670
DANGER
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Loss of control could result. Park the vehicle
safely and apply parking brakes before
adjusting the steering wheel.
AISLE MIRROR
A central mirror allows the driver to see in the
aisle. Adjust mirror manually.
ADJUSTABLE HVAC REGISTERS
UTILITY COMPARTMENT IN CONSOLE
18669
The HVAC system has adjustable registers to
control air flow around the driver’s area. Three
are located on the dashboard; two on the R.H.
Coach Interior
21
side and one on the L.H. (refer to Controls &
Instruments chapter). Another one is located
close to the door, below the modesty panel wall
for step de-icing. The direction and volume of
air flow are adjustable manually.
Use the HVAC control panel to set air
temperature.
AIR REGISTER
22249
DRIVER’S SEAT - ISRI
The coach is equipped with one of two models
of ISRI driver's seats. Standard is the
mechanically adjusted seat and pneumatic
model is available as an option. Both seats are
equipped with safety belts. Lumbar supports,
heated cushions and adjustable armrests are
optional.
DANGER
The driver’s seat must be adjusted to allow the
driver easy access to the coach controls.
Never adjust seat while driving vehicle as this
could result in loss of vehicle control.
DANGER
DRIVER’S SEAT ADJUSTMENT (MECHANICAL)
Armrest
The driver’s seat can be
equipped with two folding
armrests.
18334
Adjustment
Seat can be adjusted to the desired driving
position by following the instructions listed
below:
To lower the armrest:
•
Turn control knob #1 (refer to figure: Driver’s
seat adjustment (mechanical)) counterclockwise without applying pressure on the
armrest
•
Push the armrest down.
•
Repeat procedure until desired position is
reached.
To raise the armrest, move it to the desired
position and turn control knob clockwise until it
stops.
Backrest
Lift lever #2 then adjust backrest
to the desired angle.
Make sure that seat is adjusted and that safety
belt is buckled up before diving vehicle.
MECHANICAL ISRI SEAT
18333
18335
Tilt (front)
To lower or raise the seat's front
section, pull handle #3 up and
push or pull the seat cushion.
18336
22
Coach Interior
Tilt (rear)
DANGER
To lower or raise the seat's rear
section, pull handle #4 up and
push or pull the seat cushion.
18337
For best protection, position headrest behind
your head, not behind your neck.
PNEUMATIC ISRI SEAT
WARNING
To avoid pinching the fingers between buckle
and controls, lower safety belt buckle before
adjusting seat height
Up and Down
Pull both handles (3 and 4) up to
adjust height of the seat.
18338
Fore and Aft
To adjust distance between driver
and dashboard, pull handle #5 up
and slide the seat forward or
backward.
18339
NOTE
Fore-and-aft seat adjustment control may also
be located at the front of the seat.
PNEUMATIC DRIVER’S SEAT
18385
Armrest (1)
Rotate control knob to select desired arm-resting
angle. When not in use, raise armrest parallel
with backrest.
Seat Cushion (2)
Suspension
For
maximum
mechanical
suspension
performance,
rotate
handwheel #6 until your body weight
(in pounds) is shown on the indicator.
The seat suspension resistance can be changed
to suit the driver. Turn handwheel clockwise to
increase suspension resistance and counterclockwise to decrease resistance.
Lumbar Support
To inflate the upper lumbar support
bellows, depress the front rocker
switch #7 upward. To deflate, depress
the rocker switch downward.
Follow the same procedure to inflate and deflate
the lower bellows using the rear rocker switch.
Headrest
The headrest can be adjusted
forward, rearward and vertically by
2 inches (50 mm). Directly move
headrest to desired position.
Provides optimum comfort and support for any
driver size. Adjustable to 50 mm (2 inch) length.
Fore-and-aft (3)*
Pull handle up and slide seat forwards or
backwards to adjust distance between seat and
dashboard.
Isolator (4)
Reduces horizontal vibration, ensuring smooth
ride.
Backrest (5)
Lift lever to select proper angle of backrest.
Air Side Bolster (6)
Offers desired side support to avoid body sideway.
Coach Interior
23
Air Lumbar (7) (8)
NOTE
Provides back support with upper and lower
settings, ensuring comfort during lengthy sitting.
The safety belt must be pulled out slowly and
continuously, otherwise it will lock the reel
before the latch plate reaches the buckle. If
this happens, allow the belt to retract
completely and repeat the procedure correctly.
Air Height Adjustment (9)
Moves seat up or down independently of other
seat settings. 100 mm (4 inch) total travel.
Adjustable Seat Recline (10)
Allows easy
inclination.
adjustment
of
four-setting
Adjustable Shock Absorber (11)
Choose stiff or soft ride infinitely.
Quick Air Release (12)
Exhausts all air from suspension, allowing for
easy entry/exit. Returns seat to previous
position.
SAFETY BELTS
The driver’s seat is equipped with a retractable
safety belt as required by State, Provincial and
Federal regulations. To fasten, pull seat belt out
of the retractor and insert the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks. No special adjustment is
required since the reel device is self-adjusting.
If seat belt operation becomes defective, report
to maintenance personnel immediately.
FASTENING SEATBELT
WARNING
A snug fit with the lap belt positioned low on
the hips is necessary to maximize driver
safety. The belt should not be worn twisted.
Avoid pinching belt and/or belt hardware in
seat mechanism. Do not wear belt over rigid or
breakable objects, such as eyeglasses, pens
or keys as these may cause injuries.
CAUTION
Never bleach or dry clean safety belt.
To unfasten belt, press the red button in center
of buckle and allow belt to retract. If the belt
does not fully retract, pull it out and check for
kinks or twists. Make sure that it remains
untwisted as it retracts.
DANGER
Most State and Provincial laws require that
safety belts be worn when they are supplied
with the seat.
18028
UNFASTENING SEATBELT
18029
24
Coach Interior
TOUR GUIDE SEAT
PASSENGER SEATS
Passenger seats may be equipped with grip
handles, ashtrays, newspaper holders, trays, cup
holders and footrests.
PASSENGER SEAT EQUIPMENT
TOUR GUIDE SEAT
18347
The optional folding tour guide seat is equipped
with a retractable arm rest and safety belt. The
seat can be folded up for convenience when
embarking and disembarking passengers.
The tour guide seat can be removed and stored
in the first baggage compartment. To remove the
seat from the stairwell wall, unscrew and remove
the two anchoring pins and washers at the bottom
of the seat assembly. Raise and unhook the seat
assembly.
DANGER
Make sure tour guide's safety belt is buckled up
prior to departure.
MICROPHONE JACKS
Up to six microphone jacks for the PA system can
be located in the following locations:
•
On the side wall of the driver's control panel;
•
On the right hand side of the dashboard;
•
One optional outlet for the tour guide on
each of the modesty panels;
•
One optional outlet on the lavatory wall,
behind the last row of seats;
•
One optional outlet under the overhead
storage compartment, at the rear of the
coach.
18121A
All seats are track-mounted so that the seating
configuration can be changed. Each set is
mounted on rectangular aluminum bases to make
cleaning between the base and side wall easier.
Passenger seat backrests can be tilted by using
the push-button located on the base of the seat.
Depress and hold push-button, then adjust
backrest to the desired angle. Release pushbutton to lock backrest in position.
A folding armrest is installed on the aisle side of
the passenger. Another folding armrest is located
between the two seats and can be raised for
passenger convenience. A fixed armrest is
installed on the window side of the seat.
SWIVEL SEATS
The coach may be equipped with two sets of
swivel seats to allow installation of card tables.
The swivel seat can be rotated for passenger
privacy. To rotate seats, unscrew the wing nut
from under each seat cushion then remove
cushions. Remove the four wing screws, pull
seats toward the aisle and rotate the seat
counter-clockwise. Align mounting holes, secure
with wing screws and install seat cushions.
NOTE
Instructions for making swivel seat adjustments
are affixed on the rear frame under the seat
cushion.
FOLDING TRAYS
Two optional folding tray models can be installed
in the coach.
Coach Interior
25
configuration it replaces. The existing seat
spacing remains unchanged.
FOLDING TRAY MODELS
23140
NOTE
Both tray models as well as the tray installed
onto each modesty panel, are equipped with
tumbler holders.
CARD TABLES
QUICK-LOUNGE SYSTEM
Two card tables are provided as standard
equipment and are used in the passenger swivel
seat configuration. The card tables are stored in
the overhead storage compartments in separate
stowage bags.
To install the card table, hold it at 45o (degrees) to
the side wall. Insert the spring-loaded pin then the
locking pin into the hinge. Push on the locking
clamp to release the leg. Unfold the leg until the
clamp locks it in position.
CARD TABLE INSTALLATION
18395
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
One airplane type overhead console is installed
above each row of twin seats to provide a total
of 107 ft3 (3.0 m3) of storage capacity. Such
amenities as reading lights, air vents and an
optional service bell are controlled from this
panel.
23146
QUICK-LOUNGE SYSTEM
"Quick-Lounge" is a quick-fit modular system
providing luxurious seating accommodations for
passengers.
The optional “Quick-Lounge” system occupies
the same space as the paired seating
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
23137
26
Coach Interior
ADJUSTABLE AIR REGISTERS
Emergency Windows
Manually adjustable registers located on the
overhead console provide air flow to the
passengers. Air flow can be directed, passengers
can orient individual registers by rotating the
nozzle. To adjust air flow, passengers must open
or close the flaps. Activation of the fans is done
by depressing a rocker switch on the dashboard.
Refer to Controls & Instruments chapter.
These windows can be opened from inside the
vehicle as emergency exits. A decal on window
sills indicates the location of the emergency
windows. To open an emergency window, lift the
window release bar (sill) and push the window
open from the bottom.
To close, lift the release bar and pull the window
into position. Push down on release bar to lock
the window shut.
SERVICE BELL
For more information on emergency features,
refer to “Safety Features and Equipment”
chapter.
Pressing the service button on the overhead
console will illuminate the button providing a
visual cue for service personnel and, if activated,
will sound a chime in the driver’s area. The chime
system is activated by a rocker switch located on
the dashboard. Refer to Controls & Instruments
chapter. Passengers may also use the chime
system to request a stop for disembarking. Press
the service button a second time to cancel the
service request. To adjust the chime volume
level, refer to “CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTS” chapter
under Audiovisual Controller.
READING LIGHTS
Reading lights are mounted underneath the
overhead storage compartments. Depressing a
rocker switch located on the dashboard (refer to
Controls & Instruments chapter) will activate the
reading light circuit and allow passenger control
of reading lights.
EMERGENCY WINDOW OPENING
18391
Window Sun Shades
WINDOWS
The coach is equipped with frameless flushmounted “Galaxsee” windows all around and a
split-window windshield for maximum visibility.
PANORAMIC WINDOWS
Panoramic side windows can come in either
single pane or, as an option, double pane
(thermopane) glass. Some of these windows
are of the fixed type; they are bonded to the
structure and cannot be opened. Others can be
easily opened to serve as emergency exits.
Fixed Windows
These windows are bonded to the structure and
form an integral part of the body of the vehicle,
helping reduce vibration and noise. Fixed
windows cannot be opened.
PULL DOWN SUN SHADES
18374
Coach Interior
Passenger windows may be equipped with pulldown sun shades. To operate, pull down the
shade and insert the hem into the first or second
catch. To retract pull out from the slots and
guide the shade back up.
DRIVER’S POWER WINDOW
The driver has a power window on the left side
of the coach. The windows are controlled by a
rocker switch located on the driver's control
panel. Refer to “Controls and Instruments”
chapter.
27
VENTILATION HATCH
A ventilation hatch may be installed in the ceiling
at the rear of the coach. A second, optional hatch
can be installed on the roof at the front of the
coach. To open the hatch, push up with both
hands and pull down to close. The ventilation
hatch can be completely opened for emergency
egress. Refer to “Safety Features and
Equipment” chapter.
Driver’s window shades
This vehicle is provided with a spring release
type sun shade on the driver’s left side window.
Another spring release type shade is available
on the optional driver’s guard. To operate, pull
down the shade by its hem to the appropriate
position and release. It will remain in position.
To raise, depress the unlocking lever and guide
the shade back up using the other hand.
Two electrically-operated shades are installed
behind the windshields. Two rocker switches on
the dashboard operate each shade individually.
Refer to “Controls and Instruments” chapter for
more information.
VENTILATION HATCH
WARNING
Be aware of coach overhead clearance when
traveling under overpasses with the ventilation
hatch(es) open. Check for maximum clearance
height.
OVERHEAD COMPARTMENTS
Release cord
Passenger carry on baggage is stored in
overhead compartments on each side of the
coach. A first aid kit is located in the first front
curb side overhead storage compartment. An
optional video cassette player and a CD player
may be installed in the first front driver’s side
overhead storage compartment.
To open the optional closed overhead storage
compartments, push the handle in to release the
latch, then let go. A pressurized cylinder opens
the door.
NOTE
SPRING RELEASE SUNSHADE
23019
The overhead storage compartments have a
minimum amount of separators installed so as
to quicken inspection for forgotten objects.
NOTE
An optional lock can be installed on the first
front
driver’s
side
overhead
storage
compartment door.
28
Coach Interior
If emergency assistance is required, the lavatory
occupant can actuate a buzzer that will sound in
driver's area. The buzzer's push-button (c/w
instruction label) is located on the inner curbside
wall of lavatory.
The lavatory has its own ventilation system that
operates only when the ignition switch is in the
"ON" position.
NOTE
This fan runs constantly when the ignition
switch located on the dashboard is in the "ON"
position.
OVERHEAD STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
18603
WASTE CONTAINER
The waste container is located on the lavatory
wall, and is accessible through an opening on
each side of the wall. A small door, located on
the aisle side, gives access to the waste
container for cleaning.
GALLEY
The optional galley may include features such
as a microwave oven and refrigerator to
accommodate hot or cold food and beverage
service. The galley's electrical power circuit is
activated by a rocker switch located on the
dashboard. Refer to “Controls & Instruments”
chapter.
LAVATORY
The lavatory is located in the rear curb side
corner of the coach. It is equipped with a
chemical flush toilet, bathroom tissue dispenser,
wash-basin, towel dispenser, waste container,
mirror and a hose outlet in a compartment
located over the mirror. A liquid soap dispenser
and moist towel dispenser are optional.
Locking the lavatory door from the inside will
illuminate a fluorescent light in the lavatory and
two outside signs to indicate occupation. One
sign is located on the outer wall of the lavatory
and another sign is located over the windshield.
A telltale light on the dashboard will illuminate to
inform the driver when the lavatory is occupied.
A night-light is permanently lit in the lavatory
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
LAVATORY
23235
Controls and Instruments
29
KEYS........................................................................................................................................................... 31
ENTRANCE DOOR AND EXTERIOR COMPARTMENT DOORS KEY .................................................................31
UTILITY COMPARTMENTS KEY ..........................................................................................................................31
FUEL FILLER DOOR KEY .....................................................................................................................................31
LAVATORY DOOR KEY ........................................................................................................................................31
UTILITY AND VIDEO COMPARTMENT KEY ........................................................................................................31
HAND TOWEL DISPENSER KEY..........................................................................................................................31
IGNITION SWITCH ..................................................................................................................................... 31
LATERAL CONTROL PANEL ................................................................................................................... 34
TRANSMISSION CONTROL PAD .........................................................................................................................35
CONTROL SWITCHES ..........................................................................................................................................35
MIRROR CONTROLS ............................................................................................................................................36
TAG AXLE CONTROL VALVE...............................................................................................................................36
PARKING BRAKES CONTROL VALVE.................................................................................................................36
COOLANT HEATER TIMER ..................................................................................................................................36
LOW BUOY CONTROL VALVE .............................................................................................................................36
CIGARETTE LIGHTER ..........................................................................................................................................36
ASHTRAY ..............................................................................................................................................................37
UTILITY COMPARTMENT .....................................................................................................................................37
12-VOLT APPLIANCES SOCKET..........................................................................................................................37
TRAILER AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE ...........................................................................................................37
EMERGENCY/PARKING BRAKES OVERRULE CONTROL VALVE...................................................... 37
BACK-UP CAMERA AND MONITOR........................................................................................................ 37
SCENIC VIEWING SYSTEM CAMERA ..................................................................................................... 37
DIAGNOSTIC DATA READER (DDR) RECEPTACLE ............................................................................. 37
AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (AFSS) .............................................. 37
CRUISE CONTROL.................................................................................................................................... 38
REGULAR CRUISE CONTROL .............................................................................................................................38
PREVOST AWARE – ADAPTIVE CRUISE BRAKING ...........................................................................................39
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) ................................................................................. 44
DASHBOARD............................................................................................................................................. 48
CONTROL SWITCHES ..........................................................................................................................................49
L.H. DASHBOARD PANEL ....................................................................................................................................49
R.H. DASHBOARD PANEL....................................................................................................................................52
HVAC CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................................................................54
AUDIO-VIDEO SELECTOR FOR THE PASSENGER’S AREA..............................................................................56
DASHBOARD RADIO/MP3/IPOD/CD PLAYER .....................................................................................................58
AIR VENTS ............................................................................................................................................................59
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .......................................................................................................................... 60
30
Controls and Instruments
ANALOG INDICATORS .........................................................................................................................................61
TELLTALE LIGHTS ................................................................................................................................................64
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY........................................................................................................................68
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS............................................................................................................ 77
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER ....................................................................................................................................77
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS ..........................................................................................................................78
HORNS ..................................................................................................................................................................79
TRANSMISSION RETARDER ...............................................................................................................................80
FOOT-OPERATED CONTROLS................................................................................................................ 80
BRAKE PEDAL.......................................................................................................................................................80
ACCELERATOR PEDAL........................................................................................................................................81
ALLISON AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION................................................................................................. 81
OPERATION .........................................................................................................................................................81
PUSHBUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR .......................................................................................................................81
MODE.....................................................................................................................................................................81
TRANSMISSION SERVICE INDICATOR...............................................................................................................82
DESCRIPTION OF AVAILABLE RANGES.............................................................................................................82
VOLVO I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION ............................................................................................................. 84
PUSHBUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR .......................................................................................................................84
DISPLAY ................................................................................................................................................................84
ACCELERATOR PEDAL........................................................................................................................................85
ECONOMY AND PERFORMANCE MODE............................................................................................................85
ECO-ROLL MODE (FREEWHEEL FUNCTION) ....................................................................................................85
LIMP HOME MODE................................................................................................................................................85
STARTING AND STOPPING .................................................................................................................................86
STARTING THE VEHICLE UPHILL AND DOWNHILL ...........................................................................................86
DRIVING ................................................................................................................................................................87
TOWING.................................................................................................................................................................88
Controls and Instruments
KEYS
Depending on options, up to eight different keys
are provided with the coach.
ENTRANCE
DOOR
AND
COMPARTMENT DOORS KEY
EXTERIOR
31
Use this key to lock or unlock the lockable utility
compartments and the lockable overhead
compartment containing the video cassette
player.
HAND TOWEL DISPENSER KEY
Use this key to open the hand towel dispenser.
Use this key to lock or unlock the entrance door,
the baggage doors the electrical and service
compartment doors, except the fuel filler door.
NOTE
It is also possible to lock or unlock the
baggage
compartments
and
engine
compartment R.H. side door from the inside
by means of the optional baggage
compartments locking system.
NOTE
Optional moist towel dispenser uses another
key.
IGNITION SWITCH
UTILITY COMPARTMENTS KEY
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
This key locks or unlocks the utility compartments and the utility drawer on the dashboard.
06354
Coaches may be equipped with an ignition lever
instead of an ignition key. Use the ignition switch
to activate the electrical circuit by turning it counterclockwise to the ACC position.
FUEL FILLER DOOR KEY (OPTION)
IGNITION KEY
Use this key to lock or unlock the fuel filler door.
LAVATORY DOOR KEY
Use this key to lock or unlock the lavatory.
UTILITY AND VIDEO COMPARTMENT KEY
To start the engine, turn the key clockwise to the
START position, and then release it. The key will
set to ON position.
CAUTION
When the vehicle is parked overnight or for an
extended period of time, the battery master
switch (ignition switch) should be set to the off
position.
32
Controls and Instruments
NOTE
On
When the battery master switch (ignition
switch) is set to the off position, all electrical
supply from the batteries is cut off, with the
exception of battery equalizer check module,
ECM ignition and power supply, Allison TCM,
I-Shift transmission ECU), coolant electronic,
coolant heater and water re-circulating pump,
pro-driver, power-verter, fire alarm and
entrance door.
To place ignition switch to ON, turn the key
clockwise to the first position. The key cannot be
removed when in this position.
The electrical circuits activated when the switch
is in the ACC position plus the transmission,
engine and accessories, ABS system, wipers,
dashboard cluster gauges and buzzers, air horn
and air dryer heater are activated when the
switch is in this position. Do not leave the key in
this position unless the engine is running.
The ignition switch doubles as the battery
master switch. Any position other than OFF
activates the electrical circuits. Electrical circuits
are also activated when the hazard switch is
depressed. Two auxiliary master switches in
series with the ignition switch are installed on
the vehicle; one is located on the rear electrical
panel and one in the engine compartment on the
rear start panel, for maintenance ease.
The ignition switch is located on the lower left
side of the dashboard. It has four positions:
Accessories
To operate the accessories only, turn the
ignition key counterclockwise to the “ACC”
position. The key cannot be removed when in
this position.
The electrical circuits are activated when the
switch is in this position or when the hazard
flashers are activated.
The features enabled when the switch is in the
ACC position are all those linked directly to the
battery plus the exterior temperature display, the
radio or entertainment system, exterior and
interior lighting.
Off
In the OFF position, ignition cannot take place.
The key can be removed when in this position.
The electrical circuits are not activated when the
switch is in this position. Only the accessories
connected directly to the batteries can be
activated. These are the coolant heater and
water pump, the battery master switch, the
baggage compartments locking system, the
entrance door and Message Center Display
(MCD). Maintain the switch in this position when
parked overnight or for an extended period.
NOTE
The battery master switch is on when the
hazard flashers are activated, even if the key
is in the off position.
Start
Turn the key clockwise to the second position
and release as soon as the engine starts. The
key will return to the ON position. If the engine
did not start, return the ignition key to the OFF
position before trying to restart the engine.
The ignition switch is equipped with a starter
protection which inhibits turning the key to the
START position if the key has not previously
been turned to the OFF position.
CAUTION
To avoid overheating the starter, do not
engage the starter for more than 15 seconds
at a time. Allow the starter to cool before trying
to restart the engine.
CAUTION
If the “starter on” indicator light remains
illuminated even after releasing the ignition
switch, stop the engine immediately and set
the battery master switch (ignition switch) to
the off position. Have the starter checked
immediately.
The features activated when the engine is
running are all those described above plus the
HVAC system and daytime running lights.
DANGER
Do not use ether or other combustible
starting aid fluid on any engine equipped with
an intake air preheater. If the engine is
equipped with a preheater, introduction of
ether or similar starting aids could cause a fire
or explosion resulting in severe property
damage, serious personal injury or death.
Controls and Instruments
DRIVER’S SECTION
1.
Lateral control panel
2.
Microphone
3.
DOT certification plate
4.
Diagnostic Data Reader (DDR) receptacle
5.
Foot operated steering wheel adjustment unlock air valve
6.
Driver’s utility compartment
7.
Dashboard
8.
Rear view monitor (optional)
9.
Front view scenic camera (optional)
10.
Front service door unlocking pull rod
33
18671
34
Controls and Instruments
LATERAL CONTROL PANEL
1.
Transmission control pad
2. Control switches
3.
Mirror controls
4.
Tag axle control valve
5.
Parking brakes control valve
6.
Coolant heater timer (option)
7. Low-buoy control valve (option)
8.
Cigarette Lighter (option)
9.
Ashtray (option)
10. Utility Compartment
11. 12-volt Appliances Socket
12. Trailer Air Supply Control Valve (option)
LATERAL CONTROL PANEL
06704
Controls and Instruments
TRANSMISSION CONTROL PAD (1)
The Allison or Volvo I-Shift transmission control
pad is located on the lateral control panel. Refer
to "Automatic Transmission" in this chapter for
operating instructions and more information.
35
NOTE
The parking brakes must be applied to allow
the use of the kneeling.
Horn Selector
CONTROL SWITCHES (2)
Cruise Control Switch
Use this switch the toggle
between the air horn and the
electric horn when pressing the
steering wheel center pad.
Depress the cruise rocker switch
to activate the cruise control. This
turns the system on. A led on the
switch shows that you can now set
the vehicle at a desired cruising
speed.
06700
Power Window Switch
06701
Use this rocker switch to open or
close the driver’s power window.
For operation of the cruise control, refer to
“Regular Cruise Control” or “Prevost Aware
Adaptive Cruise Braking” paragraph in this
chapter.
Kneeling / Front Axle Hi-Buoy (Optional)
Momentarily press the rocker
switch downwards to lower the
front end of the coach 4 inches
(100 mm). Momentarily press the
rocker switch upwards to raise the
coach to the normal driving
height. Refer to "OTHER FEATURES"
chapter for more information.
06338
CAUTION
Close power window when parked or leaving
the coach unattended.
06250
Press and hold the rocker switch upwards to
raise the front end of the coach 4 inches (100
mm). Release the rocker switch to return the
coach to the normal driving height.
Outside Rear View Mirror Heat (Optional)
Press this rocker switch to clear
fog, frost or thin ice from outside
mirror.
NOTE
The parking brakes must be applied to allow
the use of the kneeling.
Kneeling / Full Hi-Buoy (Optional)
Momentarily press the rocker
switch downwards to lower the
front end of the coach 4 inches
(100mm). Momentarily press the
rocker switch upwards to return
the coach to normal driving
height. Refer to "OTHER FEATURES"
0
6251
chapter.
Press and hold the rocker switch upwards to
raise the complete suspension of the coach 4
inches (100 mm). Release the rocker switch to
return the coach to the normal driving height.
06261
Baggage Compartments Locking System
This system enables locking all
baggage compartment doors and
engine compartment r.h. side
door by pressing the switch
forward. To unlock, press the
switch rearward.
06266
NOTE
Service compartment doors are not linked to
the baggage compartments locking system.
36
Controls and Instruments
NOTE
PARKING BRAKES CONTROL VALVE (5)
Doors must be unlocked using the key first,
they can then be unlocked or locked using the
baggage compartments locking system.
Spring-loaded parking brakes are applied by
pulling up the control valve knob and protector
assembly. Lift the safety cover and push down
to release brakes. Refer to “Safety Features and
Equipment" chapter.
MIRROR CONTROLS (OPTION) (3)
COOLANT HEATER TIMER (OPTION) (6)
Convex
Use the timer to program the start time of the
optional engine coolant heater. Refer to "Other
Features" chapter and supplied manufacturer’s
manual for additional information.
Flat
LOW-BUOY CONTROL VALVE (OPTION) (7)
MIRROR CONTROLS
06374
Turn left pointer knob counterclockwise for flat
mirror adjustments and to the right for convex
mirror adjustments, then use the joystick control
to adjust the selected mirror’s viewing angle.
Adjust the right outside mirror similarly but by
using the right side control.
Toggle back the control lever to lower the coach
by about four inches. Returning the lever to the
normal (forward) position raises the vehicle back
to its normal height.
NOTE
If the mirror assemblies on your vehicle do not
include convex mirrors, only one (1) mirror
control knob will be installed for both mirrors.
To operate, turn knob to the left for l.h. mirror
adjustments and to the right for r.h. mirror
adjustments, then use the joystick control to
adjust the selected mirror’s viewing angle.
TAG AXLE CONTROL VALVE (4)
Lift the tag axle by pushing the lever forward.
Pulling the lever back will lower the tag axle.
Refer to "Other Features" chapter for additional
information.
Safety cover
Tag axle lever
LOW-BUOY CONTROL VALVE
16088
CAUTION
Do not exceed speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h)
when activated.
CIGARETTE LIGHTER (OPTION) (8)
Push lighter in to activate. When ready to use, it
will spring out automatically. Replace lighter in
non-activated position. The cigarette lighter
socket can be used to power 12-volt appliances
(e.g. flashlight, vacuum cleaner). The maximum
power consumption allowed for appliances
plugged in this socket is 130 watts. Make sure
the appliances are equipped with suitable plugs
that will not damage the socket.
NOTE
The cigarette lighter can still be used after the
ignition key has been removed.
Parking brake valve
CONTROL VALVES
12129
Controls and Instruments
ASHTRAY (OPTION) (9)
To open the optional ashtray, push slightly on
the cover’s side. The ashtray can be removed
for cleaning by pulling it out.
WARNING
To prevent a fire, never put paper or plastic
wrappers in the ashtray, empty ashtray often.
UTILITY COMPARTMENT (10)
To open the compartment, lift the cover.
12-VOLT APPLIANCES SOCKET (11)
This 12 volts DC power outlet can be used to
power small 12 volt DC appliances such as a
cellular phone or a vacuum cleaner. The
maximum power consumption allowed for
appliances plugged in this socket is 130 watts.
Make sure appliances are equipped with
suitable plugs that will not damage the socket.
TRAILER AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE
(OPTION) (12)
The trailer air braking system is supplied by
pushing this control valve.
EMERGENCY/PARKING BRAKES
OVERRULE CONTROL VALVE
During normal operation, if air pressure in any
brake circuit drops below 40 psi (276 kPa),
spring-loaded emergency brake will be
immediately applied at full capacity to the drive
axle wheels to stop the vehicle. Search and
correct the cause of this pressure drop before
driving vehicle.
The coach may be equipped with the optional
parking brake overrule system, which allows the
vehicle to be driven to the nearest safe parking
area even if air pressure is below 40 psi (276
kPa). To actuate the parking brakes overrule
system, push and hold down the control valve
located on the lateral control panel.
BACK-UP CAMERA AND MONITOR
An optional back-up camera is available which
provides the driver with visual assistance when
backing-up.
37
The monitor is mounted on the windshield L.H.
side pillar and switches ON automatically when
the transmission is in the reverse (R) range.
SCENIC VIEWING SYSTEM CAMERA
The optional scenic viewing system enables the
passengers to view the road ahead of the
vehicle. The camera is mounted above the back
up camera monitor and the system is switched
ON using the dashboard mounted FRONT
CAMERA/TV switch.
DIAGNOSTIC DATA READER (DDR)
RECEPTACLE
To ease troubleshooting, a Diagnostic Data
Reader (DDR) (not supplied) can be connected
through the DDR receptacle. A user's manual is
supplied with the optional DDR. The DDR receptacle is located inside the footwell, on the upper
left side wall.
AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION AND
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (AFSS)
Protection Panel
The protection panel displays the current system
status. The protection panel contains “SYSTEM
OK”, fire “ALARM” and “TROUBLE” lamps, the
audio alarm, the “TEST/RESET” switch, and the
“ALARM SILENCE” switch.
The “SYSTEM OK” lamp indicates power is on
the system and that there are no trouble
conditions present. The “TROUBLE” lamp blinks
if there is a fault in the detection circuitry and
illuminates solid if there is a fault in the
extinguishing circuitry. When the “TROUBLE”
lamp is on, the “SYSTEM OK” lamp will be off
and the audible alarm will sound intermittently.
The “SYSTEM OK” lamp will flash when the
system is low on battery power. Depressing the
“TEST/RESET” switch tests the protection panel
lamps and audio alarm. The “ALARM SILENCE”
switch will disable the audio alarm.
When a fire detector automatically detects a fire,
the fire “ALARM” lamp and audio alarm activate.
When the Manual Activation Switch is activated,
the fire “ALARM” lamp blinks and the audio
alarm activates. The lamp will remain blinking
until power is cycled to the system.
Controls and Instruments
38
AFSS PROTECTION PANEL & MANUAL ACTIVATION
SWITCH
Manual Activation Switch
The manual activation switch allows immediate
system activation (extinguisher discharge and
engine shutdown) by the operator at any time.
Activation of the switch is accomplished by
twisting and pulling the tamper seal to remove,
lifting the cover and pressing the red “FIRE”
button for more than half a second. After the
manual activation switch has been activated, the
protection panel will blink the fire “ALARM”
indicator until power has been cycled to the
system.
Refer
to
chapter “SAFETY FEATURES AND
EQUIPMENT” for more information on Kidde Dual
Spectrum Automatic Fire detection and
Suppression System (AFSS).
CRUISE CONTROL
REGULAR CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise control allows you to cruise the
vehicle at a desired speed over 18 mph (30
km/h) without having to use the accelerator
pedal.
Turning the system on
To operate the cruise control,
press the cruise rocker switch
located on the lateral control panel
to the on position. This turns the
system on. The dashboard telltale
turns on; you can now set the
vehicle at a desired cruising
speed. To turn off the system,
06701
press the rocker switch to the off
position.
NOTE
The CRUISE switch and RESUME button do
not operate at speeds below 30 mph (50
km/h).
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS
Setting at a desired speed
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired cruising
speed using the accelerator pedal. Press and
release the SET button then remove foot from
the accelerator pedal. This will set the vehicle
cruise speed and store it in memory. The set
speed will appear in the driver information
display.
Increasing set speed
The vehicle cruise speed setting can be increased by one of the following methods.
1. Accelerate using the accelerator pedal until
the desired cruising speed is reached. Press
and release the SET button.
or
2. Press and hold the RES (RESUME) button
until the desired cruising speed is reached.
When the RES button is released, the new
cruising speed will be stored in the cruise
control memory.
or
3. When driving with cruise control, each time
the RES button is momentarily depressed,
the cruising set speed is raised by 1 mph (2
km/h).
NOTE
When driving with cruise control, the vehicle
can still be accelerated by depressing the
accelerator pedal in the usual manner. Once
the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle
will return to the previously set cruising speed.
Controls and Instruments
Decreasing set speed
39
= engine brake high
The vehicle cruise speed setting can be
decreased by one of the following methods.
1. Press and hold the SET button until the
desired cruising speed is reached. When the
SET button is released, the new cruising
speed will be stored in the cruise control
memory.
or
2. Each brief pressing of the SET button will
decrease set cruising speed by 1 mph
(2 km/h).
or
3. Slightly apply the service brake and when
desired cruise speed is reached, press and
release the SET button.
Canceling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset cruising speed by:
1. Pressing momentarily the CANCEL button;
2. Depressing the brake pedal.
Resuming Set Speed
If the preset speed is cancelled by pressing the
CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal,
pressing the RES (RESUME) button will restore
the speed set prior to cancellation, providing that
your speed is above 30 mph (50 km/h).
NOTE
When driving downhill with the cruise control
on and set, the engine brake or the
transmission retarder engage automatically (if
previously activated) when the selected cruise
speed is exceeded by approximately:
• 4 mph (7 km/h) with the engine brake
activated;
• 0.6 mph (1 km/h) with the transmission
retarder activated.
The engine brake or the transmission retarder
is then disengaged when speed has returned
near to selected cruise speed.
The engine brake will provide low braking
power or high braking power depending on
which of the two steering wheel engine brake
control buttons is activated;
= engine brake low
The transmission retarder maximum braking
level is determined by the retarder hand lever
position on the steering wheel.
NOTE
To avoid sudden vehicle hesitation, slightly
depress the accelerator pedal before
disengaging the cruise control.
NOTE
When the cruise rocker switch is released,
the cruise control is completely shut off and
the cruise speed setting is erased from the
cruise control memory.
IMPORTANT NOTE
If the engine was stopped and the cruise
rocker switch was in the on position, the
rocker switch must be reset by turning it off
then on again in order for the cruise control to
be reactivated.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
speed must be constantly adjusted, such as in
heavy traffic or on winding, icy, snow-covered
or slippery roads, or on gravel roads.
WARNING
Do not put the transmission in the neutral (n)
position while driving with cruise control. This
may cause the engine to over-speed and
result in a loss of driving control.
PREVOST AWARE y ADAPTIVE CRUISE
BRAKING
Prevost AWARE Adaptive Cruise Braking (ACB)
is an optional cruise control that not only
maintains the set speed, but will also intervene,
as needed, to help the driver maintain a set
following distance behind the forward vehicle by
reducing speed as necessary. As soon as the
forward vehicle is at a safe distance, the coach
will accelerate back to the cruise set speed.
40
Controls and Instruments
NOTE
The following paragraphs briefly sum up the
information concerning the operation and
function of the ACB. Before driving the
vehicle, be certain that you have read and
that you fully understand each and every step
of the driving and handling information found
in Bendix Wingman ACB Active Cruise with
Braking Operator’s Manual. The driver should
fully understand all the audible alerts and
visual indicators that the system provides.
Bendix Wingman ACB Active Cruise with
Braking Operator’s Manual (available on
Prevost web site and included on the
Technical Publications CD) will assist in
explaining what each of them means and
what actions the driver may be required to
take to avoid potential collisions.
WARNING
Even with ACB, the driver must remain alert,
react appropriately and in a timely manner,
and use good driving practices. Ultimate
responsibility for the safe operation of the
vehicle remains with the driver at all times.
Be certain that you have read all safety warnings found in Bendix Wingman ACB Active
Cruise with Braking Operator’s Manual.
The driver will benefit all the audible and visual
warnings that the system provides whether or
not ACB is turned on. In addition to the audible
and visual warnings, when the ACB is turned on
and a cruise speed is set, the driver benefits
from active interventions like engine throttle
reduction, retarder or engine brake application
and service brakes application to help maintain
a set following distance.
WARNING
Adaptive Cruise Braking must be used only in
the same conditions that are normally
recommended for ordinary cruise control.
Refer to “Regular Cruise Control” paragraph.
ACB is now engaged with the set following
distance and driver warnings features.
Whenever the cruise control is engaged, the
ACB is also engaged. You cannot engage the
cruise control without also using the ACB
features.
Turning off the ACB system
You can turn off the ACB system, simply by
applying service brakes, setting the CRUISE
rocker switch to the OFF position or pressing the
cruise control CANCEL button on the steering
wheel.
NOTE
Whenever the service brakes are applied by
intervention of the ACB or by the driver,
normal cruise will automatically be cancelled.
The driver must resume or set the cruise
mode in order for the vehicle to throttle up.
Maintaining a set following distance
Using a radar sensor mounted to the front
bumper, the ACB system measures the distance
between the coach and the forward vehicle and
intervenes to help maintain a safe set following
distance behind the vehicle. This feature
engages automatically once the driver turns on
and sets cruise speed.
Following distance refers to the time gap,
measured in seconds, between the coach and
the vehicle ahead. The actual physical distance
between the coach and the vehicle ahead will
vary based on your set cruise speed; although
the set time gap remains the same for all set
cruise speeds. Prevost’s default set time gap is
1.7 seconds.
With cruise control engaged and a cruise speed
set, you are maintaining a set following distance
between the coach and the forward vehicle:
• If the vehicle in front of the coach slows
down below your cruise control set speed,
the system will progressively intervene as
follows, in this order:
1) reduce the engine throttle;
Turning the ACB system on
Activation of the adaptive cruise braking is
similar to the regular cruise control activation.
Press the CRUISE rocker switch to the ON
position, accelerate the vehicle to the desired
cruising speed and then, press the SET button.
2) apply the engine brake or transmission
retarder;
3) apply about 30% of the service brakes
available braking power in an attempt to
maintain the set following distance.
Controls and Instruments
The driver must apply additional braking power
when required, to avoid collision or to maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
NOTE
If the ACB is actively decelerating or braking
the coach in an attempt to maintain the set
following distance at the moment when the
driver cancels the ACB system, the ACB
system will continue deceleration or braking
intervention until a safe following distance is
established, then will cancel.
Even though the cruise control doesn’t
operate at speeds below 30 mph (50 km/h),
the ACB system will continue deceleration or
braking intervention in an attempt to maintain
the set following distance if the coach speed
reduces to less than 30 mph (50 km/h).
• If the vehicle ahead slows below your
cruise control’s set speed, but then
accelerates away, and the ACB system did
not need to use the service brakes as it
managed the intervention, the coach will
automatically accelerate back to the original
cruise control set speed, and again maintain
a set following distance behind the forward
vehicle.
NOTE
The maximum radar range is approximately
500 feet (150 meters). Rain, snow, fog, ice
and other severe weather conditions may
affect the performance of the ACB system
and shorten radar range.
NOTE
41
DASHBOARD TELLTALE
When ACB is turned on and a cruise speed is
set, if the forward vehicle is detected (in range)
by the radar, the FORWARD VEHICLE
DETECTED telltale light on the dashboard will
illuminate. This is an indication to the driver that
the forward vehicle is being tracked, that the
ACB is actively managing the distance between
the coach and the vehicle ahead and that the
ACB system may automatically intervene to
maintain the set following distance.
FORWARD VEHICLE DETECTED telltale light
There are three types of warnings with this
telltale light:
• Green: The forward vehicle is detected (in
range).
• Flashing red: Collision alert. The forward
vehicle is to close to follow safely or a
metallic stationary object such as a stopped
or stalled vehicle in your lane of travel is
detected. The driver must intervene to avoid
a collision.
• Solid red: ACB system malfunction. The ACB
system and the alert functions are not
available.
SPEEDOMETER LEDs
With the cruise control engaged and a cruise
speed set, a green LED illuminates above the
cruise control set speed on the speedometer.
As part of your pre-trip vehicle inspection,
check to see that there is no mud, snow, ice
build-up or other obstruction in front of the
radar sensor. You should inspect the radar
sensor mounting and remove any obstruction
that may impair the sensor functioning.
THE CRUISE SET SPEED IS 80 km/h
Driver warnings
Before using the ACB, the driver should fully
understand all the audible and visual warnings
that the system provides. Any audible warning
(beeping or tone) means that your vehicle is too
close from the vehicle ahead.
With a cruise speed set, the vehicle ahead
slows moderately. The system will display to the
driver the approximate speed of the vehicle
ahead
with
yellow
LEDs
above
the
speedometer.
42
Controls and Instruments
The Impact Alert is also applicable to stationary
metallic objects such as stopped or stalled
vehicles. This alert provides a warning given up
to 3.0 seconds before a potential collision with a
stationary metallic object in the coach’s lane of
travel. The driver can either slow down or
maneuver in an attempt to avoid the object. The
Impact Alert will only warn and will not actively
decelerate or brake the coach when
approaching stationary objects.
WARNING
EXAMPLE OF THE SPEEDOMETER LED DISPLAY WHEN
THE FORWARD VEHICLE IS SLOWER WHILE THE
COACH TRAVELS WITH THE ACB CRUISE CONTROL
06729_3
ON AND SET
FOLLOWING DISTANCE ALERT (FDA)
Following Distance Alert provides both audible
and visual warnings whenever the distance
between the coach and the forward vehicle is
less than the set distance and getting closer.
Once the audible warning is given, the driver
must increase the distance between the coach
and the vehicle ahead until the audible warning
stops or maneuver clear of the forward vehicle.
WARNING
Following Distance Alert is always active
whenever the coach is moving to a speed
greater than 37 mph (60 km/h), whether or not
ACB is turned on. Active interventions of ACB
to maintain safe following distance (throttle
reduction, engine brake/retarder application,
service brakes application) are only
operational when the ACB is engaged with a
cruise speed set.
IMPACT ALERT
The Impact Alert warning is the most severe
warning issued by the ACB system. This alert
indicates that the driver must take immediate
evasive action by applying more braking power
and/or steering clear of the vehicle ahead to
avoid a potential collision.
Impact Alerts are always operational when the
vehicle is running, whether or not ACB is
turned on. Active interventions of ACB to
maintain safe following distance (throttle
reduction, engine brake/retarder application,
service brakes application) are only
operational when the ACB is engaged with a
cruise speed set.
BRAKE OVERUSE WARNING
ACB provides a warning when the system is
intervening and using the service brakes
excessively. Overuse of the foundation brakes
can lead to the brakes overheating and a
potential loss of braking performance from brake
fade. For example, the use of ACB on downhill
runs may cause this alert to be activated. It is
recommended that ACB be disengaged on
downhill grades. The driver should use
appropriate gearing and brake techniques, and
not rely on ACB, on downhill grades.
If the driver does not respond to the Brake
Overuse Warning after a brief delay, the ACB
will switch off.
Controls and Instruments
43
FOLLOWING DISTANCE ALERT
CONDITION
The Following Distance Alert feature is only available when the coach speed is greater than 37
mph (60 km/h), whether or not ACB is engaged.
The forward vehicle is slowing down and the distance between your vehicle the coach and the
forward vehicle is less than the set distance
ACTIONS BY ACB SYSTEM
“Distance Alert” pop-up message appears on the DID
Distance
Alert
The speedometer LEDs illuminate in red
If the vehicles remain to close from each other for more than 15
seconds, an audible warning will sound (beeping)
IMPACT ALERT
SITUATION
ACB system detects a risk of collision with forward moving vehicle or a stationary metallic object in
your lane of travel.
ACTIONS BY ACB SYSTEM
On the dashboard, the Forward Vehicle Detected telltale flashes
in red
“Impact Alert” pop-up message appears on the DID
The speedometer LEDs flash in red
An audible warning will sound (continuous modulating tone)
BRAKE OVERUSE WARNING
SITUATION
ACB system is using the service brakes excessively to maintain the set following distance (for
example, the use of ACB on long, steep downhill runs). Excessive application of the service brakes
can cause the brakes to overheat resulting in increasing stopping distances.
ACTIONS BY ACB SYSTEM
After a brief delay, the ACB system will stop functioning and be disabled.
On the dashboard, the Forward Vehicle Detected telltale
illuminates in red
“ACB/Cruise Temporarily Disabled Brake Over-use” pop-up
message appears on the DID
“ACB Not Available” pictogram appears on the DID status line
44
Controls and Instruments
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC AT START-UP
ACB RADAR FAULT
Initiate the self-diagnostic as follows:
ACB RADAR DATA LINK FAILURE
•
The engine must be running since at least
15 seconds with parking brake applied.
ACB RADAR BLOCKED
•
Trip the CRUISE rocker switch located on
the lateral control panel from OFF to ON
position.
The following sequence will begin:
1. Pop-up message “Impact Alert” will show in
the DID;
TIRE
PRESSURE
SYSTEM (TPMS)
MONITORING
This system is a sensing device designed to
identify and display tire operating data and
activate an alert or warning when pressure or
temperature irregularities are detected.
2. The speedometer LEDs will flash in red;
NOTE
3. FORWARD VEHICLE DETECTED telltale
will flash in red;
It is the responsibility of the driver to react
promptly and with discretion to alerts and
warnings. Abnormal tire inflation pressures
should be corrected at the earliest
opportunity.
4. The Impact Alert audible alarm will sound.
At the end of the self-diagnostic sequence, popup message « ACB SELF CHECK OK » will
show on the DID if the system functions properly
or « ACB SELF CHECK NOT OK » if a fault
condition is detected.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
In case of system malfunction, visual warnings
will illuminate in the instrument cluster or the
driver information display to warn the driver that
the ACB is disabled. In that situation, the Impact
Alert and Distance Alert functions are not
available.
If the ACB is not available, the FORWARD
VEHICLE DETECTED telltale light will illuminate
in red and will stay on and “ACB NOT
AVAILABLE” pictogram will appear on the DID
status line.
FORWARD VEHICLE DETECTED telltale light
ACB NOT AVAILABLE pictogram
For proper functioning of the system, the radar
must be perfectly aligned and not blocked. If a
radar fault condition is detected, one of the
following pop-up messages will show in the DID.
ACB RADAR MISALIGNMENT
TPMS DISPLAY
06711
TPMS Display
The TPMS display knows where the sensors are
located. It receives the raw temperature and
pressure readings from the TPMS receiver, it
reads several signals from the vehicle and does
the calculation required to generate the various
screens.
When no readings have been received for a tire
location or when the received data corresponds
to a parameter range defined as unavailable,
then the reading is considered as not available
and appears as two dash lines “_ _“.
The TPMS display is initially configured to define
how many axles and running tires are present
on the vehicle. For current Prevost vehicle
models, there are two axle / tire configurations.
These configurations are:
Controls and Instruments
Config 1: Axle 1 (Front) Two tires, Axle 2
(Drive) 4 tires, Axle 3 (Tag) 2 tires.
Config 2: Axle 1 (Front) Two tires, Axle 2
(Drive) 2 tires (super Singles), Axle 3 (Tag) 2
tires.
The TPMS display is also configured with
several other parameters, including threshold
levels for the alarms.
The TPMS display power supply turns OFF
when the ignition key is switched OFF.
Operation
The system will monitor all vehicle tires (6 or 8)
plus the spare tire when a spare is supplied.
NOTE
Some vehicle models do not come with a spare
tire.
There are two configurations of vehicle tires to
be supported. One configuration (the most
common) consists of 8 tires total: two tires on
the front axle, 4 tires on the drive axle and 2
tires on tag axle. All screen figures shown in this
document relates to this vehicle configuration.
The second tire configuration consist of 6 tires
total: 2 tires on the front axle, 2 tires on the drive
axle (super single tires) and 2 tires on the tag
axle. The vehicle tire configuration is selected
with a parameter (Refer to chapter « SAFETY
» for more
FEATURES
AND
EQUIPMENT
information). When the display is configured for
6 tires, the drive axle tires appears as one large
tire on both side instead of twin tires as
illustrated in this document and there is one
reading appearing on each side instead of two
as illustrated in this document.
Start-up
When turning the ignition switch to ON, the
screen shown below appears on the TPMS
Display. Dash lines are displayed meaning that
no pressure data have been received by the
display.
--- ---
PSI
--
-- --SPARE TIRE: - PRESSURE DEVIATIONS
TARGET PRESSURES
GAUGE PRESSURES
--- --1
PSI
--
-- 1
-SPARE TIRE: - PRESSURE DEVIATIONS
TARGET PRESSURES
GAUGE PRESSURES
45
As illustrated, the pressure readings will appear
replacing the dash lines as the TPMS display
starts to receive pressure data from the TPMS
receiver. It can take 1 minute to get all pressure
readings updated since the sensors transmit at
a one minute interval.
The user can flip through the menus.
Pre-Trip Check
When one of the preconditions defined to start
the pre-trip check is met, the TPMS display
enters into a pre-trip check routine and the
screen shown below appears. The preconditions
to initiate the pre-trip are: Park brake removed
Or No activity on the display menu keys for a
defined time (Key pressed timeout). After a pretrip, the display is in a “drive” mode with bottom
menu replaced by the alarm status. The display
remains in this mode until one of the following
occurs: A menu key is touched while the park
brake is applied, or the park brake does a
transition from released to park brake applied.
--- --1
PSI
--
-- 1
-SPARE TIRE: - -
PRE-TRIP CHECK IN PROGRESS
During the pre-trip check, the pressure readings
for the different wheels become all available.
The pre-trip check ends, either when the
pressure readings have been received for all
running wheels or the pre-trip check maximum
time has elapsed. It was selected to provide
sufficient time for all wheel sensors to wake-up
and send a first reading.
The pre-trip check is aborted and the bottom
menu reappears if the park brake was active
and the user press one of the menu keys.
Upon completion of the pre-trip check, the
TPMS display will come up with one of the
screens shown hereafter:
46
Controls and Instruments
The blinking rectangle around the pressure
/temperature readings is not impacted by the
acknowledgement and keeps blinking until the
error condition disappears.
The spare tire does not contribute to alarms and
so never blinks.
On the road, the TPMS display shows one of the
5 previous screens.
In the event of a temperature alarm, the display
switches automatically to temperature readings.
The driver can also press any of the menu keys
to momentary switch the display to temperature
readings. In this case, the temperature reading
appears for 15 seconds and the display returns
to pressure.
A rectangle around each pressure / temperature
reading of the tires that have an issue is blinking
to draw the attention to the defective tires.
In the case of multiple errors at the same time,
the highest priority error is displayed at the
bottom. “Flat Tire” has the highest priority
followed by “High Temperature”, “Not all tires
monitored” and “Tire pressure not Optimal”.
The switching to temperature by pressing a
does not take place if there is
acknowledgeable alarm active, since in
case pressing the key does acknowledge
alarm.
key
an
this
the
The switching to temperature does not take
place either if there is an alarm of Temperature
or Flat Tire.
The switching to temperature works when the
bottom message indicates either: Tire Pressure
OK, Pressure Not Optimal non flashing or not all
tires monitored non flashing. When the switch is
done to temperature readings, the bottom
portion of the screen is not affected and still
shows the status message.
NOTE
High temperature is not likely to occur during
the pre-trip.
To get the driver’s attention to the alarms, the
bottom section of the screen where the alarm
message appears will blink to reverse contrast
at the following rate: 0.7 sec normal contrast, 0.3
sec reverse contrast. Pressing any key will
acknowledge the alarms that are considered as
non critical and stop the blinking of these alarms
message for the remaining of the trip. The non
critical alarms are: “Pressure not optimal” and
“Not all tires monitored”. The “flat tires” and “high
temperature” alarms are critical and will keep
blinking even when a key is pressed. If a
different alarm occurs, blinking will start again.
The pressure and temperature readings are
continuously updated with the displayed
readings of the wheel having issues blinking.
The bottom line message is automatically
updated to the highest priority alarm prevailing.
There is a hysteresis on the alarm levels to
assure that the error conditions do not flicker ON
and OFF.
On the occurrence of an alarm, a beep will
sound. The alarm beep could be turned OFF in
the alarm settings menu.
Spare tire:
The spare tire is monitored but it is not taken
into account when setting the bottom alarm
messages. This is to prevent unnecessary
alarms that would otherwise occur, if for
Controls and Instruments
47
example, the spare tire is removed from a
vehicle.
The user will have the possibility to check the
pressure of the spare tire by accessing the
TPMS display menu. For vehicles that have no
spare tires, the title “spare tire“ will still appear
on the screens but the pressure will remain with
two dash lines at all time.
Post Trip Operation
When parking the vehicle (park brake applied),
the TPMS display keep the drive mode display
active. The driver can press any keys to get the
bottom lines showing the status information
replaced with the menus.
The pressure readings are still displayed and
updated as new readings are received and the
readings are blinking if not within the optimum
pressure range.
From this point the user can scroll through the
menus to get more detailed information and
inflate / deflate the tires to bring them back to
their optimum target pressures. Scrolling
through these menus is also available prior to
departure.
The display remains in this mode with the
menus appearing at the bottom until the pre-trip
check sequence starts again.
Scrolling down below the Battery life menu will
show the Settings menu. Highlighting the
Settings and pressing OK allows entering the
settings menu. Refer to chapter “SAFETY
FEATURES AND EQUIPMENT” for more
information on “SETTINGS MENU”.
Refer to chapter “Appendix G” for TPMS
Troubleshooting Guide.
Highlighting the Exit menu and pressing OK
exits the settings and come back to the pressure
display mode.
48
Controls and Instruments
DASHBOARD
DASHBOARD
1.
L. H. Dashboard Panel
2.
Instrument Cluster
3.
Vehicle Clearance Information
4.
R. H. Dashboard Panel
5.
HVAC Control Unit
6.
Audio-video Selector Panel VSS-05
7.
AM/FM CD Radio
8.
Air Vents
9.
Brightness Control
10.
Diver Information Display (DID)
11
Ignition Switch
12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Display
06761
Controls and Instruments
49
CONTROL SWITCHES
High quality laser-engraved switches are used to control many of the features of the vehicle. Many switches
have an embedded indicator LED to inform the driver at a glance which features are active. Some switches'
LED will turn OFF after a short while when the engine is running. This is normal and is designed to reduce
glare when driving. The functions still operate even if the LED is OFF. If the switches are still ON when the
engine is turned OFF, the LEDs will illuminate to warn the driver to turn them OFF. Switches are described
in the order they appear, from left to right, top to bottom.
L. H. DASHBOARD PANEL
The L.H. Dashboard panel includes controls for
the operation of the coach; it also includes the
ignition switch and an adjustable air vent.
L. H. DASHBOARD PANEL
06762
Headlights and Exterior Lighting
06254
Off position – Daytime running lights only
Press this rocker switch to turn on the following lights:
First position – Front parking lights, clearance lights, tail lights, license plate lights and
marker lights.
Second position - Push down fully to turn ON the headlights, the controls and instrument
lights and all lights from first position.
NOTE
Daytime running lights will be automatically cancelled when the exterior lighting switch is fully
depressed (second position).
Fog Lights (Optional)
Optional halogen fog lights provide better visibility in fog and precipitation. They improve
close range visibility and provide added safety.
06255
NOTE
Some states and provinces restrict the use of fog lights. Verify local state or provincial regulations
before using.
50
Controls and Instruments
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the rocker switch to make all turn signal lights flash at once. The dashboard telltale
lights will flash when the hazard warning flashers are ON.
06256
CAUTION
Do not use the hazard flashers for an extended period of time unless necessary because the electrical
circuits are activated when the hazard switch is depressed.
Headlights washer
Momentarily press this rocker switch downwards to spray the headlights washer fluid. Each
pressing of this switch produces 2 successive jets.
06616
CAUTION
Do not operate the washer mechanism if the washer fluid reservoir is empty. This may damage the
washer fluid pumps.
Windshield Upper Section De-icing
The coach is equipped with a de-icing system in the windshield upper section. Press the
rocker switch to activate the blower in order to clear fog, frost or thin ice from either side of
the windshield upper sections.
06259
Wheelchair Lift (Optional)
Activate the optional wheelchair lift by pressing down on the rocker switch. Refer to “Other
Features” section and to wheelchair lift system’s Operator’s Manual for operating
instructions.
06268
Fast Idle
For extended idling periods, run the engine at fast idle. Press down the rocker switch to
engage fast idle. This increases the engine speed to approximately 1,000 rpm. Return to
normal idle before driving or when stopping engine.
06264
CAUTION
Reduce the engine to normal idle before shutting the engine off.
Controls and Instruments
51
NOTE
If the parking brake is released and/or the transmission is engaged with the engine running at fast idle,
the engine will return to normal idle and remain there as long as the parking brake is not applied and/or
transmission is not placed in neutral (n).
The engine will return to fast idle once the parking brake is applied or neutral (n) selected.
Engine Brake With I-Shift Transmission
On vehicles equipped with the i-shift transmission, use this switch to enable the engine
brake.
Upon activation of this switch, the engine brake is in the auto mode . In this case, the
engine brake interacts with the i-shift transmission according to the i-shift’s eco-roll mode
e+.
06703
In the auto mode
, the engine braking power varies with the brake pedal position.
Once this switch is activated, the driver can use the buttons located on the steering wheel
to select between two other engine brake modes:
• Engine brake low
• Engine brake high
On the other hand, this selection will deactivate the auto mode
will not be available.
and the eco-roll mode
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with the I-Shift transmission, any increase of the braking power,
to engine brake low
, from auto mode
to engine
such as from auto mode
or engine brake low
to engine brake high
will deactivate the cruise
brake high
control.
Engine Brake / Transmission Retarder (Optional)
06703
Use this switch to select between the transmission retarder and the engine brake when
using the vehicle speed retarding device switches on the steering wheel. Both systems
cannot be in function at the same time. This rocker switch will be found on the dashboard
only if the vehicle is equipped with both systems. Refer to "Transmission Retarder” heading
in this chapter. Refer also to "Transmission Retarder” & “Engine Brake” in “OTHER
FEATURES” chapter.
Engine Stop Override
Press this switch then release to override the emergency engine shutdown protection.
Engine emergency shutdown will be turned OFF for 30 seconds. This procedure can be
repeated if done before 30 seconds are up.
06265
CAUTION
Use sparingly and in order to move the vehicle to a safe parking place only. Excessive use can cause
severe engine damage.
Controls and Instruments
52
Driver Controlled Differential Lock (DCDL) (Optional)
LOCK
Press the rocker switch to lock or unlock differential action. Refer to "Other Features" chapter
for the complete operating instructions.
06571
CAUTION
O Engage DCDL only under poor road surface conditions.
O DCDL will not engage and will disengage in speed higher than 5 mph.
O Do not lock DCDL when one or more wheels are slipping, spinning or loosing traction. You can
damage the drive axle.
O Using the rocker switch, unlock DCDL when the need for improved traction has passed otherwise it
will reengage automatically as speed gets below 5 mph. Over a prolonged period, this situation will
increase tire wear and stress to the vehicle.
O Do not engage during downhill operation.
R. H. DASHBOARD PANEL
The HVAC control module as well as the
cluster dimmer switch, interior lighting control
switches, entrance door operating buttons as
well as miscellaneous control switches and air
vents are located on the R.H. Dashboard
panel.
R. H. DASHBOARD PANEL
06724
Entrance Door Operating Buttons
Press and hold the L.H. button to open the door and the R.H. button to close the
door.
06464
Releasing the button at any time will immediately stop door movement.
WARNING
The door mechanism has no automatic safety protection to avoid injury to bystanders. The driver is
responsible for the safe operation of the door.
Controls and Instruments
53
Driver’s Area Lighting
Press the rocker switch to illuminate the ceiling lights in the driver's area as needed.
06244
Interior Lighting
Press this rocker switch to the first position to illuminate the aisle fluorescent lighting. Press
down the second position to illuminate the in-station fluorescent lights.
06239
CAUTION
To avoid running down the batteries when the engine is OFF, turn off the lights or connect the optional
battery charger to a 110 - 120 volt ac power supply.
Reading Lights
This switch powers the reading light circuit enabling passengers to operate their personal
reading lights. Refer to “Coach Interior” chapter.
06240
Passenger Overhead Air Registers
Press the switch to the first position to set the fans to low speed. Press the switch to the
second position to set the fans to high speed.
If equipped with the optional air conditioning in the overhead compartments, activating the
fans also engages the dedicated A/C compressor.
06245
Stop / Service Chime (Optional)
Press this switch to enable the stop / service chime. When depressed, the service buttons
illuminate even when the chime circuit is not enabled.
06243
Destination Sign (Optional)
Press the rocker switch to illuminate the destination sign.
06262
Controls and Instruments
54
Brightness Control
06249
Adjusts the brightness of the dashboard instruments and switches.
Galley (Optional)
This switch activates the galley’s electrical circuit.
06241
Front Camera Switch (Optional)
Press this switch to turn ON the camera in the windshield and display the road ahead on the
passenger TV monitors. When the front camera is not enabled, the TV circuit reverts to the
video cassette player output.
06334
HVAC CONTROL UNIT
Separate driver and passenger heating,
ventilation and air conditioning controls are
located on this panel. To operate, the vehicle’s
engine must be running.
The driver’s and the passengers’ units may be
22296
The vehicle is slightly pressurized by the central
HVAC system to prevent dust and moisture from
entering. Air flow and controls divide the vehicle
into two areas: driver’s area with defroster and
passengers’ area.
Fresh air is fed in each area and has a separate
return air and discharge air duct.
NOTE
To operate the air conditioning system when
stationary, run engine at fast idle. When the
system is running, keep windows and door
closed.
turned ON by pressing
button.
Also, the driver's HVAC section turns on
automatically at starting of the engine and uses
the settings that were kept in memory before
turning off of the system.
The A/C compressor starts automatically when
the two following conditions are satisfied:
1. The outside temperature is above 32°F
(0°C).
2. The passenger's area temperature has
reached 7°F (4°C) under the set point.
NOTE
To prevent battery run-down, the central A/C
and heating systems will not operate if the
charging system is not working properly.
When the A/C system is running, park at least 4
feet (1,5 m) from other vehicles or buildings to
allow sufficient air flow through the condenser
core.
Upon starting, if the outside temperature is
above 32°f (0°c) and then drops below 32°f
(0°c), the compressor will keep running up to a
temperature of 15°f (-9°c) to prevent
condensation from forming on the windows.
Controls and Instruments
All parameters set before turning the system
OFF will be kept in memory for the next power
ON.
The HVAC module performs a self diagnosis
every time it is turned ON. Codes are shown on
displays or flashed on control buttons. Refer to
"Maintenance Manual" for more information on
the diagnostic codes.
Heating Mode Indicator
This red LED illuminates when system
is heating.
22131
Cooling Mode Indicator
This green LED illuminates when the
system
is
cooling
(when
the
compressor
clutch
is
engaged).
22134
Fan Speed
22135
The driver’s fan has six speeds.
Increase speed by pressing on the
upper portion of the button, decrease
by pressing on the lower portion.
Recirculate
Closes or opens the driver's and
passenger's section fresh air
damper.
22138
A red LED in the top right corner of the button
illuminates when air is recirculated. Use for
faster driver’s section heating.
This feature is automatically cancelled when
defogging is activated.
Driver's section temperature setting
The temperature displayed on the
driver's side HVAC control unit is the
22303 temperature set point.
To increase the temperature set
point, press on the "+" sign, to
decrease the temperature set point,
press on the "-" sign. Temperature
range is between 60°F and 82°F
(16°C to 28°C). On the driver’s side
only, asking for a temperature set
point above 82°F (28°C) will keep
22132
the coolant valve open and “FUL”
will be displayed.
In case of interior temperature
sender unit failure, the coolant valve
will remain open and three lines “---“
will be displayed.
55
WARNING
Warm temperatures may cause drowsiness
and affect alertness while driving. Keep the
temperature comfortable but not too high.
Passenger's section temperature setting
The temperature displayed on the
passenger's side HVAC control unit is
the actual temperature in the
22304
passenger's area.
To increase or decrease the
temperature set point in the
passenger's area, press on the "+" or
the "-" sign. Pressing these buttons
will flash the displayed set point and
the word "SET" will highlight.
Temperature range is between 60°F
22132
and 82°F (16°C to 28°C).
In case of interior temperature
sender unit failure, the coolant valve
will remain open and three lines “---“
will be displayed.
NOTE
Upon starting of the vehicle, when the ambient
temperature is very cold and so is the inside of
the vehicle, the HVAC control unit will permit a
temperature overshoot up to 3° over the
passenger’s area set point to help warming up
of the area because some parts of the vehicle
like the seats and the overhead compartments
accumulate cold.
Windshield Defogger
Upon pressing this button, the
dashboard damper sends air only to
the lower windshield. The fan is
turned on to maximum speed, the
fresh air damper opens completely
22305 (REC off) and the driver set point is
increased to 4°F (2°C) over the
passenger's section set point.
22139
The dashboard damper sends air only
to the lower windshield when
activated. The footwell damper is
closed also but the fan speed can be
reduced or increased.
Panel and Footwell
The dashboard damper sends air to
the panel vents and footwell.
22137
Controls and Instruments
56
Panel
Air is sent to panel registers. The
footwell damper is closed.
SELECTION OF AUDIO OR AUDIO/VIDEO
SOURCE
Temperature Degree Selector
Toggles the HVAV control unit
temperature units between Fahrenheit
and Celsius. The driver’s section must
be on. Also toggles the outside
22133 temperature units displayed on the
telltale panel.
Press RADIO/CD button to select
the dashboard radio as current
audio source for the passenger’s
area. Pressing this button will also
permit to listen to the CD inserted in
the dashboard radio.
Press AUX AUDIO button to select
an auxiliary audio input as current
audio source.
AUDIO-VIDEO
SELECTOR
PASSENGER’S AREA
Press DVD button to select DVD
player as current audio/video
source.
22136
FOR
THE
If an optional TV tuner is installed,
press TV button to select it as
current audio/video source.
The VSS-05 Video and Sound Selector enables
the driver to select audio, audio/video and video
source with settings of volume level, bass,
treble, etc. for the passenger’s area only. The
DVD player, TV tuner, P.A. system and auxiliary
audio or video sources are controlled with this
unit.
TURNING POWER ON AND OFF
button to turn on the unit.
Press
Press
button again to turn off the unit.
Press AUX VIDEO button to select
an auxiliary video input as current
audio/video source.
NOTE
If CAM or NAV is already activated, DVD, TV
or AUX VIDEO cannot be selected and
displayed.
OPERATION OF THE PANORAMIC VIEW
CAMERA
1. Press CAM button to select the
optional panoramic view camera
signal. The video section of the
VSS-05 LCD panel will show
“CAM”. The video monitors turn
on automatically.
SETTING OF VOLUME/ BASS/ TREBLE/
BALANCE/ LOUDNESS
Press AUDIO button repeatedly to
choose the desired mode. Each
press changes the modes as
follows:
Turn volume knob until the desired sound is
obtained in each mode. The final setting will
apply to all audio sources for the passenger’s
area. If no button is pressed within 8 seconds
after selecting BASS, TREB, BAL and LOUD
modes, the unit automatically sets in the VOL
mode. The volume value adjust from 0 (complete mute) to 40 (maximum).
2. Press CAM button again to turn
off the panoramic view camera
and
return
to
previous
audio/video source.
DISPLAY OF THE
GUIDANCE SCREEN
GPS
NAVIGATION
Not applicable
NOTE
When CAM or NAV is selected, the previously
selected audio source remains active.
Controls and Instruments
OPERATION OF THE DRIVER MICROPHONE
1. Press D-MIC button to turn on
the driver microphone. The
AUDIO section of the LCD panel
will show “D-MIC” and a gong
sound can be heard.
2. Turn volume knob to adjust
microphone level.
3. Press D-MIC button again to turn
off the driver microphone.
OPERATION OF THE GUIDE MICROPHONE
1. Press G-MIC button to turn on
the guide microphone. The
AUDIO section of the LCD panel
will show “G-MIC” and a gong
sound can be heard.
2. Turn volume knob to adjust
microphone level.
3. Press G-MIC button again to
turn off the guide microphone.
NOTE
The driver and guide microphones can be
turned on only by turning the switch on the
microphone to on.
If both the driver and guide microphone are
activated, the driver microphone has priority
and the guide microphone is muted.
BACKGROUND VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
When a microphone is activated, the current
audio source volume will reduce to a certain
level which as been set at the factory. To adjust
this level, proceed as follows:
1- Press and hold AUDIO button then
press AUDIO IN button. The LCD panel
will show “BACK GROUND”.
2- Turn the volume knob to adjust the
background level.
3- Press any button to save the setting. If
no button is pressed within 8 seconds,
the unit automatically saves the setting
and exits this mode.
GONG SOUND LEVEL
A gong will sound in the passenger’s area upon
activating of the microphone. This gong will also
sound when a passenger activates the service
57
bell. The gong sound level can be adjusted as
follows:
1- Press and hold AUDIO button then
press VIDEO IN button. The LCD panel
will show “GONG PASS”.
2- Turn the volume knob to adjust the gong
level.
3- Press any button to save the setting. If
no button is pressed within 8 seconds,
the unit automatically saves the setting
and exits this mode.
NOTE
While maintaining the service bell gong active,
the gong sound heard upon activation of the
microphones can be disabled. To do so,
1- Press and hold AUDIO button then
press G-MIC button. The LCD panel
will show “GONG MIC ON” or “GONG
MIC OFF”.
2- Turn the volume knob clockwise to
activate the microphones gong sound.
Turn
the
volume
knob
counterclockwise to deactivate the
microphones gong sound.
USING THE VSS-05 REMOTE CONTROL
1.
Press this button to turn on the
unit.
Press this button again to turn
off the unit.
2. R/CD, AU IN, DVD, TV, VI IN
Press one of these buttons to
select the relevant audio or
audio/video source.
3. DMIC
Press DMIC button to turn on the driver
microphone.
Press DMIC button again to turn off the driver
microphone.
4. GMIC
Press GMIC button to turn on the guide
microphone.
Press GMIC button again to turn off the guide
microphone.
5. CAM
Press CAM button to select
panoramic view camera signal.
the
optional
58
Controls and Instruments
Press CAM button again to turn off the panoramic
view camera.
6. NAV
Press NAV button to display the optional GPS
navigation system guidance screen (Not
applicable).
7. BAS, BAL, TRE, LOUD
Press one of these buttons to select BASS,
BALANCE, TREBLE and LOUDNESS mode.
8. +, Press these buttons to increase or decrease the
value for BASS, BALANCE, TREBLE and
LOUDNESS mode.
NOTE
Point the remote control in direction of the
VSS-05. Remote control battery replacement.
Use CR2025 lithium battery.
DASHBOARD RADIO/MP3/IPOD/CD PLAYER
Select from several sources of entertainment for
the driver’s area such as AM, FM, WX weather
band and Satellite radio (optional) services. Play
a CD inserted in the radio’s CD slot or listen to a
MP3 device or iPod through this unit. The
complete radio operating instructions manual is
included at the end of SECTION 23: ACCESSORIES
of your vehicle’s Maintenance Manual.
• CD/USB: Push and release to select next
track
• CD/USB: Push and hold for fast forward
• Bluetooth Phone: Accept incoming call
(option)
5. Eject CD button
• CD: Eject CD
6. Up arrow button
• Radio: Manual tuning up
7. (Fast) reverse button <<
• Radio: Seek
• CD/USB: Push and release to select
previous track
• CD/USB: Push and hold for fast reverse
• Bluetooth Phone: Reject incoming call or
hang up (en option)
• iPod: Push and hold to enter the iPod
menu (option)
8. CD slot
• Insert / Remove CD
9. Rotary knob / Power button
• Push: Power On and Off
• Turn: Volume adjust and audio value
update
10. Information (Traffic / News)
• Radio: Switch traffic on or off
• Radio: Cancel ongoing traffic or news
message
11. Radio select mode
• Radio: Choose from FM1, FM2, FM3 (option), AM, Weather band and Satellite radio (option)
12. Audio button
• General: Audio settings
13. CD/Aux mode select
• CD/USB: Switch between sources other
than radio
1. Preset 1- 5 buttons
• Radio: Push and release to recall preset
station
• Radio: Push and hold to store preset station
NOTE
The driver speakers are controlled from the
dashboard radio volume knob while the
passenger’s area speakers are controlled from
the VSS-05 Sound Selector volume knob.
2. Down arrow button
• Radio: Manual tuning down
Dashboard Radio External Audio Input
3. Menu button
• Radio: Push and release to access menu
There are three possible external audio input
modes:
4. (Fast) forward button >>
• Radio: Seek
• USB
• AUX
Controls and Instruments
• iPod
59
The iPod volume should be set to maximum
prior to connecting to the radio. When the iPod
is connected to the radio, the iPod’s control will
lock. All control of the iPod is done with the radio
buttons. For more information about using
external audio devices, please refer to the
complete radio operating instructions manual
included at the end of SECTION 23: ACCESSORIES
of your vehicle’s Maintenance Manual.
EXTERNAL AUDIO INPUT INSIDE DASHBOARD LOWER
DRAWER
USB and AUX devices can be connected and
are accessible at the same time through the
dashboard radio, however, if an iPod is
connected, the USB and AUX devices will be
disabled as an available source.
MP3 players can be connected to AUX port,
then the radio will only transfer the audio format
of the MP3 player, which means that all
controlling (i.e. browsing between audio format
files) is done on the MP3 player. For more
information about using external audio devices,
please refer to the complete radio operating
instructions manual included at the end of
SECTION 23: ACCESSORIES of your vehicle’s
Maintenance Manual.
CONNECTING AN IPOD
AIR VENTS
Three adjustable driver air vents in the
dashboard and one near the door feed air to the
driver's compartment. Use the HVAC control
panel to set air temperature and fan speed.
Connecting an iPod
When connecting an iPod to the USB port and
the AUX port, the radio will automatically detect
it and enable the possibility to control the iPod.
Then you will be able to select and play audio
files stored on the iPod via the radio menus. It is
not possible to transfer audio from the iPod to
the radio solely by the USB port. A connection
via the AUX port will be necessary.
Connecting the iPod can be done with two
different cable sets:
1- A split cable from the iPod 30-pin Dock
connector to a USB connector and a 3.5mm
audio connector.
2- A separate iPod/USB cable plus a 3.5mm
male/male stereo audio cable connected to
the iPod earphone output.
AIR VENT
60
Controls and Instruments
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
06727
1. TACHOMETER
7. DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
2. TELLTALE LIGHTS
8. OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
3. SPEEDOMETER
9. DEF LEVEL (DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID) INDICATOR
4. FRONT BRAKE AIR PRESSURE (SECONDARY)
10. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
5. FUEL LEVEL
11. TURBO BOOST PRESSURE
6. REAR BRAKE AIR PRESSURE (PRIMARY)
The instrument cluster includes the analog
instruments. It also presents two devices to
communicate information to the driver, the
telltale lights and the Driver Information Display
(DID).
Indications and warnings are presented
according to three levels of attention required:
1.
THE TELLTALE LIGHTS
The highest level of attention. The telltale lights
are temporary and exceptional; they present
information critical to safety or vehicle integrity.
2.
THE POP-UP MESSAGES
The second level of attention. The pop-up
messages appear in the Driver Information
Display DID without the driver’s intervention and
acknowledgement. Pop-up messages present
supplemental information to the driver.
3.
THE STATUS LINE
The lowest level of attention. The status line
monitors certain systems and gives feedback to
the driver concerning current actions and
functions.
Controls and Instruments
61
ANALOG INDICATORS
Tachometer (rpm x 100)
Indicates the operating speed of the engine in hundreds of
revolutions per minute. The tachometer serves as a guide for
gear shifting and helps to prevent engine over-speeding when
driving downhill with the engine brake operating. Use the
green field for normal driving (1000 to 1600 rpm).
06728
CAUTION
Never allow the engine to go into the red field. This could
lead to severe engine damage.
Speedometer (mph, km/h)
Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour (mph) and
kilometers per hour (km/h). The LEDs above the instrument
work in conjunction with AWARE Adaptive Cruise Braking
(ACB) system. Refer to “Prevost AWARE Adaptive Cruise
Braking” paragraph.
06729
Turbo Boost Pressure (Psi)
Indicates the turbo boost pressure in psi. This pressure should
be the same at a given engine temperature, speed, and load.
An unusual reading could indicate an engine failure.
06730
Engine Coolant Temperature (°F)
06731
Indicates the operating temperature of the engine coolant in °f.
The normal reading should be between 170°f and 222°f (80°c
to 106°c).
The temperature limit is dependent on the electronic program
for the engine model. When coolant temperature is excessive,
the stop telltale light turns on, an audible alarm sounds and a
pop-up message appears on the DID. If the engine is at risk,
the EECU may decrease the engine power. Stop at the first
safe place where the problem can be checked.
62
Controls and Instruments
If the temperature remains below or exceeds the normal
temperature range, the cooling system should be checked for
problems.
STOP telltale light
Engine Oil Pressure (Psi)
Indicates the engine oil pressure in psi. When the oil pressure
is too low, the stop telltale light turns on, an audible alarm
sounds and a message appears on the DID. If the engine is at
risk, the EECU may decrease the engine power. Bring the
vehicle to a safe stop where the problem can be checked.
06732
STOP telltale light
OIL PRESSURE pictogram
WARNING
Failure to take necessary action when the stop telltale light is
on can ultimately result in automatic engine shutdown and
loss of power steering assist. Vehicle crash can occur,
resulting in severe personal injuries.
Front Brake Air Pression (Psi)
Indicates the front brake air system pressure in psi. The
normal operating pressure is from 95 to 125 psi.
06737
A low air pressure indicator led illuminates when the front
(secondary) air system pressure drops below 66 psi. If the air
pressure drops below 60 psi, the stop telltale light will turn on,
an audible alarm will sound and a message will appear on the
DID. If the air pressure drops below 40 psi, the emergency
spring brake applies at full capacity.
WARNING
Do not drive the coach when the brake air pressure is low.
NOTE
Do not refer to dashboard instruments during adjustment
procedures. Use only calibrated gauges.
Controls and Instruments
63
Rear Brake Air Pressure (Psi)
Indicates the rear brake air system pressure in psi. The normal
operating pressure is from 95 to 125 psi.
A low air pressure indicator led illuminates when the rear
(primary) air system pressure drops below 66 psi. If the air
pressure drops below 60 psi, the stop telltale light will turn on,
an audible alarm will sound and a message will appear in the
DID. If the air pressure drops below 40 psi, the emergency
spring brake applies at full capacity.
06738
STOP telltale light
WARNING
Do not drive the coach when the brake air pressure is low.
DEF Level
Indicates the amount of DEF (diesel exhaust fluid) remaining
in the DEF tank. The DEF tank is considered as being full when
it contains 16 gallons (60 liters) of DEF. DEF consumption will
be approximately 2% of the diesel fuel consumed.
CAUTION
06735
DEF will begin to crystallize and freeze at 12°f (-11°c). DEF
expands by approximately 7% when frozen. In order to
permit DEF expansion without causing damages to the DEF
tank, do not fill the DEF tank with more than 16 gallons (60
liters).
Fuel Level
Indicates the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. At the
beginning of the red area, there is approximately 48 gallons
(182 liters) left in the tank.
NOTE
06736
A pop-up message will appear in the DID informing that there
is only 24 gallons (92 liters) left in the fuel tank.
64
Controls and Instruments
TELLTALE LIGHTS
The telltale lights illuminate during 5 seconds at the start of every ignition cycle as a light bulb check.
STOP
Indicates that a serious problem has been detected. Immediately park the coach in a
safe place and stop the engine. This telltale light may be accompanied with a message
in the DID and a diagnostic troubleshooting code will be stored to ease identification of
the problem.
CHECK
Indicates that a problem has been detected and must be checked at the next stop. This
telltale light may be accompanied with a message in the DID and a diagnostic
troubleshooting code will be stored to ease identification of the problem.
FORWARD VEHICLE DETECTED – ADAPTIVE CRUISE BRAKING
When the ACB is engaged with a cruise speed set and the forward vehicle is in range,
the FORWARD VEHICLE DETECTED telltale light illuminates, indicating the ACB
system is actively tracking the forward vehicle.
GREEN: The vehicle ahead of you is detected by the radar.
FLASHING RED: Impact alert. The vehicle ahead of you is to close. The driver must
take immediate evasive action by applying more braking power and/or steering clear of
the vehicle ahead to avoid a potential collision.
RED: System malfunction. The Adaptive Cruise Braking is not available.
INFORMATION
This telltale light illuminates when there is a new information message or an abnormal
status is detected by the electronic control unit. A pictogram, text or both are shown in
the DID in addition to the info telltale light. Make sure the indicated fault is checked at
the next stop.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS
Flashes when the right or left turn signals are activated. Signal right and left turns by
operating the multi-function lever. See “Steering Column Controls” in this chapter.
NOTE
The turn signals are automatically activated when the vehicle is backing up.
PARKING BRAKE OR EMERGENCY BRAKE APPLIED
Illuminates when the emergency/parking brake is applied. The control valve is located
on the L.H. control panel. An audible alert will sound if ignition is turned to off and the
parking brake is not engaged.
AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP)
Indicates a failure of an emission control device. May illuminates at the same time as the
CHECK amber warning light. The lamp will go out after 3 completed ignition on-rideignition off cycles. Vehicle can be driven to end of shift. Call for service.
Controls and Instruments
65
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicates that the cruise control is enabled.
CRUISE CONTROL SET SPEED
Indicates that a cruising speed is set and stored in the memory.
06740_A
HIGH EXHAUST SYSTEM TEMPERATURE (HEST)
Illuminates to notify the driver of potentially hazardous exhaust gas temperature at the
exhaust system diffuser.
WARNING
During regeneration, exhaust temperature may reach up to 1200°f (650°c) at the
particulate filter. When parking the vehicle, if this telltale light is illuminating, make
sure that the exhaust system diffuser is away from people or any flammable
materials, vapors or structures.
06740_B
DPF REGENERATION REQUEST
Illuminates to notify the driver that a manual stationary regeneration will be required
soon. Refer to “Exhaust Aftertreatment System" paragraph in Other Features chapter.
LOW DEF LEVEL
Illuminates when there is less than 2.6 gallons (10 liters) of DEF left in the tank.
06740_C
CAUTION
This telltale light starts flashing when there is only 2.5 liters (0.6 gallons) left in the
tank.
If the vehicle is kept in operation with an empty DEF tank, and engine derate will
eventually occur, limiting the speed to 5 mph.
ALTERNATORS
Indicates an alternator problem. One of the alternators is not charging.
06740_D
NOTE
To identify which alternator is defective (1=lower alternator, 2=upper alternator), perform
a system diagnostic using the Driver Information Display DIAGNOSTICS menu. Select
VIEW ACTIVE FAULTS and then ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. Scroll through the active
faults. The electrical system active faults will appear. A diagnostic message indicating
“alternator 1” or “alternator 2” with failure mode “open circuit” will come in sight.
66
Controls and Instruments
INTAKE AIR PREHEATER ON – WAIT BEFORE STARTING
06740_E
Illuminates when the intake air preheater element is in function. Wait until this telltale
light has turned off before starting the engine. For more information on this feature, refer
to paragraph “Cold Weather Starting” in Starting And Stopping Procedures chapter.
FLAT TIRE (WITH OPTIONAL TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM)
Illuminates when a tire pressure is 25% below the target tire pressure.
06740_F
06740_G
06740_H
06740_I
06740_AA
06740_K
HILL START ASSIST
Indicates a malfunction of the hill start assist function. This function might not be
available.
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
Illuminates when the ABS is not available or when the ABS is malfunctioning. Since the
ABS system does not operate at less than 4 mph (7 km/h), the indicator will remain
illuminated until the coach reaches that speed. Refer to Other Features chapter.
TRAILER ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
Illuminates when the trailer ABS is not available or when the trailer ABS is
malfunctioning.
TCS/ESC - TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM AND ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL
This telltale illuminates and stays on whenever TCS or ESC is disabled due to a
diagnostic fault code.
During an ESC or TCS intervention, the telltale will blink rapidly to indicate this action.
When in TCS mud/snow mode, this telltale will blink continuously to indicate that this
mode is active. When the TCS mud/snow is active, the ESC is disabled at speed lower
than 25 mph (40 km/h), for this reason, the telltale will stop blinking and will stay on.
HIGH BEAM
Illuminates when the high beams are selected. High and low beams are selected with
the multi-function lever. Refer to “Steering Column Controls” paragraph in this chapter.
Controls and Instruments
STOP, CHECK and INFORMATION telltale
lights
STOP, CHECK and INFORMATION telltale
lights illuminate automatically to draw the attention of the driver and their associated messages
are displayed in the DID. More than one message (see “Acknowledging Messages” below)
can be active at the same time. A displayed
message can be replaced by a new message
provided the new message has a higher priority.
Only fault codes that have a direct impact on
vehicle operation are displayed. All fault codes
are stored in the appropriate ECU for access by
service technicians.
STOP Telltale light
In the event of a serious fault, the red STOP
telltale light comes on and an audible alarm will
sound if the engine is running. An illuminated
stop message light indicates a serious problem
has been detected, and the driver must respond
immediately to the problem.
When illuminating, this telltale light means the
vehicle must be safely pulled off the road and
stopped. In some instances, the engine must be
switched off immediately.
WARNING
Failure to stop and take necessary action
when the STOP telltale light is on can result in
automatic engine shutdown and loss of power
steering assist. This can result in vehicle
accident and severe personal injuries.
In some cases preventive action may be taken
by the engine ECU to protect the engine, for
example:
1-
If oil pressure or coolant level drop too
low, the engine is forced to low idle and
when the vehicle speed is zero, the
engine shuts down.
2-
With excessive coolant temperature, the
engine will gradually reduce power output
to 50%. This telltale light always activates
an audible alarm.
67
After the automatic engine shutdown sequence,
the engine may be restarted after the key is
turned off and then back on. However, it will only
operate for 30 seconds unless the problem is
resolved. The Engine Stop Override switch can
be used to override the automatic engine shutdown protection. The automatic engine emergency shutdown will be turned OFF for 30 seconds. This procedure can be repeated if done
before the 30 seconds are up. Use this function
sparingly and in order to move the vehicle to a
safe parking place only.
CHECK Telltale light
This telltale light means that a fault or an
abnormal operating condition has been
detected. The vehicle must be checked at the
next stop.
If the CHECK telltale light illuminates, an
associated message is displayed in the DID.
Always pay attention to the associated
messages (see “Acknowledging Messages”
below).
INFORMATION Telltale light
The INFO indicator light comes on when there is
a new information message or an abnormal
status is detected by the electronic control unit.
A pictogram or text or both are shown in the DID
in addition to the INFO telltale light (see “Acknowledging Messages” below).
Acknowledging Messages
A fault message associated to a STOP, CHECK
or INFORMATION telltale light must be acknowledged by pressing the ESCAPE or ENTER
button after which the display returns to the
same status that existed before the fault occurred. All messages can be acknowledged.
Acknowledged but inactive messages are displayed again when the ignition key is turned to
the START position or they can be read in the
DID menu. Refer to Other Features for more
information on the DID menus.
68
Controls and Instruments
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY
The DID (Driver Information Display) is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. It displays
digital gauges, main menus and sub-menus that
provide necessary and important information to
the driver. The information available to the driver
depends on vehicle configuration, and whether
the vehicle is in operation or parked. For the list
of the available menus and sub-menus, refer to
“Driver Information Display Menus” in Other
Features chapter.
06743
1. Indicates first of six available menus (varies
by menu)
2. Clock
3. Odometer
4. Value or data (in this example, the engine oil
temperature)
5. Pictogram relevant to the displayed value or
data
06746
The outside air temperature, fuel flow and the
odometer (Allison transmission) or the current
gear position (transmission I-Shift) are part of
the default display. You can replace the default
display by your selection of favorite gauges
using the Driver Information Display sub-menu
Favorite Display Setting. Refer to Other
Features chapter for more information.
6. Status bar active pictogram
7. Messages or available menus
Selecting a menu
Menus are placed in a cascade arrangement.
Use the steering wheel controls buttons to scroll
through them.
14069_3
06742
To select a menu:
1. Press the ENTER or ESCAPE button to
display the list of available menus.
2. Use the UP/DOWN button to scroll up or
down through the menus.
Controls and Instruments
3. Use the ENTER button to open a menu.
4. Use the ESCAPE button to return to the
previous menu or display or to cancel a
setting or operation.
To change settings
To change a setting, like the clock for example:
5. Use the UP/DOWN button to increase or
decrease the numerical value of the selected
field.
6. Use the ENTER button to confirm your
choice and to move to the next field.
7. Press the ESCAPE button to return to the
previous field or to cancel a setting or
operation.
06743
Scrolling through the menus without using
the steering wheel buttons
In case of failure of the steering wheel buttons, it
is still possible to gain access to the menus or
acknowledge the pop-up messages to return to
the default display.
This alternate mode is possible only if the
steering wheel buttons are faulty.
To enable the alternate mode:
1. Apply the parking brake;
2. Depress and hold the service brake pedal.
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
69
In alternate mode, use the multi-function lever
as follows:
Move the lever up = UP
Move the lever down = DOWN
Push the lever away from you = ENTER
Pull the lever towards you = ESCAPE
Controls and Instruments
70
PICTOGRAMS displayed on the driver information display (DID)
NOTE
In certain situations, the pictogram displayed represents a system or a function of the vehicle. A particular
pictogram may be displayed with different messages. In that situation, it is very important to pay attention
to the message displayed with the pictogram.
Warning pictograms, pop-up message pictograms, verifications and information pictograms
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY “GAUGES” MENU PICTOGRAMS
Pictogram
Description
Engine oil temperature
Outside air temperature
A/c compressor pressure
A/C
This pictogram is displayed with A/C compressor suction pressure value (low side)
and discharge pressure value (high side).
Accessories air pressure
Normal pressure should be between 95 and 125 psi.
Voltmeter
This pictogram is displayed with both the 12-volt and 24-volt electrical system current
voltage value. When the engine is running, the 24-volt electrical system voltage value
should be between 26,5 et 28,0 volts.
Transmission oil temperature
Current gear position (I-Shift transmission)
Indicate the current transmission gear position on the Volvo I-Shift transmission.
R= reverse
N = neutral
D= drive
M= manual mode
Controls and Instruments
71
POP-UP MESSAGES
Pictogram
Description
High engine oil temperature
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil pressure
Intake air preheater failure
Engine temperature too low for Volvo Engine Brake (VEB) operation
High transmission oil temperature
This pictogram indicates that the transmission oil temperature is too high. Turn the
transmission retarder off to allow the oil to cool down.
Allison transmission– oil or filter replacement required
This pictogram may be displayed with many different messages. Pay attention to the
displayed message which can advise that the transmission oil or filter change is
necessary. Refer to Appendix C for more information on the Allison transmission
prognostic features (oil life monitor, filter life monitor, transmission health monitor).
Trailer braking system low air pressure / trailer parking brake
This pictogram appears when the trailer emergency/parking brake is unexpectedly
applied as when the vehicle is moving and a parking brake air line rupture happens.
Low brake or ABS air pressure
A/C system pressure high
This pictogram indicates that the A/C system pressure is too high. If the A/C pressure
is too high, the compressor clutch is disengaged, but the fan remains activated.
NOTE
When outside temperature is high, it is possible and normal for that pictogram to
appear.
72
Controls and Instruments
A/C system pressure low
This pictogram indicates that the A/C system pressure is too low. If the A/C pressure
is too low, the compressor clutch disengages and the fan stops.
NOTE
When outside temperature is low, it is possible and normal for that pictogram to
appear.
Battery voltage warning
This pictogram indicates that the battery voltage is too high, too low or the
12-volts/24-volts battery arrangement is not equalized.
The value LOW or HIGH is displayed at the right of the pictogram to indicate if the
voltage is too low or too high.
NOTE
This pictogram will illuminate for a few seconds after the engine is started because
of the voltage drop when the starter is engaged.
NOTE
To identify the battery problem (too high, too low or not equalized voltage), using
the DID menus, perform a system diagnostic by selecting DIAGNOSTIC, VIEW
ACTIVE FAULTS, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM and see the fault messages.
NOTE
To prevent discharge of the batteries when the engine in not running, some
functions are automatically switched off if the batteries voltage drops below 24.0
volts for more than 30 seconds. Set the ignition key to the OFF position and then
turn the ignition key to the ON position to reactivate the functions for a period of 30
seconds before they switch off again.
NOTE
If the battery equalizer indicator illuminates, make sure that the battery equalizer
circuit breakers are reset before requesting breakdown assistance. Wait 15
minutes after setting breakers to allow batteries to equalize. The breakers are
located on the rear junction panel, on the engine compartment R.H. side.
Engine door ajar
This pictogram indicates that the engine compartment door is ajar.
Emergency window open
This pictogram indicates that an emergency window is open or unlocked.
Controls and Instruments
73
Baggage compartment door ajar
This pictogram indicates that one or more baggage bay doors are ajar.
Low windshield washer or headlights washer fluid level
Illuminates when the windshield washer or the headlight washer fluid level is low. The
washer fluid containers are located inside the front service compartment.
WARNING
Do not drive without sufficient washer fluid.
Wheelchair lift
This pictogram indicates that the wheelchair lift system is enabled and the wheelchair
access door or the lift compartment door is open. It is necessary to stow the
wheelchair lift, close the doors and set the wheelchair lift system enable switch to the
off position to permit release of the parking brake.
Lavatory occupied
This pictogram indicates that the lavatory compartment is occupied. This pictogram
will appear only when the engine is shut down in order to advise the driver of the
presence of a passenger in the lavatory compartment during a stop.
Lavatory compartment emergency call
If the vehicle is moving, this pictogram indicates that a passenger has activated the
lavatory compartment emergency call button.
Differential lock (option)
This pictogram indicates that the differential action is locked.
Freezing conditions
This pictogram appears when the temperature is in the range between 0°c and 2°c
(32°f et 35°f), when the road is most slippery.
Fuel level
This pictogram appears when approximately 24 US gallons (92 liters) of fuel remains
in the tank. Refuel as soon as possible.
Automatic traction control
This pictogram appears when the automatic traction control system intervenes to
prevent excess wheel spin during acceleration.
Parking brake applied
DPF regeneration
74
Controls and Instruments
High exhaust gas temperature
This pictogram appears to notify the driver of potentially hazardous exhaust gas
temperature at the DPF outlet.
WARNING
During regeneration, exhaust temperature may reach up to 1200°f (650°c) at the
particulate filter. When parking the vehicle, if this pictogram is displayed, make
sure that the DPF outlet diffuser is away from people or any flammable materials,
vapors or structures.
Fuel economy
This pictogram is displayed with fuel consumption value of the vehicle. Proper units
for the displayed value are written under the pictogram: liters/100km, km/liter, mpg,
liters/hour.
Leg fuel consumption
This pictogram is displayed with the value for the fuel consumption for the current leg.
Trip data
Function of the DID’s “Time/Distance” menu. Refer to “Driver Information Display
Menus” in Other Features chapter.
Estimated time of arrival
Function of the DID’s “Time/Distance” menu. Refer to “Driver Information Display
Menus” in Other Features chapter.
Fuel filter/water separator
Indicates that the draining the fuel filter/water separator is required. See Care And
Maintenance chapter.
Raised tag axle
This pictogram appears if the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h) while the tag
axle is raised.
Low buoy
This pictogram appears if the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h) while the
front suspension of the vehicle (kneeling) or the entire vehicle suspension is lowered
(low buoy).
Controls and Instruments
75
Fire in engine compartment
This pictogram appears if a fire is detected in the engine compartment while the
vehicle is on the road. An audible alarm informs the driver when a fire is detected. In
case of fire detection when parked (parking brake applied, engine running or not), the
electric horn is activated to alert the driver. Refer to Safety Features And Equipment
chapter.
WARNING
In case of a fire, stop the vehicle immediately, stop the engine and evacuate the
vehicle.
NOTE
It is possible to cancel an alarm while on the road. To do so, stop the vehicle.
Cycle the ignition between the ON and OFF position and then start the vehicle
normally. This can be done on a temporary basis when a false alarm is activated
by a defective fire detector. The driver can go on without being annoyed by the
alarm.
NOTE
To stop the electric horn alarm when parked, cycle the ignition between the ON
and OFF position twice within 3 seconds.
NOTE
For extinguisher's location, refer to SAFETY FEATURES AND EQUIPMENT chapter.
Controls and Instruments
76
Status Line Pictograms
Pictogram
Description
Message active
Alarm clock activated
Raised tag axle
Kneeling/front suspension hi-buoy active
Indicates that the front suspension (kneeling) or the entire vehicle suspension (low
buoy) is lowered.
Baggage compartments locked
Confirm that all the baggage compartment doors are locked.
Baggage compartments unlocked
Indicates that at least one baggage compartment door is unlocked.
Adaptive Cruise Braking (ACB) not available
Indicates that the Adaptive Cruise Braking system is disabled.
Engine brake
Confirm that the engine brake is disabled.
Engine brake - Auto Mode (available with I-Shift transmission)
Indicates that the engine brake is in the Auto mode. When in this mode, the engine
brake is activated upon pressing of the brake pedal. To select the Auto mode, set the
dashboard engine brake switch to the ON position. When in Auto mode, the engine
brake interacts with the I-Shift transmission according to the transmission’s Eco-Roll
mode E+.
Engine brake – Engine Brake Low (1) and Engine Brake High (2)
Confirm which engine braking power is selected with the steering wheel control buttons.
Allison transmission retarder
Confirm that the Allison transmission retarder is off.
Allison transmission retarder – braking level 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
...
Confirm the retarder hand lever position. Each position corresponds to a given braking
level. Refer to “Transmission Retarder” heading in this chapter.
Controls and Instruments
Vehicle Clearance Information
77
Lane Change Signal (2)
Move the lever part way to the catch position
and hold until the lane change maneuver is
completed. The lever will spring back into the
OFF position once released.
Safe vehicle clearance height is 11’2" (3.40 m).
CAUTION
Vehicle clearance is higher when the
ventilation hatch is open, hi-buoy is selected
or if additional equipment is installed on the
roof.
Headlight Beam Toggle Switch (3)
Toggle between high and low beams by pulling
the lever up towards you. To flash the headlights, pull the lever up halfway. The lever will
spring back into normal position once released.
Courtesy Blinkers (4)
Clearance and parking lights can be flashed by
pressing the button located on the lever tip.
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS
Many of the most frequently used controls are
conveniently placed on the steering column or
the steering wheel, just like a passenger car.
The multi-function lever is located on the left
side of the steering wheel while the optional
transmission retarder lever is located on the
right side of the steering wheel. Switches for the
electric horn and the air horn are located directly
on the steering wheel.
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield Washer Control (5)
Push the external ring at the end of the lever
toward the steering column to activate the windshield washers. The wipers come ON and continue wiping for a few seconds after the ring is
released.
WARNING
Before using the windshield washers in cold
weather, heat the windshield with the
defroster to prevent icing and reduced
visibility.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the pump mechanism, do
not use the windshield washer when the fluid
level is very low or empty.
Windshield Wipers (6)
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
23133
The multi-function lever is used to operate the
following:
Turn Signal (1)
Move the lever all the way up until it locks in
position to signal a right turn. Move the lever all
the way down until it locks in position to signal a
left turn. The lever automatically returns to the
horizontal OFF position once the turn is
completed.
Turn the lever counterclockwise to activate the
windshield wipers. The first position activates
the wipers intermittently. The second position is
the slow speed and the third position is for high
speed wiping.
CAUTION
To avoid scratching the windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
To avoid damaging the wiper motor, free
wiper blades that may be frozen to the
windshield before operating the wipers.
78
Controls and Instruments
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
LEFT STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
RIGHT STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
The steering wheel controls include the following functions:
1, 8
Shift Down, Shift Up (I-Shift Transmission)
Use these buttons to shift down or shift up manually the transmission range as would do the “-”
& “+” keys on the I-Shift gear selector keypad.
2
Set (Cruise Control)
For the cruise control operating instructions, refer to “Cruise Control” paragraph in this chapter.
3
Cancel (Cruise Control)
For the cruise control operating instructions, refer to “Cruise Control” paragraph in this chapter.
4
Resume (Cruise Control)
For the cruise control operating instructions, refer to “Cruise Control” paragraph in this chapter.
5, 12
Left Sunshade, Right Sunshade
Press and hold the button to lower the left or right sunshade. Press twice rapidly and hold the
button to raise the left or right sunshade.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to raise or lower these shades manually. Damage to electric motor or roller
mechanism could result.
6
Escape/Enter (Driver Information Display)
Enter: lift this button briefly.
Escape: press briefly on this button.
7
Up/Down (Driver Information Display)
Use this button to scroll up or down through the menus.
9
Retarder / Engine Brake Low
If your vehicle is equipped with a transmission retarder, press this button to simply enable the
transmission retarder. Afterwards, operate the transmission retarder with the hand lever
mounted on the steering wheel or the brake pedal. For more information about the operation of
this system, refer to “Transmission Retarder” heading in this chapter.
Controls and Instruments
79
On vehicles equipped with an engine brake, the engine brake provides two levels of braking
power. Press this button for low engine braking power (about 66 % of full braking power). Refer
to Other Features chapter for more information about the engine brake operation.
WARNING
Engine brake must be used on dry road only. Never use the engine brake on slippery
roads; loss of control could result.
10
Retarder / Engine Brake Off
Press this button to cancel operation of the transmission retarder or the engine brake.
On vehicles equipped with the I-Shift transmission, activation of this button set the engine brake
in Auto mode . You must set the Engine Brake switch located on the dashboard to the OFF
position to turn off the engine brake.
11
Retarder / Engine Brake High
If your vehicle is equipped with a transmission retarder, this button has the same effect than the
Retarder/Engine Brake Low
button.
On vehicles equipped with engine brake, pressing this button will permit full application of
engine brake (100 % of braking power). Refer to Other Features chapter for more information
concerning the engine brake operation.
WARNING
Engine brake must be used on dry road only. Never use the engine brake on slippery
roads; loss of control could result.
13
Volume (Dashboard Radio)
Use this button to increase or decrease the dashboard radio (driver’s radio) volume.
14
Seek (Dashboard Radio)
Use this button to seek up or down for a radio station.
HORNS
The electric horn (city horn) and air horn (highway horn) are operated from the steering wheel
center pad. Use the Horn Selector switch located on the lateral control panel to select the
appropriate horn type.
NOTE
When the vehicle is stationary, the electric
horn will sound to inform the driver that a fire is
detected in the engine compartment.
STEERING WHEEL
14068_1
Controls and Instruments
80
TRANSMISSION RETARDER
The transmission retarder is available only with
the Allison transmission.
The retarder can be operated using a hand lever
mounted on the steering wheel column or using
the service brake pedal.
To use the transmission retarder, it must be
activated first by pressing one of the two
Retarder/Engine Brake buttons on the steering
wheel.
provided. Refer to “OTHER FEATURES” chapter for
further information about the transmission
retarder.
NOTE
If the wheels start to lock up on slippery roads,
the output retarder will automatically
deactivate until the wheels start to turn.
FOOT-OPERATED CONTROLS
Operating the Retarder Using the Hand Lever
RETARDER HAND LEVER
07043
With the retarder enabled and the accelerator
pedal released, move the output retarder lever
clockwise from the first to the sixth position. The
braking level for each position is as follows:
Position
Braking level (up to)
Initial b
Varies with brake pedal
c
d
e
f
g
h
16%
33%
49%
71%
89%
100%
NOTE
The output retarder lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Operating the Retarder Using the Brake
Pedal
With the retarder enabled, the accelerator pedal
released and the output retarder lever in the
initial position b, depressing the brake pedal will
engage both the service brake and the
transmission retarder. This is referred to as
retarder-brake blending. The further the pedal is
depressed, the more total braking power is
FOOT-OPERATED CONTROLS
00023A
BRAKE PEDAL
The coach is equipped with a dual braking
system. The front brakes operate from a
different air pressure source from the drive and
tag axle brakes. The dual braking system
becomes a modulated emergency system if a
pressure drop occurs in the primary brake
system.
Service brakes are applied by depressing the
brake pedal. Braking increases with the amount
of pressure applied to the foot pedal. Refer to
Other Features chapter under Antilock Braking
System. When the brake pedal is depressed,
the brake lights turn ON automatically.
For safe and effective braking, the air system
pressure should reach at least 95 psi (655 kPa)
in both the primary and secondary circuits. A
warning light and an audible alert will sound
when the air pressure in either the primary or
secondary circuits drops below 66 psi (455 kPa).
If this occurs, stop the coach; determine the
cause of the pressure loss before proceeding.
The brake pedal can be used in conjunction with
the transmission retarder. Refer to Transmission
Output Retarder in this chapter.
Controls and Instruments
DANGER
Immediately report any brake system problem
to your company or directly to the nearest
Prevost or Prevost-approved service center.
Do not "fan" or "pump" the brake pedal. This
practice does not increase brake system
effectiveness but rather reduces system air
pressure thereby causing reduced braking
effectiveness.
CAUTION
81
PUSHBUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR
The pushbutton shift selector has the following
elements:
R (Reverse) — Press this button to select
Reverse.
N (Neutral) — Press this button to select Neutral.
D (Drive) — Press this button to select Drive. The
highest forward range available will appear in
the digital display window under SELECT. The
transmission will start out in the lowest available
forward range, displayed under MONITOR, and
advance automatically to the highest range.
"Riding" the brake by resting one's foot on the
brake pedal when not braking can cause
abnormally high brake temperature, can
damage and cause premature wear of brake
components and reduce brake effectiveness.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Controls engine RPM as needed.
NOTE
The accelerator pedal will not operate when
the entrance door is open.
ALLISON AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
The transmission is fully automatic: Proper
ranges should be automatically selected
according to driving speeds to improve vehicle
performance and control. The speed ratio of the
power converter changes automatically as
vehicle speed increases and direct-drive goes in
and out as necessary. The speed ratio is
modulated by vehicle speed and accelerator
pedal position. You will find the complete
transmission operation instructions and driving
tips in the Allison Bus Series Operator’s
Manual included in your vehicle’s publication
box.
OPERATION
When a button is depressed on the transmission
control pad, the corresponding letter or number
is displayed indicating the transmission is ready
to operate in the selected range. If the
transmission control module (TCM) detects a
serious problem in the transmission, the
"CHECK" telltale light will illuminate on the
dashboard.
ALLISON PUSHBUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR
07134
— Press respectively the
(Upshift) or
(Downshift) arrow button when in DRIVE to
request the next higher or lower range. One
press changes gears by one range. If the button
is held down, the selection will scroll up or down
until the button is released or until the highest or
lowest possible range is selected. Protection
mechanisms inhibit selecting ranges that are not
appropriate for the current speed or which may
damage driveline components.
MODE — The MODE button can allow the
driver to enable a secondary shift mode that has
been programmed into the TCM unit. The name
of the secondary mode appears on the MODE
IDENTIFICATION label adjacent to the MODE
button. Pressing the MODE button activates the
PERFORMANCE shift schedule and illuminates
the mode indicator (LED).
82
Controls and Instruments
NOTE
When the diagnostic display mode has been
entered, the MODE button is used to view and
toggle through diagnostic code information.
Refer to appendix C for more details about
diagnostic code display procedure and
fluid level check using the pushbutton shift
selector.
Functions of The “Mode” Button
Both ECONOMY (default mode at starting of the
engine) and PERFORMANCE (secondary shift
mode) modes are equivalent from the first to the
fourth gear as the transmission upshifts at
around 2000 rpm.
The ECONOMY mode allows for upshifts in fifth
and sixth gear at around 1700 rpm. This is a
more efficient operation of the transmission and
thereby helps improve fuel economy.
The PERFORMANCE mode keeps upshifts at
2000 rpm in fifth and sixth gears. This makes for
better performance than the economy mode but
with higher fuel consumption. It is recommended
this mode be selected while driving up or down
grades. The mode indicator (LED) is illuminating
when PERFORMANCE mode is selected.
TRANSMISSION SERVICE INDICATOR
— This indicator will be illuminated upon the
detection of a service issue relating to clutch, filter
or fluid life. The appearance of the indicator (lit
steadily, flashing, etc.) varies for each of the
conditions monitored by the system. Refer to
appendix C for more details about diagnostic
code display procedure, fluid level check or
prognostic features (Oil Life Monitor, Filter Life
Monitor and Transmission Health Monitor) using
the pushbutton shift selector.
Illuminated at startup for a bulb check, this
indicator will then be turned off if no service
conditions exist.
The reverse warning signal will be activated
when this range is selected.
N (Neutral)
Use this position to start engine. Select «N»
(Neutral) when checking vehicle accessories
and for extended periods of engine idle operation; parking brake must then be applied. The
pushbutton shifter will automatically select «N»
(Neutral) when the ignition switch is turned ON.
NOTE
The automatic transmission does not have a
park «P» position. Select «N» (neutral) and
apply parking brake when the vehicle is left
unattended. An audible alert will sound if the
engine is stopped and the parking brake is not
applied.
DANGER
Always apply parking brake and put the
transmission in NEUTRAL before leaving
driver's seat.
CAUTION
Volvo diesel engines should not be idled for
extended periods at "slow" idle. For extended
idling, engine should run at "fast" idle.
DANGER
The vehicle service brakes or park brake must
be applied whenever NEUTRAL is selected to
prevent unexpected vehicle movement.
CAUTION
Do not allow your vehicle to "coast" in neutral
«N». This practice can result in transmission
damage. Also, no engine braking is available
in neutral.
DESCRIPTION OF AVAILABLE RANGES
R (Reverse)
Press the «R» button to select reverse. Completely stop the vehicle and let the engine return
to idle before shifting from forward range «D» to
reverse «R» or from reverse to forward range.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal driving
conditions. After touching this pad, the vehicle
will start in first or second range and will
automatically upshift to a higher range as output
speed increases. As the vehicle slows down,
output speed decreases, the transmission
Controls and Instruments
automatically downshifts to the correct range. If
a locked brake or a slick surface condition
should occur, the TCM (Transmission Control
Module) will command converter operation
(disconnect lockup) and inhibit downshifts for a
period of time or until normal wheel speed has
been restored.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Brake pedal must be applied when selecting
«D» (Drive) otherwise the transmission will
stay in «N» (Neutral).
NOTE
The transmission should normally be allowed
to shift by itself, but manual shifting can be
done as described below.
1 (First range)
Select this range when pulling through mud and
snow, when speed control is needed for driving
up or down steep grades or when maneuvering
in tight spaces. This range also provides maximum driving torque and engine braking power or
retarder braking effect. In the lower ranges (1,
2, 3 and 4), the transmission will not upshift
above the highest gear selected unless engine
overspeed is detected.
2 (Second range)
Select this range when operating in heavy and
congested traffic. The transmission will start in
first and automatically upshift to second. When
slowing, the transmission will automatically
downshift to first range. Low ranges provide
progressively greater engine and retarder braking power (the lower the range, the greater the
engine and retarder braking effect).
83
3, 4 (Third and fourth ranges)
Select these ranges when driving on moderate
grades or when load and traffic conditions limit
speed.
WARNING
Service brake should not be used to control
the speed of vehicle on long, steep descents.
Instead, lower transmission ranges should be
used (in conjunction with output retarder.
Refer to "Engine Brake" and "Transmission
Retarder" headings in "Other Features"
chapter for details regarding both systems.
This procedure keeps service brake cool and
ready for emergency stopping.
CAUTION
When descending in lower ranges, care must
be taken that engine speed does not exceed
2,450 rpm.
84
Controls and Instruments
VOLVO I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION
I-SHIFT PUSHBUTTON SELECTOR
I-Shift transmission is an automated gearbox
with 12 forward gears and 2 reverse gears. The
clutch operation and gear shifting are fully
automatically so that the driver can concentrate
on the traffic.
07145
DISPLAY
Status of the I-Shift transmission is shown on
the Driver Information Display (DID). Displayed
information is position, selected gear and driving
mode.
PUSHBUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR
The pushbutton shift selector has four gear
positions: R, N, D and M.
R= Reverse
N= Neutral
D= Drive
M= Manual program
It is not possible to shift neither directly from R
position to D or M position nor from D or M
position to R position. N position must be
selected first. If the driver executes such gear
shifts, the transmission will shift automatically to
N position.
R Ù N Ù D or M
I-SHIFT PUSHBUTTON SELECTOR
07145
Controls and Instruments
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
When changing gear, the accelerator pedal
should not be released. The system will govern
the clutch, gearbox and engine speed. The
system selects the gear and the point in time for
gear changing for optimum driving performance
based on accelerator pedal position, road
inclination, etc.
ECONOMY AND PERFORMANCE MODE
When the engine is started, the transmission is
in
Economy
mode.
The
transmission
automatically selects shift points and engine
parameters to maximize fuel economy.
Economy mode is primarily used when driving
under normal conditions.
The Performance mode gives driveability the
highest priority for optimum driving in traffic
condition and gradeability.
NOTE
Operating the vehicle in Performance mode
for extended periods can result in a loss of
fuel economy.
85
When Eco-Roll is enabled, it activates
automatically, but only when the following
conditions exist:
• Accelerator pedal is released.
• Service brake is released.
• Engine brake is in Auto mode
.
• Transmission pushbutton shift selector is in
the D position
• Transmission is operating in the Economy
mode.
• Vehicle is operating on a downhill or uphill
grade not greater than 2%.
• Selected gear is greater than 6.
• Brake cruise set speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h) above cruise set-speed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 78 mph (125
km/h).
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and
antilock brake system (ABS) are not active.
• Exhaust Aftertreatment System regeneration
is not active.
ECO-ROLL MODE (FREEWHEEL FUNCTION)
LIMP HOME MODE
Eco-Roll reduces fuel consumption by
automatically disengaging the driveline when the
engine is not needed to maintain vehicle speed.
When Eco-Roll is active, the engine speed is
temporarily reduced to idle. Eco-Roll can be
used during normal driving with the accelerator
pedal or while in cruise control mode.
Limp home is an emergency mode that can be
engaged if a fault has occurred in the gearbox
that prevents the vehicle from being driven in
automatic, manual or reverse modes.
Eco-Roll is only available when the
engine brake is in Auto mode .
First, set the dashboard Engine
Brake switch to the ON position.
When Eco-Roll is enabled, the DID shows E+.
When Eco-Roll intervenes, the selected gear
displayed in the DID (7–12) will change
momentarily to N1 or N2.
Eco-Roll disengages as soon as the brake pedal
or the accelerator pedal is depressed, but it
remains available. To disable Eco-Roll, set the
dashboard Engine Brake switch to the OFF
position. Eco-Roll is not available when the
or Engine Brake High
Engine Brake Low
modes are selected.
NOTE
Limp Home mode should only be used for
moving short distances.
To activate the Limp Home mode:
• Simultaneously press N
and + buttons. Activating
can only be done while
the vehicle is stationary.
• Select M position or R
position as required.
The driver can select gears for forward driving or
for reversing using the + and – button when
position M (manual program) or R (reverse) is
selected.
86
Controls and Instruments
The following gears are available:
Forward driving - 1, 3 & 5
Reverse driving - R1
To select the reverse driving in Limp Home
mode, simply select position R. Gear changing
can only be done while the vehicle is stationary.
To Deactivate the Limp Home Mode
The Limp Home Mode will be deactivated when
the ignition is turned off.
STARTING AND STOPPING
Starting
The pushbutton shift selector must be in the N
position or the engine will not start. If the
pushbutton shift selector is not in neutral, a
starter protection message will appear in the
DID along with the INFORMATION telltale and
an audible warning.
If there is not enough air pressure in the I-Shift
air tank, a low air supply message will appear in
the DID along with the INFORMATION telltale
light and an audible warning. Start the engine
and allow the air pressure to build in the tank.
Wait until the message and the telltale light turn
off before attempting to shift the transmission
into gear.
The brake pedal must be pressed down when
passing from the N position to another position
otherwise pressing the buttons will have no
effects.
Stopping
When parking the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and place the pushbutton shift
selector to the N position. Make sure the
parking brake is holding the vehicle before
leaving the driver position. Failure to do so can
result in unexpected vehicle movement and can
cause serious personal injury or death.
When the vehicle is stopped:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Select the N position on the pushbutton shift
selector.
3. Turn off the engine.
STARTING THE
DOWNHILL
VEHICLE
UPHILL
AND
Hilly Operating Conditions
When starting the vehicle on an uphill slope:
1. Press the brake pedal.
2. Select the D position on pushbutton shift
selector. The driver can use the – button to
select a lower start gear if wanted.
3. Quickly move your foot from the brake pedal
and completely depress the accelerator
pedal.
CAUTION
Always use the brakes to hold the vehicle
stationary on an uphill stop. Never hold the
vehicle stationary on an uphill slope using the
accelerator pedal. The clutch could overheat,
which could cause it to breakdown.
The I-Shift transmission clutch is a dry disc
type, with no torque converter. Never allow
the clutch to slip in a too high gear when
starting the vehicle. If the clutch overheats, a
high clutch load message or clutch protection
active message will appear in the DID along
with the CHECK telltale light and an audible
warning.
DANGER
The vehicle can roll when stopped on a hill or
grade, or when the vehicle is starting from a
stop on a hill or grade. Always use the brakes
to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill or
grade. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury or death.
Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist provides anti-roll assistance
during the transition from standing still to starting
on a grade. The brake system maintains pressure in the brake chambers for 3 seconds after
the service brake pedal is released, which allows time to the driver to move is foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
Controls and Instruments
Hill Start Assist is only intended to temporarily
hold the vehicle on a grade before the vehicle is
put into motion. The vehicle brake must be
applied, independent of HILL START ASSIST, to
hold the vehicle on a grade for an extended
period of time.
When available, Hill Start Assist is enabled at
starting of the engine. The Hill Start Assist telltale light in the instrument cluster will blink to
indicate that the feature is temporarily disabled.
If a Hill Start Assist fault occurs, the Hill Start
Assist telltale light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate and the feature is permanently unavailable until the fault is repaired.
When Hill Start Assist is enabled, it activates
automatically, but only when the following conditions exist:
• Vehicle speed is zero.
• Vehicle is on an incline or decline greater
than 2%.
• Shift selector is in the D position on an incline
or R position on a decline.
• Service brake is applied.
• ESC (Electronic Stability
functioning normally.
Control)
is
• There has been no ESC activity in the
preceding stops.
When the service brake pedal is released, the
brakes are applied for approximately 3 seconds
or until the accelerator pedal is depressed,
whichever occurs first.
WARNING
Always apply parking brake before leaving
driver’s seat. The driver must not leave the
vehicle when the engine is running and a gear
is selected.
DRIVING
The most efficient way to operate the vehicle is
to use the automatic drive program, which is the
D position on the pushbutton shift selector. Gear
changing is automatic and the driver can
concentrate on the road ahead.
87
NOTE
When driving in automatic drive mode
(position D), the engine brake control should
to maximize the
be in the Auto mode
integration of the transmission and brake
system according to Eco-Roll mode. This
means optimum performance and fuel
economy at all times.
D Position
With the pushbutton shift selector in the D
position, the transmission will automatically
upshift and downshift as necessary to maintain
the desired vehicle speed for the current driving
conditions.
At starting of the vehicle, the gearbox selects
between gear 1-6 the most suitable start gear
with respect to weight and road’s gradient. The
driver can select a pulling away gear different
than the one selected by using the + and buttons.
When the vehicle is moving in automatic drive
mode, the driver can intervene manually, while
maintaining the accelerator pedal depressed, by
selecting a higher or lower gear using the + and
- buttons. The arrows in the display show how
many gears are available to change up or down.
Whenever gear changing is not desired while in
automatic drive mode, change the pushbutton
shift selector from D to M. No further gear
changes will be carried out and the current gear
will remain engaged.
CAUTION
There is a risk of over-revving the engine
when the transmission is locked in a gear.
Damage to the engine may occur. To lock the
transmission in the current gear, change the
pushbutton shift selector from the D position
to the M position. This function can be used
for all 12 forward gears. To return to the
automatic drive mode, set the pushbutton shift
selector back to the D position.
M Position
It is possible to drive the vehicle with full manual
gear changing or take over from the automatic
gear changing system whenever required. Gear
changing is done by first selecting the manual
position M.
88
Controls and Instruments
In manual shift mode, the driver use the + and –
buttons to select gears.
The transmission will not automatically change
gears as the driving conditions change. The
current gear is displayed in the DID along with
the up and down arrows. The number of
available upshifts and downshifts will change as
driving conditions change.
R Position
The system will select R2 automatically when
the pushbutton shift selector is set to R, but if
wanted, the driver can select R1 as reverse gear
manually using the – button. During reverse, it is
possible to shift between gear R1 and R2 using
the + and – buttons.
TOWING
CAUTION
When towing the vehicle, the transmission
output shaft must not be allowed to spin or
turn. If the vehicle is towed with the drive
wheels still in contact with the road surface,
the vehicle axle shafts or driveline must be
removed or disconnected. Do not attempt to
push or pull-start the vehicle.
CAUTION
Make sure axle shafts or driveshaft are
installed correctly after towing. Tighten axle
shaft and driveshaft nuts to the correct torque
settings. Do not invert shafts.
When changing a gear, the accelerator pedal
should not be released.
CAUTION
Starting in a too high gear exposes the clutch
to high levels of wear.
CAUTION
The driver must avoid over-revving the
engine.
Other Features
89
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM................................................................................................ 91
FILTRATION AND REGENERATION UNIT ...........................................................................................................91
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION UNIT .......................................................................................................93
DEF TANK LEVEL – DRIVER WARNING AND INDUCEMENT ............................................................................95
DEF QUALITY – DRIVER WARNING AND INDUCEMENT...................................................................................96
SCR SYSTEM TAMPERING – DRIVER WARNING AND INDUCEMENT.............................................................97
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) MENUS.................................................................................... 98
DRIVING MODE MENU .......................................................................................................................... 98
GAUGES ................................................................................................................................................................98
FUEL DATA.......................................................................................................................................................... 100
TIME / DISTANCE................................................................................................................................................ 100
VEHICLE MESSAGES ......................................................................................................................................... 101
RESET TRIP DATA.............................................................................................................................................. 101
NON-DRIVING/STATIONARY MODE MENUS .................................................................................... 101
DISPLAY SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................... 101
DIAGNOSTICS..................................................................................................................................................... 103
PRE-TRIP ASSISTANT........................................................................................................................................ 104
DATA LOG ........................................................................................................................................................... 105
AFTERTREATMENT............................................................................................................................................ 106
PASSWORD ........................................................................................................................................................ 107
TRANSMISSION RETARDER ................................................................................................................. 107
ENGINE BRAKE....................................................................................................................................... 107
EXHAUST BRAKE ............................................................................................................................................... 108
VOLVO ENGINE BRAKE (VEB)........................................................................................................................... 108
ENGINE BRAKE – AUTO MODE (WITH I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION ONLY)........................................................ 108
ANTILOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) – [AUTOMATIC TRACTION CONTROL (ATC) – ELECTRONIC
STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) (OPTIONAL)].......................................................................................... 109
DRIVER CONTROLLED
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK (DCDL) ............................................................................................................... 109
OPERATION TIPS ............................................................................................................................................... 109
LOCKING THE DCDL .......................................................................................................................................... 110
UNLOCKING THE DCDL ..................................................................................................................................... 110
KNEELING SYSTEM................................................................................................................................ 110
HI-BUOY ................................................................................................................................................... 110
LOW-BUOY .............................................................................................................................................. 111
UNLOADING TAG AXLE ......................................................................................................................... 111
RETRACTABLE TAG AXLE.................................................................................................................... 111
IN-STATION LIGHTING ........................................................................................................................... 111
ENGINE COOLANT HEATER.................................................................................................................. 111
90
Other Features
SWITCHING THE HEATER ON........................................................................................................................... 112
SWITCHING THE HEATER OFF ......................................................................................................................... 112
COOLANT HEATER TIMER ................................................................................................................................ 112
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE...................................................................................................... 114
WHEELCHAIR LIFT SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 114
WHEELCHAIR LIFT AND ACCESS DOORS....................................................................................................... 114
OPERATING THE WHEELCHAIR LIFT ............................................................................................................... 115
THRESHOLD WARNING SYSTEM (TWS) ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................. 116
INTERIOR APPOINTMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 117
EMERGENCY OPERATION ................................................................................................................................ 118
WHEELCHAIR LIFT REMOVAL FOR STORING OR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES........................................... 120
WHEELCHAIR LIFT INSTALLATION................................................................................................................... 121
Other Features
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT
SYSTEM
The exhaust aftertreatment system consists of
two units, the filtration and regeneration unit and
the selective catalytic reduction SCR unit.
FILTRATION AND REGENERATION UNIT
The aftertreatment system primary function is to
capture and oxidize (regenerate) the particulate
matter (soot) in the engine exhaust gases and to
reduce NOx. To achieve this goal, the exhaust
aftertreatment system is split into two main
sections: the exhaust gases first enter the
Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) and Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF) assembly to capture
and regenerate the soot on a regular or passive
basis, then the exhaust gases flow through the
catalytic converter to reduce NOx to minimum
level. Through constant monitoring of the
exhaust gas temperature and the system back
pressure, EMS is able to manage regeneration.
Passive regeneration
Passive regeneration is the process by which
the particulate matter is oxidized due to the heat
generated by the engine internal combustion
process. During normal highway operation,
exhaust temperatures alone are usually high
enough to oxidize accumulating soot. In low
ambient temperatures, however, or in some
stop-and-go applications, the system needs a
little help to regenerate, or clean itself. This
process is called “active” regeneration.
Active regeneration
Active regeneration is necessary when the
engine internal combustion process alone does
not generate enough heat. A dosing system
injects a mist of diesel fuel into the exhaust
system to increase and maintain the
aftertreatment system temperature. Exhaust
temperature must be above 572°F (300°C) to
initiate the oxidation catalyst, which in turn
oxidizes the injected diesel fuel molecules to
achieve up to 1200°F (650°C) exhaust
temperature at the particulate filter.
This
process of active regeneration takes place
during the normal operation cycle of the vehicle
without charges in performance or control for the
operator. EPA2010 compliant Volvo engines
produce less soot, so less active or stationary
regeneration will be required.
91
Stationary (parked) regeneration
In a small number of specific engine duty cycles,
engine control module may not be capable of
completing an active regeneration. In these
situations, the operator will be notified that a
stationary or parked regeneration may be
required. A DPF telltale light will illuminate
indicating the need for user interaction. The
lamp gives the operator a grace period to allow
this process to take place at a time when most
convenient for the operator. This process
requires the vehicle to be parked while a driver
or maintenance technician initiates the
regeneration process using the DID menus.
Once initiated, the stationary regeneration
process will be complete in about 45 minutes.
The driver will be notified of the need for a
stationary regeneration (parked) by illumination
of the DPF REGENERATION telltale light.
92
Other Features
Diesel particulate filter clogging sequence – Instrument cluster telltale light
REGENERATION NEEDED
LEVEL 1
solid
Diesel particulate filter is becoming full
The DPF REGENERATION telltale light illuminates to notify
the driver that a stationary regeneration (parked) will be
required soon. When this lamp is lit, initiate stationary
regeneration process at an appropriate time of day. THERE
IS NO URGENCY AT THIS LEVEL.
REGENERATION REQUIRED
LEVEL 2
flashing
Diesel particulate filter full
If no DPF regeneration occurs after the initial DPF
REGENERATION telltale light illumination, the lamp will
begin blinking and a stationary regeneration should be
initiated as soon as possible in order to prevent from
entering into Level 3.
ATD SERVICE REQUIRED
LEVEL 3
flashing
ENGINE DERATE ACTIVE
+
Diesel particulate filter overfull
If the flashing DPF REGENERATION telltale light is still
ignored, the CHECK telltale light will illuminate. In that
situation, engine performance is limited. Perform a parked
regeneration IMMEDIATELY to avoid further derate and
prevent from entering into Level 4.
LEVEL 4
ATD SERVICE REQUIRED
flashing
ENGINE SHUTDOWN ACTIVE
+
A serious engine problem has occurred. The DPF may be
over its maximum capacity.
+
If a stationary regeneration is still not initiated, a standard
Engine Protection Shutdown sequence will occur. All of the
following dashboard lamps will be present:
Blinking DPF REGENERATION telltale light;
Solid CHECK telltale light;
Solid STOP telltale light.
Once engine derate and/or shutdown sequence is
completed, a stationary regeneration must occur to
continue vehicle operation. If the driver continues to
operate the vehicle without regeneration, additional
measures will be taken to protect the engine and ATD from
damage, up to and including engine shutdown. Parked
regeneration might no longer be possible.
If engine protection has been initiated and forces the
engine to shutdown, you CAN immediately re-start the
engine and perform the necessary steps in order to
initiate a stationary regeneration.
Other Features
Initiating a Stationary (Parked) Regeneration
NOTE
At starting of the engine, if a stationary
regeneration is required, the engine coolant
temperature must reach 140°F (60°C) before
any stationary regeneration may be initiated
and completed. Permit the engine to idle for a
short while or drive the vehicle until engine
temperature increases sufficiently.
WARNING
Do not initiate a stationary regeneration in a
closed area like a garage. Stationary
regenerations must be undertaken outdoors
only.
WARNING
During stationary regeneration, exhaust
temperature may reach up to 1200°F (650°C)
at the particulate filter. Before initiating
stationary regeneration, make sure that the
DPF outlet diffuser is clear of objects and that
no one is working near the DPF outlet diffuser.
WARNING
Hot surfaces. Keep yourself clear of all hot
Aftertreatment Device components, particularly
during and after active or stationary
regeneration. Hot surfaces can cause serious
burns.
NOTE
STATIONARY REGENERATION
This process requires the vehicle to be parked
while the driver or a maintenance technician
initiates the regeneration process.
The DPF REGENERATION telltale light
illuminates to notify the driver of the need and
urgency of a manual stationary regeneration.
DPF REGENERATION telltale light
If stationary regeneration is not performed, this
telltale light will blink, indicating that a stationary
regeneration is required immediately. If
stationary regeneration is still not performed,
93
“engine power derate and shutdown” sequence
may occur as per level 1 to level 4 sequence.
To initiate a stationary regeneration:
 Park the vehicle in a clear area, vehicle
speed must be 0 mph (0 km/h);
 Engine must be on normal idle and fully
warmed up (coolant temperature above
140°F/60°C);
 Apply parking brakes and
transmission to neutral (N).
set
the
 Press the DID ENTER button and then get to
the DID Aftertreatment menu. Select submenu Request Parked REGEN and press
ENTER button to confirm and initiate
regeneration.
The regeneration will begin. Turn off the air
conditioning to reduce engine load. The engine
idling speed will increase to 1600 rpm. Once the
regeneration is completed, the engine speed will
return to normal idle.
Voluntary Interruption
Regeneration
of
a
Stationary
It is possible to interrupt a stationary
regeneration at all time. To do so, set the
ignition key to the OFF position or get to the
DID’s Aftertreatment menu, select Cancel
REGEN and press ENTER button to confirm.
You can stop regeneration simply by releasing
the parking brake. Use this procedure in order to
move the vehicle in a safe area.
If regeneration is interrupted, it is very important
to reinitiate the regeneration as soon as possible.
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION UNIT
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is a
technology that uses Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
and a catalytic converter to reduce nitrogen
oxides (NOx) emissions.
SCR is an exhaust aftertreatment system that
injects small amount of DEF into the exhaust
gas between the DPF and the selective
reduction catalytic converter. DEF turns to
ammonia and carbon dioxide when heated. The
exhaust stream then passes over a catalyst, the
ammonia reacts with the NOx to form nitrogen
and water vapor.
The basic elements of the SCR system consist
of a 15.9 gallons (60 liters) DEF tank complete
94
Other Features
with pump, lines and heating system, a dosing
injector, a catalytic converter and the control and
monitoring system.
Diesel exhaust fluid DEF
When handling DEF solution, it is important that
electrical connectors to be connected or well
encapsulated, otherwise there is a risk that the
DEF will cause oxidation that cannot be
removed. Water or compressed air will not help,
since DEF quickly oxidizes certain metals. If a
disconnected connector comes into contact with
the DEF solution, it must be replaced
immediately to prevent the DEF solution from
creeping further into the copper wiring, which
takes place at a speed of about 2.4 in (60 mm)
per hour.
CAUTION
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is a nontoxic
aqueous solution of urea (32.5%) and ultrapure water (67.5%). Urea is a compound of
nitrogen that turns to ammonia when heated.
The fluid is non flammable, and is not
dangerous when handled as recommended.
However, it is highly corrosive to certain
metals, especially copper and brass.
When detaching hoses and components, do
not spill DEF on disconnected or unsealed
connectors. If DEF is spilled on a
disconnected or unsealed connector, the
connector must be removed immediately and
replaced.
Things to know about spilt diesel exhaust fluid
(DEF):
 If urea solution comes into contact with the
skin, rinse with plenty of water and remove
contaminated clothing.
 If urea solution comes into contact with the
eyes rinse for several minutes and call for
medical help if necessary.
 If inhaled breathe fresh air and call for
medical help if necessary.
 Do not allow the DEF solution to come into
contact with other chemicals.
 The DEF solution is not flammable. If the
DEF solution is exposed to high
temperatures, it breaks down into ammonia
and carbon dioxide.
 The DEF solution is highly corrosive to
certain metals, including copper and
aluminum.
 If the DEF solution is spilled onto the vehicle,
wipe off the excess and rinse with water.
Spilled DEF solution can form concentrated
white crystals on the vehicle. Rinse off these
crystals with water.
WARNING
DEF spilt onto hot components will quickly
vaporize. Turn your face away!
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Consumption
DEF consumption is related to fuel consumption.
In order to meet EPA2010 requirements, DEF
tanks are sized so one refill will be necessary
every two refill of the fuel tank.
Selective catalytic reduction – Driver warning
and inducement
SCR system components must not be removed,
altered or modified in any way. In order to
protect the SCR system from tampering,
inducement measures will occur if the following
states are detected:
 Disconnection of DEF tank level sensor
 Blocked DEF line or dosing valve
 Disconnection of DEF dosing valve
 Disconnection of DEF pump
 Disconnection of SCR wiring harness
 Disconnection of NOx sensor
Other Features
95
DEF TANK LEVEL
DRIVER WARNING AND INDUCEMENT
CONDITION
There is only 2.6 gallons (10
liters) of DEF remaining in
the tank. The actual DEF
level gauge indicates about
12% DEF remaining.
There is only 0.8 gallons (3
liters) of DEF remaining in
the tank. The actual DEF
level
gauge
indicates
“Empty”.
TELLTALE LIGHT AND MESSAGE IN
THE DRIVER INFORMATION
DISPLAY
message:
lighted
solid
None
 DEF LOW
message:
Flashing
INDUCEMENT
 DEF TANK
EMPTY
NEAR
Gradual engine torque
reduction of 25%
 ENGINE IN DERATE
 ADD DEF
The DEF tank is empty and
the
DEF
level
gauge
indicates “Empty”.
moreover
a diesel fuel refueling is
done and the diesel fuel
level gauge increases more
than 15% (approx. 34
gallons/130 liters)
or
the
vehicle
remains
stationary (speed=0) for 20
min. with engine OFF or at
idle.
message:
Flashing
 VEHICLE
SPEED
LIMITED TO 5 mph
(8 km/h)
 ADD DEF
Vehicle road speed
limited (RSL) to 5 mph
(8 km/h)
The vehicle has to
remain
stationary
before 5 mph (8 km/h)
road
speed
limit
becomes active.
NOTE: Repeated acts
of tampering will result
in
more
severe
inducement.
96
Other Features
DEF QUALITY
DRIVER WARNING AND INDUCEMENT
CONDITION
TELLTALE LIGHT AND MESSAGE IN
THE DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY
message:
Poor DEF quality detected (dilution)
Emission
of
initial
troubleshooting code (DTC).
diagnostic
1 hour after poor DEF quality detection
(chronological time after the initial
tampering DTC emission).
lighted
solid
None
 SCR PERFORMANCE
LOW
 ENGINE WILL DERATE
SOON
message:
lighted
solid
INDUCEMENT
 SCR MALFUNCTION
Gradual
engine
torque reduction of
25%.
 ENGINE IN DERATE
 CHECK SCR TO AVOID
5 mph (8km/h) LIMIT
3 hours after poor DEF quality detection
(chronological time after the initial
tampering DTC emission)
moreover
a diesel fuel refueling is done and the
diesel fuel level gauge increases more
than 15% (approx. 34 gallons/130 liters)
message:
lighted
solid
 SERVICE
SYSTEM
SCR
 5 mph (8km/h) LIMIT
or
Vehicle road speed
limited (RSL) to 5
mph (8 km/h)
The vehicle has to
remain stationary
before 5 mph (8
km/h) road speed
limit
becomes
active.
the vehicle remains stationary (speed=0)
for 20 min. with engine OFF or at idle.
Conditions to temporarily exit the 5 mph (8 km/h) road speed limit inducement
First engine restart: At the first engine restart, the engine returns to the 25% torque reduction until
proper DEF quality evaluation occurs. If poor DEF quality is detected during the next monitoring cycle
then the 8 km/h (5 mph) speed limitation will resume after vehicle is stationary for 20 minutes.
After the second engine restart, Premium Tech Tool is required to exit the 5 mph (8 km/h) RSL.
With Premium Tech Tool: Invoke 25% torque reduction until proper DEF quality evaluation occurs. If
poor DEF quality is detected during the next monitoring cycle then the 8 km/h (5 mph) speed limitation
will resume after vehicle is stationary for 20 minutes.
Repeating poor DEF quality within 40 hours since correction will resume the inducement stage.
If correction occurs during road speed limitation, repeating poor DEF quality will invoke immediate 25%
engine torque reduction, then 5 mph (8 km/h) road speed limitation upon vehicle stationary state of 20
minutes.
Other Features
97
SCR SYSTEM TAMPERING
DRIVER WARNING AND INDUCEMENT
CONDITION
TELLTALE
INDUCEMENT
None
Tampering detected
Tampering DTC pending.
lighted solid
None
Tampering detected
Tampering DTC confirmed.
1 hour after tampering DTC detection
(chronological time after the initial tampering
DTC emission).
3 hours after tampering DTC detection
(chronological time after the initial tampering
DTC emission).
lighted solid
Gradual engine torque reduction
of 25%.
lighted solid
Vehicle road speed limited (RSL)
to 5 mph (8 km/h)
lighted solid
moreover
a diesel fuel refueling is done and the diesel
fuel level gauge increases more than 15%
(approx. 34 gallons/130 liters)
The vehicle has to be stationary
before 5 mph (8 km/h) road
speed limit becomes active.
or
the vehicle remains stationary (speed=0) for
20 min. with engine OFF or at idle.
Correcting the SCR tampering condition will exit inducement.
Repeating SCR tampering within 40 hrs since correction will resume the inducement at the same
inducement stage and timer status existing at the time of correction.
If correction occurs during road speed limitation, repeating tampering will invoke immediate 25% engine
torque reduction, then 5 mph (8 km/h) road speed limitation upon vehicle stationary state of 20 minutes.
98
Other Features
DRIVER INFORMATION
(DID) MENUS
There are Driving
Several sub-menus
while the vehicle is
menu is accessible
parked.
DISPLAY
and Non-Driving menus.
are password-protected
parked. The Non-Driving
only when the vehicle is
“DRIVING’’ MODE MENUS
Gauges
1.
Current Gear Position (I-Shift)
2.
Outside Temperature
3.
Engine Oil Temperature
4.
Transmission Fluid Temperature
5.
Compass
6.
Accessories Air Pressure
7.
A/C Compressor Pressure
8.
Battery Voltage
9.
Allison Transmission Oil Life
Fuel Data
1.
Fuel flow
2.
Trip Fuel Used
3.
Distance to Empty
Time-Distance
1.
Time and Date
2.
Alarm Clock
3.
Distance to Destination
4.
Average Trip Speed
5.
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Pre-Trip Assistant
1.
Exterior Light Inspection
2.
Air Leakage Monitor
Datalog
1.
Vehicle ID
2.
Total Data
3.
Trip Data
4.
Reset Trip Data
Aftertreatment
1.
Request Parked REGEN
2.
ATS Status
3.
Cancel REGEN
Password
1.
Enter Password
GAUGES
There are several gauges in this menu. The
gauges are used to view current status of
important functions in the vehicle.
1.
Current Gear Position (I-Shift
transmission)
Indicates the current gear position selected on
the I-Shift transmission.
D= drive
N= neutral
R= reverse
M= manual
Vehicle Messages
Reset Trip Data
“NON-DRIVING/STATIONARY’’ MODE
MENUS
Display Settings
1.
Language
2.
Units
3.
Time/Date
4.
Favorite Display Setting
5.
Display Light
6.
Change Password
Diagnostics
1.
View Active Faults
2.
View Inactive Faults
3.
Cluster Selftest
4.
Part Number
5.
Reset Inactive Faults
6.
Vehicle Tests
2.
Outside Temperature
Other Features
99
3.
Engine Oil Temperature
Selection this gauge will display the engine oil
temperature.
7.
Battery Voltage
Displays the current 12-volts and 24-volts
system voltage.
4.
Transmission Fluid Temperature
8.
A/C Compressor Pressure
Displays the A/C compressor suction pressure
value (LoS=low side) and discharge pressure
value (HiS=high side).
5.
Compass
9.
Allison Transmission Oil Life
Displays the percentage of the calculated
remaining life of the transmission oil. New oil is
displayed as 99%. Refer to Appendix C for more
details.
6.
Accessories Air Pressure
100
Other Features
FUEL DATA
The Fuel Data menu provides information on the
fuel consumption of the vehicle in various
situations. For example, how much fuel has
been used, how much fuel is remaining, how
much fuel is remaining before refueling the
vehicle.
1.
Fuel Flow (gph)
TIME/DISTANCE
The time and date can be set in the
Time/Distance menu. The alarm clock can also
be set from this menu. Following the alarm clock
menu is the Distance to Destination selection,
which allows the operator to see the distance to
travel before destination. Average trip speed is
also shown. By specifying the distance to your
destination, the vehicle can calculate the
estimated time of arrival (ETA).
1.
Time And Date
Adjust time and date with this menu. The
instrument cluster has its own internal battery,
so the date and date setting is keep in memory
even if the vehicle’s battery is disconnected.
2.
Trip Fuel Used
Indicates the total fuel consumption since the
last reset.
NOTE: Use Reset function before each new trip.
2.
Alarm Clock
Use this function to program an alarm on the
instrument cluster clock.
3.
Distance to Empty
Indicates the distance that can be traveled with
the quantity of fuel that remains in the tank.
3.
Distance to Destination
If the distance to be traveled before reaching the
destination was entered in Estimated Time of
Arrival (ETA) menu, this function will display the
remaining distance to be traveled before
reaching destination. Two independent driving
distances can be entered, for example, 1 could
be for leg 1 distance and 2 would be the entire
trip.
Other Features
101
VEHICLE MESSAGES
Use this function to consult the vehicle active
messages that were previously displayed as
pop-up messages and then acknowledged.
When consulting a message, the corresponding
STOP, CHECK or INFORMATION warning light
will illuminate. Scroll through the messages
using the up/down button. Press ESC button to
return to main menu.
4.
Average Trip Speed
This function displays the average speed for the
current travel. The average trip speed is
calculated as the distance traveled divided by
the time the engine has been running (since the
last reset). Two average trip speeds can be
measured. Use Reset function before each new
travel to start new measurements.
RESET TRIP DATA
When the Reset Trip Data menu is open,
pressing and holding down the Enter button for
more than 1 second resets the functions listed
below. This function will permit to the system to
calculate new value from the point of resetting.
- Trip Fuel Used
- Average Trip Speed
5.
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
This function will display the estimated time of
arrival if the distance to be traveled is entered
first, in this menu. To set distance to be traveled,
press ENTER and enter the distance left to drive
in mile or km using the DID control buttons.
NON-DRIVING/STATIONARY MODE MENUS
DISPLAY SETTINGS
The Display Settings menu is used to change
languages and units. The password, time and
date can also be changed. The backlight and
contrast of the display screen can be adjusted.
1.
Language
2.
Units
Use this function to select desired unit formats
for:
102
Other Features
 Distance (miles or km);
 Fuel consumption (km/l, l/100km, mpg US or
IMP);
 Temperature (°C or °F).
Example: You whish to display the engine oil
temperature at the Gauge 1 position.
1. Use UP/DOWN button until Gauge 1 position
is selected.
2. Press ENTER button to confirm.
3. Use UP/DOWN button to scroll through the
available gauges. When the engine oil
temperature gauge is displayed, press
ENTER button to confirm (repeat steps 1-3 to
change Gauge 2 and Gauge 3 if needed).
5.
Display Light
The Display Light menu has three sub-menus:
• Contrast
Adjust the contrast with the UP/DOWN button
and press ENTER button to confirm.
• Backlight
In this menu, the display lighting can be adjusted
relative to other instrument lighting with the
UP/DOWN button.
3.
Time/Date
Select the time and date format (am, pm, 24h)
using this function.
4.
Favorite Display Setting
Use this menu to select your favorite
gauges 1, 2 and 3 and replace the
gauges. On vehicles provided with the
transmission, Favorite Display Gauge 3
be edited as it is kept for display
transmission status.
display
default
I-Shift
cannot
of the
• Night/Day
Use the Night/Day menu to choose a dark
background with light text and images or a light
background with dark text and images. Press
ENTER button to toggle between Night and Day.
6.
Change Password
Use this menu to change the current password.
This menu is only accessible if the correct
password is entered. The default password is
0000.
1. Mark which password is to be changed with
the display UP/DOWN button.
2. Confirm with ENTER button.
3. Set the first digit with the UP/DOWN button.
4. Step to the next digit using ENTER button.
5. Step backwards with ESC button.
Other Features
Telltale lights test
103
Telltales illuminate for
approximately
five
seconds.
Press the Esc button to
cancel the test.
Analog gauges
DIAGNOSTICS
The Diagnostics menu enables fault tracing on
the control units in the vehicle to check for faults.
Instrument tests are available to check the
telltales, gauges, display and speaker. The part
number of a control unit can be identified in the
part number menu.
1.
View Active Fault
A list of the control units on the vehicle is
displayed. Use this function to check for active
faults on specific control units.
The
indicators
move
forwards and backwards
between
the
end
positions. They do not
show any particular value.
This is just a check to
confirm that the indicators
move, and to make sure
the operators are working.
Press the Esc button to
cancel the test.
Display test
Speaker Test
The entire display lights
up until the Esc button is
pressed.
A sound is emitted
through the speakers.
Press the Esc button to
cancel the test.
4.
Part Number
A list of the control units on the vehicle with their
part numbers is displayed in the Part Number
menu.
2.
View Inactive Fault
Use this function to check for inactive faults on
specific control units.
3.
Cluster Selftest
Use this menu to check proper functioning of the
following components:
- Telltale lights
- Analog gauges
- Display
- Speakers
The following table describes the available tests.
To cancel a test, press the ESC button).
5.
Reset Inactive Faults
Use this menu to delete an inactive fault for a
particular control unit. Note: it is not possible to
delete inactive faults of the Engine ECU.
6.
Vehicle Test
Use this menu to perform tests of the dashboard
switches. You can also test some electrical
components with this menu (electrical motors,
contactors, etc.). For more information, refer to
section 06: Electrical, under “Test mode for
electric motors” paragraph of the Maintenance
Manual.
104
Other Features
PRE-TRIP ASSISTANT (option)
The Pre-Trip Assistance option is a tool to assist
the driver in completing the pre-trip inspection of
the vehicle. This option is not a substitute for a
complete pre-trip inspection. If any system of the
vehicle does not pass inspection, the error must
be corrected before operating the vehicle. The
available pre-trip tests include the Exterior Light
Inspection check, and the Air Leakage check.
2.
Air leakage Monitor
The Air Leakage check allows the driver to
accurately measure the amount of air pressure
drop in the front and rear brake air systems.
After selecting this test from the DID, you are
prompted to apply the service brake for 60
seconds. After applying and holding the service
brake for 60 seconds, the DID will display the
amount of pressure drop in the brake system.
Before starting the test through the DID,
complete the following:
1.
Exterior Light Inspection
The Exterior Light Inspection check repeatedly
turns all exterior lights on/off for the vehicle. This
allows the operator to start the test, exit the
vehicle and do a visual check that all exterior
lighting is functioning properly.
a.
Start the engine and check that the brake
systems air pressure is greater than 100
psi.
b.
Turn engine off.
c.
Release the brakes and allow the system
to settle (air gauge needle stops moving).
d.
Press the ENTER button to start the test.
e.
If the air tanks pressure is too low to
perform the test (pressure must be
greater than 100 psi), the following
messages will appear.
Other Features
f.
g.
You must press and hold brake pedal for
60 seconds, as instructed.
Once the brake pressure test is
completed the pressure leak test results
are displayed.
DATA LOG
1.
105
Vehicle ID
3.
Trip Data
This menu displays the trip information listed
below. This function must be reset before each
measurement (before each new trip or leg)
using the Reset Trip Data menu.
Available information for the trip or leg is:
 Trip distance (miles or km)
 Trip fuel average (mpg, liter/100km; km/liter)
 Trip fuel used (gallons or liters)
 Trip duration on cruise control (hours)
 Trip duration with engine rpm greater than
economy rpm (hours)
 Trip duration while engine rpm is greater than
the desire maximum rpm RPM Limit set in
Fleet Limits sub-menu (hours)
 Trip fuel used with engine rpm greater than
the economy rpm (gallons/liters)
 Trip average speed (mph, km/h)
 Trip duration with speed greater than the
maximum desired speed as set in Fleet
Limits sub-menu (hours)
 Trip engine hours
 Trip duration on engine idle (hours)
 Trip fuel used while in engine idle (gallons,
liters)
2.
Total Data
Total Data menu indicates the accumulated
engine values that have been logged during the
lifetime of the engine ECU.
Available information:
 Total distance traveled
 Total fuel used
 Total engine hours
 Total idle time
 Total PTO hours
 total engine revolutions
4.
Reset Trip Data
This menu can only be accessed if the correct
password has been entered.
Use this function to reset measurements of the
Trip Data menu before each new trip or leg.
106
Other Features
AFTERTREATMENT
This menu permits to the driver to initiate a
stationary regeneration, to check the status of
the aftertreatment system and to interrupt
regeneration.
1.
Request Parked REGEN
Use this function to initiate a stationary (parked)
regeneration.
2.
ATS Status
The Aftertreatment status sub-menus provide
information about the conditions required for
performing regeneration. The status can be OK
(regeneration allowed), CHECK (regeneration
not allowed) or N/A (not applicable). When ATS
Status is selected, the following sub-menus are
available.
Soot Level Gauge
From the ATS Status sub-menu, you can view
the soot level for the Aftertreatment system.
When the soot level is high, regeneration is
necessary. L1, L2, L3 and L4 under the scale
correspond to Level 1 up to Level 4 (see Diesel
particulate filter clogging sequence – Engine
indicator lamp).
Other Features
107
The retarder is provided with control buttons on
the steering wheel and a lever on the steering
column (refer to “CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS”
chapter).
NOTE
Extended use will raise the temperature of the
transmission fluid.
3.
Cancel REGEN
From the Aftertreatment main menu, you can
cancel a REGEN cycle.
The retarder helps reduce speed on grades
without using the vehicle's conventional service
braking system. This virtually eliminates brake
overheating and reduces the risk of a runaway
vehicle. A retarder greatly increases the service
life of brake pads and discs, resulting in reduced
brake maintenance costs.
NOTE
The stoplights automatically illuminate when
the vehicle is slowing down after application
of the transmission retarder.
NOTE
PASSWORD
Certain functions are password-protected.
These passwords give the user access to all
password-protected functions. The default
password is 0000.
1.
Password
The following menus are password-protected
and marked with a key symbol in the menus:
- Change Password
- Fleet ID
- Reset Trip Data
- Fault Diagnostics
- Inactive Faults
TRANSMISSION RETARDER
The transmission retarder is an optional device
that helps to reduce the speed of a vehicle. It
improves vehicle control, increases driving
safety and permits more economical operation.
The retarder provides slowing power when it is
most needed, such as when descending
mountain roads, in stop-and-go traffic and on
crowded freeways.
The transmission retarder is a vehicle-slowing
device, not a vehicle-stopping device. It is not a
substitute for the service braking system. The
service brake must be used to bring the vehicle
to a complete stop.
For vehicles equipped with the Antilock
Braking System (ABS), as the wheels start to
lock up on slippery roads, the output retarder
automatically deactivates until the wheels roll
freely.
ENGINE BRAKE
WARNING
A vehicle speed retarding device (such as
engine brake) is not intended to replace the
service brake systems on your vehicle nor
intended to bring your vehicle to a stop. A
vehicle speed retarding device is only
intended to reduce the speed of your vehicle
under certain conditions.
Several types of engine brake can be installed
or are standard on certain engines. All are
used to reduce wear on the vehicle brake
linings.
WARNING
When descending significant grades, use the
service brake as little as possible. If the
engine does not slow the vehicle to a safe
speed, apply service brake and shift to a
lower range. Let the engine (and engine
brake) slow the vehicle. Keep brakes cool and
ready for emergency stopping.
108
Other Features
NOTE
When driving with cruise control, the exhaust
brake automatically engages if the selected
cruise speed is exceeded by approximately 4
mph (7 km/h). The exhaust brake is then
disengaged when the speed has returned
close to selected cruise speed, provided that
the engine brake was previously enabled.
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with the I-Shift
transmission, any increase of the braking
to Engine
power, such as from Auto mode
, from Auto mode
to Engine
Brake Low
or from Engine Brake Low
Brake High
will deactivate the
to Engine Brake High
cruise control.
EXHAUST BRAKE
The exhaust brake provides about 66 % of the
total available engine braking power.
The
exhaust brake is most effective at high engine
speeds (1500 to 2300 rpm). The exhaust brake
is automatically disengaged if the engine speed
drops to or below 1100 rpm.
This engine brake mode provides low braking
power by containing the exhaust gases in the
exhaust manifold, thereby making the engine
work against the back pressure. This provides a
retarding force on the drive wheels.
The following must be in effect for the exhaust
brake function:
to provide to provide 100 % of the maximum
available braking power.
The engine brake control on the steering wheel
is achieved by the use of three buttons: OFF,
and HIGH
. With the Engine Brake
LOW
button depressed, only the exhaust
LOW
brake is engaged. With the Engine Brake HIGH
button, both the exhaust brake and the
compression brake are activated.
VEB = Exhaust Brake + Compression Brake
The following must be in effect for the VEB to
function:
 The engine brake switch found on the
dashboard is set to the ON position
 The Retarder/Engine Brake Low
button
on the steering wheel controls is depressed
 The vehicle speed is over 7.5 mph (12 km\h)
 Engine temperature is greater than 110°F
(43°C)
 Accelerator pedal is fully released
 Engine speed exceeds 1150 rpm
ENGINE BRAKE – AUTO MODE
(WITH I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION ONLY)
The Auto mode
supplies 66 % of the
maximum available braking power. To engage
the engine brake Auto mode , set the engine
brake switch to the ON position.
 The engine brake switch found on the
dashboard is set to the ON position
button
 The Retarder/Engine Brake Low
on the steering wheel controls is depressed
 Accelerator pedal is fully released
Engine Brake switch
 Engine speed exceeds 1150 rpm
VOLVO ENGINE BRAKE (VEB)
VEB has a higher braking effect than the
exhaust brake. This engine brake mode is most
effective at high engine speeds (1500 to 2300
rpm). It is automatically disengaged if engine
speed drops below 1000 rpm.
The VEB is engaged using the Retarder/Engine
button located on the steering
Brake High
wheel. It works together with the exhaust brake
When in Auto mode
, the
engine
brake
engages
simultaneously with service
brakes upon pressing of the
brake pedal. The engine
braking power varies with the
brake pedal position. The
further the pedal is depressed,
the more total braking power is
provided.
Other Features
To switch to the engine brake Auto mode
when the engine brake is already engaged in
or High
braking power, simply press
Low
the Engine Brake OFF switch located on the
steering wheel.
ANTILOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
– [AUTOMATIC TRACTION CONTROL
(ATC) – ELECTRONIC STABILITY
PROGRAM (ESP) (OPTIONAL)]
The purpose of the Antilock Braking System
(ABS) is to maintain vehicle stability and control
during braking and to minimize the stopping
distance in any road condition.
On slippery roads and more generally in
emergency situations, over-braking frequently
induces wheel locking. Wheel locking greatly
increases breaking distance on any road
surface. Locked wheels also impede directional
control and cause severe tire abrasion. An
antilock braking system provides maximum
braking
performance
while
maintaining
adequate control on slippery roads.
The basis of ABS is constant monitoring of
wheel parameters during braking. Sensors on
each wheel of the front and drive axles
constantly measure wheel speed during braking.
This information is transmitted to a four-channel
electronic processor which senses when any
wheel is about to lock. Modulating valves
quickly adjust brake pressure (up to 5 times
every second) to prevent wheel lock. Each
wheel is therefore controlled according to the
available grip.
In this way, the vehicle is brought to a stop in the
shortest possible time while remaining stable
and under the driver's control.
WARNING
Vehicles following ABS-equipped vehicles
may not be able to brake as fast on slippery
roads.
In addition to the ABS function, advanced
models of Bendix controllers may be installed
(Optional) to provide an Automatic Traction
Control (ATC) feature and also provide ABSbased stability features referred to as ESP
Electronic Stability Program. Bendix ATC can
improve vehicle traction during acceleration, and
lateral stability while accelerating through
curves. ATC utilizes Engine Torque Limiting
(ETL) where the ECU communicates with the
109
engine’s controller and/or Differential Braking
(DB) where individual wheel brake applications
are used to improve vehicle traction.
The Bendix ESP system is an ABS-based
stability system that enhances vehicle stability
by both reducing engine throttle and by applying
vehicle braking based on actual vehicle
dynamics. Accordingly, the ESP system is
available only on specific approved vehicle
platforms after vehicle application and
development efforts and validation testing. Only
certain limited variations of an approved vehicle
platform are permitted without further validation
of the ESP system application.
WARNING
In the case where a vehicle equipped with the
ESP system pulls a trailer, the latter must be
equipped with ABS.
ESP stability system consists of Yaw Control
(YC) and Roll Stability Program (RSP) features.
CAUTION
Even with ESP-equipped vehicles, the driver
remains responsible for ensuring vehicle
stability during operation.
DRIVER CONTROLLED
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK (DCDL)
By actuating the electric switch, the driver can
lock or unlock differential action.
The purpose of the DCDL is to provide
maximum vehicle traction and control on
unfavorable road or highway surfaces. When the
DCDL is actuated, a clutch collar completely
locks the differential case, gearing, and axle
shafts together. This feature maximizes traction
to both wheels. The lock position will also
protect against spinout damage to the
differential. The DCDL should not be actuated
when favorable road conditions exist.
OPERATION TIPS
1. The DCDL can be locked or unlocked if the
vehicle is standing still or moving at a
constant low speed when the wheels are not
spinning, slipping, or losing traction.
2. When the DCDL is locked, operate the
vehicle at low speeds. DCDL will not engage
110
Other Features
and will disengage in speed higher than 5
MPH (8 km/h).
3. When the DCDL is locked, the vehicle’s
turning radius will increase. This condition is
called “understeer.” The driver must use
caution, good judgment and drive at low
speeds when operating the vehicle with the
DCDL locked.
4. Always unlock the DCDL as soon as the
need for maximum traction has passed and
the vehicle is traveling on a good road or
highway.
5. Do not lock the DCDL when the wheels are
slipping or losing traction, or damage to the
axle can result.
6. Do not lock the DCDL when the vehicle is
traveling down steep grades, or potential
loss of vehicle stability could occur.
LOCKING THE DCDL
When encountering poor road or highway
conditions where maximum traction is needed,
follow the recommended procedures:
1. Without the wheels spinning, slipping or
losing traction, flip the DCDL control switch
to the “LOCK” position while maintaining a
constant vehicle speed.
2. Let up momentarily on the accelerator to
relieve torque on the gearing, allowing the
DCDL to lock.
3. When the DCDL is fully locked, the vehicle
will have an “understeer” condition when
making turns. Proceed cautiously over poor
road or highway conditions.
UNLOCKING THE DCDL
When the vehicle can safely operate and driving
conditions have improved, disengage the DCDL
following the recommended procedures:
1. Flip the control switch to the “UNLOCK”
position, when the vehicle is stopped or
when traveling at low speed while the
wheels are not spinning, slipping or losing
traction.
2. Let up momentarily on the accelerator to
relieve torque on the gearing, allowing the
DCDL to unlock.
3. Resume driving at normal speed using good
driving judgment.
KNEELING SYSTEM
This system lowers the front end, enabling
passengers to get on and off the coach without
any difficulty.
NOTE
This coach is equipped with an interlock
system which automatically applies the
parking brake when the kneeling system is
activated.
To operate, stop the coach, set the transmission
to neutral (N), then push down the rocker switch
located on the dashboard. (Refer to "Controls &
Instruments" chapter). The parking brake will be
applied automatically and a status line
pictogram will appear on the DID to indicate that
the front of the coach is being lowered.
To raise the front of the coach to its normal
height, push up the rocker switch. The front end
will rapidly rise up. The system will release the
parking brake and shift the transmission to the
previously selected range.
CAUTION
Avoid parking the coach too close to the
sidewalk or to other obstacles which could
damage the coach during kneeling.
NOTE
Kneeling is disabled when the entrance door
is open.
NOTE
The kneeling system does not operate when
the coach is traveling over 5 mph (8 km/h).
Consequently, the driver cannot inadvertently
operate the kneeling system at higher speeds.
HI-BUOY
The coach may be equipped with the optional
front Hi-Buoy or full Hi-Buoy. The front Hi-Buoy
system has the same functions as front
kneeling. In addition it enables passengers to
get on or off the coach easily by raising the front
end about 4 inches (100 mm), which may prove
useful when the dock is higher than usual. The
front Hi-Buoy is combined with front kneeling to
increase flexibility of the system. Refer to
"Controls & Instruments" chapter.
The full Hi-Buoy system raises the whole coach
about 4 inches (100 mm). It can be used to
Other Features
enable passengers to get on or off the coach
easily, and to safely travel roads with high
obstacles. Refer to "Controls & Instruments"
chapter.
NOTE
The Hi-Buoy system does not operate when
the coach is traveling over 5 mph (8 km/h).
Consequently, the driver cannot inadvertently
operate the Hi-Buoy system at higher speeds.
LOW-BUOY
This system lowers the coach about 4 inches
(100 mm). It enables the coach to drive through
underpasses where the height is less than 12
feet (3.7 m).
Low-Buoy operation is controlled by a valve
located on the right lateral console. The valve
can be switched to either LOW-BUOY or
NORMAL positions. A warning light on the
dashboard will indicate that the coach is being
lowered. Refer to "Controls & Instruments"
chapter.
CAUTION
Avoid parking too close to the curb or other
obstacles that could damage the coach during
low-buoy operation.
NOTE
The Low-Buoy cannot be activated when the
coach is traveling over 5 mph (8 km/h).
Consequently, the driver cannot inadvertently
operate the Low-Buoy system at higher
speeds.
UNLOADING TAG AXLE
To reduce the turning radius, the air springs
pressure will be automatically reduced by 75%
when the coach is moving at speed lower than 5
mph (8 km/h) and with more than 1½ turn from
the steering.
RETRACTABLE TAG AXLE
The standard tag axle retraction system is
controlled by a valve located on the right lateral
console. The valve can be switched to either
the WHEELS UP or WHEELS DOWN position.
The axle will be raised or lowered by air
pressure according to the valve position. Refer
to "Controls & Instruments" chapter.
111
The tag axle service brakes operate only when
the tag axle is in the WHEELS DOWN position.
Never lower the tag axle while the coach is
moving. When the tag axle is in the WHEELS
UP position, the corresponding indicator light will
illuminate. The indicator light will start flashing
and an audible alarm will sound to warn the
driver if the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20
km/h) with tag axle raised. The tag axle can be
raised in tight maneuvering areas like in a
parking lot or to make it easier to turn a short
corner. The tag axle shortens the wheelbase
and allows tighter turning. Raising the tag axle
transfers extra weight and additional traction to
the drive wheels providing improved control on
slippery roads.
CAUTION
Do not use tag axle in raised position for an
extended period. Raising tag axle increases
load on the drive axle, suspension and tires.
Do not drive vehicle with tag axle raised when
speed is exceeding 12 mph (20 km/h).
In order to prevent damage to the suspension,
always raise the tag axle before lifting the
coach.
IN-STATION LIGHTING
The in-station lighting system circuit is linked
with the optional battery charger: When the
charger is connected to an external power
source, the in-station lighting circuit can be
energized without depleting the batteries.
The receptacle used for the battery charger is
located on the main power compartment door.
ENGINE COOLANT HEATER
This optional auxiliary heating system is used for
preheating and retaining the heat of watercooled engines. It can be used before startup to
ease starting and to provide rapid operation of
the interior heating system. It can also be used
with the engine running to maintain coolant heat
and interior temperature.
The heater operates independently of the
engine. It is connected to the cooling system,
heating circuits and to the vehicle’s fuel and
electrical system.
112
Other Features
requirement). The water temperature
controlled by the built-in water thermostat.
WARNING
The coolant heating system uses the same
fuel as the engine. Do not operate in a closed
building or while refueling. Operate only in a
well ventilated area.
SWITCHING THE HEATER ON
The timer light illuminates when the heater is
switched ON. Air is forced in to flush out the
combustion chamber of residual gases and the
water circulation pump begins operating. The
fuel metering pump delivers fuel in precise
amounts to the combustion chamber, where fuel
and combustion air form a combustible mixture
which is ignited by the ignition unit.
Once the flame sensor has signaled to the
control unit that combustion has taken place, the
ignition unit is switched OFF. The dashboard
telltale light will illuminate to indicate when the
burner is ON.
Hot combustion gases are diverted at the end of
the flame pipe and are then forced through the
indirect heating surfaces of the heat exchanger.
The heat exchanger transfers the heat to the
coolant water passing through the heat
exchanger.
is
The water circulation pump remains in operation
as long as the heater is operating, even during
the regulated intervals and during the delayed
cut-out of the heater. The pump can also be
operated independently of the heater by means
of an appropriate circuit. The heater can be
switched ON at any time (i.e., during the delayed
cut-out period). Ignition takes place after the
delayed cut-out time expires.
SWITCHING THE HEATER OFF
The fuel supply is interrupted when the heater is
switched OFF. This causes the flame to go out
and a delayed cut-out of 2.5 minutes begins.
The circulating combustion air flushes the
remaining combustion gases out of the chamber
and cools off the heated parts on the exhaust
side of the heat exchanger. The water
circulation pump continues to transfer the latent
heat present in the heat exchanger, thus
preventing hot spots. Once the delayed cut-out
time expires, both the combustion air blower and
the water circulation pump switch OFF
automatically. A cut-out will automatically take
place in case of heater failure. Refer to
Technical Information chapter for additional
information.
COOLANT HEATER TIMER
The timer, located on L.H. lateral console is
used to program the starting and stopping time
of the preheating system and to give Fault
Codes. The system indicator light, located on
the timer, illuminates when the system is
functional.
CAUTION
The preheating system should not operate for
more than one hour before starting engine as
this could discharge batteries.
WARNING
Preheating system must not operate when
vehicle is parked inside or during fuel fill
stops.
LOCATION OF PREHEATER
18607
The heater is thermostatically controlled and
operates intermittently (i.e., the switched-on time
of the burner varies depending on the heat
NOTE
Preheating system uses the same fuel as the
engine.
Other Features
113
Switching Heater ON (Instant Heating) With
Ignition ON:
Timer operating instructions (Spheros)
Press button (7).
Heater is switched on
(continuous operation) and continues to operate
until button (7) is pressed again or ignition is
switched off.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off while heater is in
operation, the remaining operating time of 15
minutes flashes on the display and the heater
will continue to operate for this period of time.
TIMER
22223
These instructions refer to the Spheros timer
illustrated above.
Switching Heater ON (Instant Heating) With
Ignition OFF:
Remaining Operating Time
Press button (7). Heater is switched on for
preset operating time (the factory-set heater
operating duration is 60 minutes)
The remaining operating time refers to the
period of time the heater still continues to remain
in operation. It may be changed while the
heater is in operation.
Setting the Digital Timer
After the power has been connected, all
symbols on the digital display are flashing. The
time of the day and the day of the week must be
set.
All flashing symbols of the timer can be set by
means of the Forward (9) or Reverse (8)
buttons.
When buttons (8) and (9) are pressed for more
than 2 seconds, the quick digit advance mode is
activated.
Switching Heater OFF
Press button (7). The heater starts its after-run
cycle and switches off thereafter.
Presetting Starting Time
1. Press button (6). Memory location number
flashes.
NOTE
By repeatedly pressing button (6), starting
time 2 or 3 can be preset.
2. Press button (8) or (9) until correct startup
time is set.
Setting the Time and Day of the Week
3. Wait 5 seconds. Preset starting time is
stored and day of week flashes.
1. Press button (5) for more than 2 seconds
(time display flashes).
4. Press button (8) or (9) to select the correct
startup day of week.
2. Press (8) or (9) button to set the time of day.
5. Wait 5 seconds. The startup day of week is
stored.
3. Wait 5 seconds. The time of day is stored
(day of week flashes).
4. Press (8) or (9) button to set the correct day
of week.
5. Wait 5 seconds. The day of week is stored.
Viewing the Time (Ignition ON)
Continuous display of current time and day of
the week.
Viewing the Time (Ignition OFF)
Briefly press button (5) to display current time
and day for 5 seconds.
The number of memory location remains on the
display. The timer is now in the programmed
mode and will switch the heater on at the preset
time.
NOTE
We recommend that memory locations 1 and
2 be used for presetting times within 24 hours
of setting the timer. Memory location 3 can be
used for a starting time within the next 7 days
of setting the timer.
114
Other Features
Recalling Preset Times
Press (6) repeatedly until the desired memory
location number and preset time are displayed.
Canceling Preset Time
Press button (6) repeatedly until no more
memory location number is visible on the
display.
Setting Operating Time
1. With heater off, press button (8). Operating
time flashes.
2. Press button (8) or (9) to set the operating
time (between 1 and 120 minutes)
3. Wait 5 seconds. Operating time is stored.
The heater remains in operation for the preset
time (except for continuous operation).
Setting the Remaining Operating Time
1. With heater in operation, press button (8).
Remaining operating time flashes.
WARNING
The preheating system uses the same fuel as
the engine. Do not operate in a building or
while refueling. Operate only in a wellventilated area.
WHEELCHAIR LIFT SYSTEM
Read
and
understand
the
RICON
Service/Owner Manual before attempting to use
the wheelchair lift. The instructions below are a
quick reference and serve to complement the
information provided by RICON.
WARNING
To operate the optional wheelchair lift, the
coach must be parked on a flat and level
surface, with the parking brake applied.
2. Set remaining time with button (8) or (9).
Activate the lift mechanism circuit by pressing
down on the wheelchair rocker switch on the
dashboard.
3. Wait 5 seconds. Remaining operating time
is stored.
WHEELCHAIR LIFT AND ACCESS DOORS
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
The diagnostic code system in Webasto timers
is standard. Refer to the Maintenance Manual
and to Webasto manual for more information.
NOTE
If there are no heater faults, the heater will go
through a normal start cycle and regulate
based on thermostat setting.
NOTE
Switch on the preheating system briefly about
once a month, even during the warm season.
CAUTION
When welding on the vehicle, disconnect the
preheater module connector in order to
protect this system from voltage surges.
CAUTION
To avoid running down the batteries, do not
turn on the preheating system for more than
one hour before starting the engine.
Open the lift mechanism access door and
carefully lower. Pull the wheelchair access door
operating handle in the left section of the lift
mechanism compartment and swing the door
until locked open.
A light inside the vehicle illuminates the doorway
when the wheelchair access door is open.
A telltale light on the dashboard illuminates
when the lift mechanism access door or the
wheelchair access door is open. Refer to
Controls and Instruments chapter.
When either the lift mechanism access door or
the wheelchair access door is open, the parking
brake cannot be released and the transmission
gear selector will not register any gear selection.
The activation switch must be is in the ON
position for this interlock feature to be in effect.
If in motion and the access door opens, a telltale
light will illuminate and an audible alert will
sound.
To close the door, take the tension off the
locking mechanism by pushing the door more
open, then pull on the tab at the bottom of the
door to unlock from the open position, and then
slam the door shut.
Other Features
115
Using the handheld control pendant, deploy the
lift by pressing on the DEPLOY button.
When the lift begins to deploy, it is normal to
hear a clutch action of one or two clicks should
be heard. Once deployed, lift the handrails until
locked in vertical position. Buckle the restraint
belt.
WHEELCHAIR LIFT AND ACCESS DOORS
18615
Use the UP and DOWN buttons to raise or lower
the platform. Upon reaching the top or the
bottom of its stroke, the appropriate rollstop will
lower.
NOTE
The restraint belt acts as a safety device and
it prevents raising or lowering the lift when not
buckled.
WHEELCHAIR ACCESS DOOR OPERATING HANDLE
18616
Roll the wheelchair onto the platform with the
wheelchair facing outwards because the front
rollstop is not designed to keep the large rear
wheels of a wheelchair from rolling off the
platform.
OPERATING THE WHEELCHAIR LIFT
WARNING
Inspect the lift before each use as described
in the RICON Owner’s manual. If any unsafe
condition exists, or if unusual noises or
movements are noticed, DO NOT use and
contact an authorized RICON dealer for
repair.
WARNING
Read and comply with all warning labels and
symbols affixed to the wheelchair lift.
WARNING
Do not operate with a load in excess of 660
lbs (300 Kg).
The coach must be parked at least 10 feet (3
meters) away from other vehicles or large
objects. Turn on the POWER ENABLE switch
and then control each lift motion by pressing an
appropriate button. The POWER ENABLE
switch provides power to the pendant and
thereby enables the lift. When turned on, the
power switch and each button illuminate. When
operating the lift, be careful the control wire
doesn’t bind with the lift mechanism.
CONTROL PENDANT
23364
WARNING
Use extreme care when rolling on or off the
platform and lock the wheelchair brakes while
stationary on the platform. Make sure the
wheelchair fits safely on the platform. Keep
arms and legs away from moving parts.
116
Other Features
NOTE
The indicator light on the control device
illuminates when power is supplied (when the
lift electrical circuit is activated by the switch
on the dashboard).
To stow the platform, detach the restraint belt
and fold the left handrail, then fold the right
handrail (lift the slam lock handles to fold
handrails). Re-fasten restraint belt. Press down
and hold the STOW button until the lift is fully
stowed.
THRESHOLD WARNING SYSTEM (TWS)
ADJUSTMENT
There are three verifications to perform; 1)
Adjust Aiming of Acoustic Sensor Beam, 2) Test
Aim of Acoustic Sensor Beam, and 3) Adjust
Acoustic Sensor Timing.
2. Turn power to lift on (LED on TWS module
will light steady) and indicator light on the
control device illuminates. If wheelchair and
passenger are detected by acoustic sensors
the LED will flash, the buzzer will sound and
the module red light will flash. If this occurs it
is necessary to adjust aiming of sensors.
3. Turn sensor angle adjustment screw
clockwise to move direction of beam away
from center aisle and towards doorway.
Stop adjustment when LED ceases to flash.
NOTE
Only in rare instances will adjustment be
needed in the counterclockwise direction.
4. Move centerline of small wheels of
wheelchair (with passenger) to within 24
inches of doorway and repeat aiming
procedure in previous step.
Adjustment of the sensor timing is done at the
factory and should not need to be repeated in
the field. Readjustment should only be
considered if the sensor aiming could not be
adjusted to ignore both the wheelchair in the
aisle and the platform during its normal
movement.
Adjust Aiming of Acoustic Sensor Beam
1. Place wheelchair with passenger in center
aisle of coach, pointed at doorway where
Threshold Warning System (TWS) is
installed. The TWS should not detect a
wheelchair and passenger when they are
located this far from doorway.
TWS MODULE DETAIL
23368
Test Aim of Acoustic Sensor Beam
1. Move wheelchair and passenger slowly
towards doorway. TWS should detect
wheelchair and passenger (LED will flash,
buzzer will sound and the module red light
will flash) when centerline of front wheels is
between 18 and 24 inches from doorway.
2. Open vehicle access door above lift. Lower
platform to ground and place wheelchair and
passenger at rear of platform. Rollstop (rear
barrier) should be up. Raise platform to floor
level. This normal platform motion with
wheelchair and passenger aboard should
not actuate TWS. If LED does flash (buzzer
will also sound and module red light will
flash), turn sensor adjustment screw slightly
counterclockwise.
NOTE
TWS AREA
23371
If an adjustment is made, repeat the previous
step where wheelchair is between 18 and 24
inches from doorway.
Other Features
117
Adjust Acoustic Sensor Timing
1. Support a flat sheet of cardboard, or similar
material, directly beneath TWS module at a
distance of 4½ feet below module. Sheet
must be facing sensors.
NOTE
Before proceeding, visually inspect sensors to
verify that they are pointing directly at floor, or
nearly, and are not pointing off at an extreme
angle.
POSSIBLE SEATING ARRANGEMENTS
23259
An electrical wheelchair or tri-wheeler may
require sliding back seats from both sides of the
coach to allow enough turnaround space.
CHECKING NORMAL PLATFORM POSITION
23372
2. Note the sensor timing access hole. This
hole provides access to a plunger-actuated
switch that sets the sensor timing. Insert a
1/16-inch diameter wire-like object into the
access hole and press the plunger inward.
The LED will flash momentarily while the
module establishes the distance and then
remain on steady. Release the plunger
when the LED ceases to flash.
NOTE
It is important that objects, such as your body,
tools, seats, etc, do not interfere with the
beam while the adjustment is being made.
INTERIOR APPOINTMENTS
To accommodate a wheelchair, two rows of
regular seats on one side of the coach must be
folded and slid away. Seats may be folded on
both sides of the coach to make room for a
second wheelchair.
1
2
FOLDING SEATS
18430
To fold a set of seats, raise the seat back then
lift up the seat cushion (pull on lever 1). To slide
a row of seats, remove the black covers from
the floor tracks. Pull the lever 2 while sliding the
seat along the track.
The wheelchair occupants have a hostess/stop
chime and a reading light switch at their disposal
on the window sill of the coach, within easy
reach.
Wheelchair Restraint System
Two sets of wheelchair restraint belts are kept in
plastic pouches and stowed in an overhead
compartment.
To secure each wheelchair, four tiedown straps
must be used (at all four corners).
118
Other Features
Lap belt
anchor pin
Tension
release lever
Unlock
pin
Retractor knob
BELT ANCHORING AND RETRACTION SYSTEMS
23266
Two of the four retaining belts have attaching
pins on the retractors to secure the occupant’s
lap belt. They must be placed at the rear of the
wheelchair.
Each tiedown retractor slots into a floor
anchorage track.
To anchor the retaining belts, lift the track cover,
push in the retractor anchor then slide it until it
locks in place. Hook one strap to each corner of
the wheelchair frame (not the wheels) and allow
the retractors to tension the belts.
To remove the restraint belts, release tension in
the locking mechanism by tightening the belt
slightly more with the retractor knob before
pushing down on the red release lever on the
retractor. Unhook the wheelchair and allow the
belts to retract. Guide the belts in, making sure
they remain untwisted as they retract.
Release the anchor by lifting the lock pin then
sliding out and up the anchor from the floor
track. Close the lid on the tracks to prevent dirt
from entering the track cavity.
WARNING
Do not let restraint or safety belts rub against
sharp edges. Do not bleach or dry clean.
Wheelchair Occupant Restraint
Secure the wheelchair occupant in the following
manner:
WHEELCHAIR RESTRAINTS AND ACCESSORIES
23262
Snap the lap belts to the pins on the retractors of
the rear restraint belts. Adjust the lap belt so it
sits snug across the hips. Snap the shoulder belt
to the pin on the lap belt. A retractor adjusts
shoulder belt length automatically.
To release the belt, unsnap the shoulder belt
then press the red button in the center of the
buckle.
WARNING
A snug fit with the lap belt positioned low on
the hips is necessary to maximize safety. The
belt should not be worn or twisted. Avoid
pinching the belt and/or hardware. Do not
wear over rigid or breakable objects such as
eyeglasses, pens or keys as these may cause
injuries.
EMERGENCY OPERATION
In the event of electrical power loss, manual
operation of the lift is possible as explained
below.
To manually deploy the platform
Allow enough space for lift operation and
passenger boarding. If a break down situation
exists and the vehicle cannot be moved so that
the lift system can be operated safely, the
operator must summon emergency assistance
to move the vehicle before operating the lift.
Fully open wheelchair access and lift doors.
Ensure that there are no obstacles in the path of
the lift.
Other Features
WHEELCHAIR LIFT MANUAL OPERATION
119
23375
Remove the pump handle from inside the lift
mechanism access door.
Turn one of the manual platform release shafts
using pump handle extension.
WHEELCHAIR LIFT MANUAL HYDRAULIC PUMP
23373
The lift passenger and attendant must follow the
instructions to ENTER or EXIT the vehicle, as
previously described.
To manually lower the platform
Slowly pull the pump release valve actuating rod
DOWN until th platform begins to lower.
Allow the platform to reach ground level.
Push the pump release valve actuating rod back
UP until lightly-snug.
MANUAL PLATFORM RELEASE SHAFT
23334
Grasp the platform and pull firmly until the lift is
all the way out against the carriage stops.
To manually raise the platform
Using the rollstop manual control knob and one
hand on the rollstop, OPEN the rollstop.
The attendant and lift passenger should follow
the instructions to ENTER or EXIT the vehicle,
as described previously.
Remove the pump handle from inside the lift
mechanism access door.
Push the pump release valve actuating rod UP.
CAUTION
During manual rising of the lift, do not raise
the platform more than 1-1/2 inches above the
vehicle floor level. Any excessive travel will
make it difficult to enter the platform and/or
damage the lift bridge plate actuator. The
outer edge of the bridge plate must rest
squarely on the vehicle floor.
Insert handle extension into manual backup
pump handle socket and pump to raise the
platform to the vehicle floor level.
ROLLSTOP MANUAL CONTROL KNOB
23275
To manually stow the platform
Raise or lower the platform to the deploy/stow
position; the platform frame must be parallel to
the side of the lift enclosure. If the exact position
cannot be obtained, slightly low is preferred to
slightly high.
Using the rollstop manual control knob and one
hand one the rollstop, close the rollstop until it
latches.
120
Other Features
Use one person on each side of the lift to
prevent mechanical binding.
With fingers up and palms forward, push the
platform forcefully to start the lift moving inward.
As the lift begins to move inward, maintain a
constant pushing motion until the lift comes to
rest completely inside the lift enclosure.
Push firmly and make sure that the platform
manual release shafts have turned to lock the
platform.
To manually stow the lift from ground level
rails until the carriage come in contact with the
stops.
Secure the first two telescopic legs onto the
platform.
NOTE
There are two telescopic legs for each
platform side. The proper side is indicated
onto the telescopic leg.
Turn telescopic leg crank to raise the carriage to
be able to clear the stops.
In the unlikely event of a hydraulic system failure
and the manual backup pump is inoperative, the
lift may be stowed as follows by two or more
able-bodied people:
Raise or lower the platform to the deploy/stow
position; the platform frame must be parallel to
the side of the lift enclosure. If the exact position
cannot be obtained. Slightly low is preferred to
slightly high.
Using the rollstop manual control knob and one
hand on the rollstop, close the rollstop until it
latches.
INSTALLATION OF TELESCOPIC LEGS
WARNING
The platform is heavy and should be lifted
using caution and proper lifting technique:
Always lift with legs and not the back when
attempting to lift heavy objects.
Use one person on each side of the lift to
prevent mechanical binding.
With fingers up and palms forward, push the
platform forcefully to start the lift moving inward.
As the lift begins to move inward, maintain a
constant pushing motion until the lift comes to
rest completely inside the lift enclosure.
Push firmly and make sure that the platform
manual release shafts have turned to lock the
platform.
WHEELCHAIR
LIFT
REMOVAL
FOR
STORING OR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES
Disconnect connector located at compartment
ceiling.
Remove 4 fixing bolts located
compartment, on each side of platform.
inside
Grasp the platform and pull firmly, sustaining a
constant pull so that the platform slides onto the
23333
Pull the platform until the rear carriage hit
against the stops.
Secure the two rear telescopic legs onto the
platform then turn telescopic leg crank to be
able to clear the stops.
Remove platform completely.
Lower the platform to minimum height using the
telescopic leg cranks before moving it.
WARNING
For better stability, keep the platform at
minimum height when moving.
WARNING
Never deploy the platform from enclosure while
standing on the telescopic legs.
WARNING
Telescopic legs were designed to support and
move the platform only, do not use as a work
table.
Other Features
WARNING
Before moving platform, make sure that floor is
level and free of obstacles.
WHEELCHAIR LIFT INSTALLATION
Raise the platform to proper level.
Insert the platform so that the rear carriage
clears the stops.
Turn telescopic leg crank until the carriage
comes in contact with the rails.
Remove the two rear telescopic legs from the
platform.
Insert the platform until the front carriage clears
the stops.
Lower the front of the platform.
Remove the two front telescopic legs from the
platform.
Push firmly and make sure that the platform
manual release shafts have turned to lock the
platform.
Secure the 4 fixing bolts located inside
compartment, on each side of platform. Apply a
torque of 60 lbf-ft.
Reconnect connector located at compartment
ceiling.
WARNING
When re-inserting platform into compartment,
make sure that carriage wheels are properly
aligned over the L. H. side triangular rail before
removing telescopic legs.
121
Starting and Stopping Procedures
123
STARTING THE ENGINE......................................................................................................................... 124
STARTING FROM THE DRIVER'S SEAT............................................................................................................ 124
STARTING FROM THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............................................................................................ 124
COLD WEATHER STARTING ............................................................................................................................. 125
JUMP STARTING................................................................................................................................................. 125
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER....................................................................................................................... 127
ENGINE WARM-UP.................................................................................................................................. 127
ALLISON TRANSMISSION WARM-UP................................................................................................... 127
I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION – STARTING THE VEHICLE AT LOW TEMPERATURES ........................... 127
124
Starting and Stopping Procedures
STARTING THE ENGINE
NOTE
In normal circumstances, the engine should be
started from the driver’s seat. However, a rearstart panel in the engine compartment permits
starting the engine from that location, mainly for
maintenance purposes.
If the accelerator pedal is depressed before
starting, release and wait 30 seconds before
attempting to restart.
STARTING FROM THE DRIVER’S SEAT
•
•
Make sure the starter selector switch located
in the engine compartment is set to the
NORMAL position and that the battery
master switch (master cut-out) located on
the rear electrical panel is set to the ON
position.
Apply the spring-loaded parking brake by
pulling the parking brake control button all
the way up;
•
Place transmission in neutral;
•
Turn ignition key to START position (refer to
Controls and Instruments chapter), release
the key after the engine starts.
•
Brake pedal must be applied when selecting
Drive (D) otherwise the transmission will
stay in neutral (N).
CAUTION
Do not engage starter for more than 15
seconds at a time. If engine does not start
within 15 seconds, release ignition key and let
starter cool for one minute before attempting
to restart.
CAUTION
Do not press accelerator pedal before starting.
This could result in an electronic control unit
fault and degrade the fuel system control.
CAUTION
Special precautions are necessary with
turbocharged engines to avoid possible
turbine damage. After starting, run the engine
at normal idle for two minutes to allow
lubricating oil to reach the turbocharger then
run the engine at fast idle. Let oil pressure
reach normal operating range before driving.
NOTE
If engine does not start, return key to OFF
position before attempting to restart.
Stopping the Engine
•
Apply parking brake and place transmission
in neutral (N);
•
Allow engine to idle for at least two minutes
before shutting engine OFF. This insures
that the turbine speed drops and allows time
for the engine exhaust gas temperature to
drop to about 300oF (150oC);
•
Shut off all electrical loads;
•
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
CAUTION
Do not shut OFF engine when running above
normal idle.
CAUTION
Set the battery master switch (master cut-out)
to the OFF position after parking and when left
unattended for an extended period of time.
STARTING
FROM
THE
ENGINE
COMPARTMENT
Switches to start and stop the engine from inside
the engine compartment are mounted on a small
panel above the air filter.
DANGER
Apply parking brake and place transmission in
neutral (N) before starting engine from inside
the engine compartment.
Set the battery master switches (ignition and
master cut-out) to the ON position;
Set the starter selector switch to the REAR
START position;
Press the REAR START push-button switch,
release push-button after the engine starts.
DANGER
Do not wear loose clothing when working near
engine. Stand clear of rotating components.
Starting and Stopping Procedures
125
CAUTION
Do not stop engine by any other method.
COLD WEATHER STARTING
When starting a cold engine, the intake air
should be warmed up by using the intake air
preheater. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. The preheater will not engage at
coolant temperature above 54°F (12°C). If the
coolant temperature is below 54°F (12°C), the
preheater will engage and will light the preheater
telltale between 0 and 50 seconds, depending
on the engine coolant temperature. Wait before
the preheater telltale has turned off before
starting the engine.
If necessary, once the engine has started, the
preheater will reengage (post heating) for the
same length of time as the preheat time.
REAR ELECTRICAL PANEL SAFETY SWITCH
06621
CAUTION
Refer to cautions in “Starting From The
Driver’s Seat” in this chapter
WARNING
Do not use ether or other combustible starting
aid fluid on any engine equipped with an
intake air preheater. If the engine is equipped
with a preheater, introduction of ether or
similar starting aids could cause a fire or
explosion resulting in severe property
damage, serious personal injury or death.
Engines not equipped with an intake air
preheater
may,
depending
on
coolant
temperature, take longer to start. If this should
happen, DO NOT release the ignition key until
the engine has started (while still observing the
15 second maximum cranking time).
REAR START PANEL
06622
DANGER
Rotating shafts can be dangerous. You can
snag cloths, skin, hair, hands, etc. This can
cause a serious injury or death. Do not work
on a shaft (with or without a guard) when the
engine is running.
Stopping the Engine
To stop the engine from the engine
compartment, set the starter selector switch to
the OFF position.
JUMP STARTING
In order to avoid damage to solid-state electrical
components, it is important that jumper (booster)
cables be used correctly and only in
emergencies. To jump start, use another 24 volt
DC, negative grounded, power source. Use only
jumper cables rated at 500 cranking amperes.
DANGER
Injury, explosion, battery acid damage or
charging system overload may result if these
jump starting procedures are not precisely
followed.
126
Starting and Stopping Procedures
CAUTION
WARNING
Wear eye protection and remove rings, metal
jewelry and watches with metal bands.
DANGER
The gases given off by batteries while jump
starting are explosive. Do not smoke near
batteries.
DANGER
The battery could rupture or explode if jump
started when the run-down battery fluid is
frozen or if the battery fluid level is low. Check
condition of run-down battery before
attempting to jump start.
CAUTION
Do not let the two vehicles touch. Keep a
walk-through distance between the two
vehicles. Make sure positive (red) and
negative (black) jumper cable clamps do not
touch.
CAUTION
Never connect the jumper cable to the
negative terminal post of the run-down battery.
CAUTION
Do not jump start if a maintenance-free battery
has a yellow test indicator. Have the battery
replaced.
Choose a booster vehicle which produces
comparable amperage as your vehicle.
To jump start, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the protective cap from the booster
block terminal located in the R.H. side
engine compartment;
2. Connect one end of the red jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the booster power
source. If the good battery is in another
vehicle, that vehicle's engine must be shut
OFF before connecting;
3. Connect the other end of the same red
jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on
the booster block;
4. Connect one end of the black jumper cable
to the negative (-) post on the booster power
source;
5. Connect the other end of the same black
jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal on
the booster block; If the good battery is in
another vehicle, start that vehicle's engine;
6. Let the engine run for a few minutes, then
start the vehicle with the run-down battery;
7. Disconnect the jumper cables in reverse
order given in steps 2 through 5;
8. Install protective cap on the booster block
terminal.
NOTE
Jumper cables must be rated at 500 cranking
amperes. If jumper cable length is 20 feet (6
m) or less, use 2/0 (AWG) gauge wires. If
cable length is between 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9
m), use 3/0 (AWG) gauge wires.
WARNING
Before attempting to jump start, make sure the
parking brake is applied and the transmission
is in neutral (N). Turn off all lights, heaters
and other electrical accessories.
BOOSTER BLOCK LOCATION
06623
Starting and Stopping Procedures
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
127
DANGER
The vehicle may be equipped with an engine
immersion-type electric block heater to assist
cold weather starting. A connector is on the rear
pillar of the curb-side engine compartment door
frame. Using an extension cord, connect to a
110 - 120 VAC outlet.
Never let the engine run in an enclosed, nonventilated area. Engine exhaust fumes contain
dangerous gases which can be fatal if inhaled.
Before warming up the engine, open the
door(s) or move the vehicle outside.
NOTE
The engine will reach normal operating
temperature shortly after driving. Avoid driving
at full throttle until engine coolant temperature
reaches 140°F (60°C).
ALLISON TRANSMISSION WARM-UP
110-120 VOLTS CONNECTOR
06390
CAUTION
Connect only to a 110-120 VAC power source.
Use only grounded (three prongs) extension
cords with a minimum rated capacity of 15
amps. Disconnect the extension cord before
starting. Before driving, make sure the
extension cord is disconnected and the engine
compartment door is closed.
ENGINE WARM-UP
After starting the engine, keep the parking brake
applied and let the engine run at normal idle for
two minutes to allow lubricating oil to reach the
turbocharger. Increase engine speed to fast
idle, using the FAST IDLE switch located on the
dashboard for five minutes, without loading the
engine. Monitor the gauges and indicator lights
to make sure all conditions are normal. If an
abnormal condition is observed, stop the engine
immediately and have the condition corrected.
When the transmission temperature falls below
-20°F (-29°C), the CHECK TRANS telltale light
illuminates after the engine is started, and a
reminder tone will sound. In this case, the
transmission will be locked in neutral (N) until
the transmission temperature rises above -20°F
(-29°C) and the CHECK TRANS telltale light
goes out. The transmission will only operate in
first or reverse gears until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION - STARTING
THE
VEHICLE
AT
LOW
TEMPERATURES
For outside temperatures between -4°F
(–20°C) and -22°F (–30°C), the transmission will
require a warming up phase once the engine is
started. The engine must be operated for at
least 10 minutes with the vehicle at a standstill
until the transmission oil has warmed up.
For outside temperatures below -22°F
(–30°C), warm air must be used to heat the
transmission up to a temperature above -22°F
(–30°C) before the engine is started.
Safety Features and Equipment
129
EMERGENCY EXITS................................................................................................................................ 130
SIDE WINDOWS .................................................................................................................................................. 130
ROOF HATCH...................................................................................................................................................... 130
EMERGENCY ENTRANCE DOOR OPENING .................................................................................................... 131
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT..................................................................................................................... 131
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (AFSS) ....................................................................................................................... 131
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) ........................................................................................... 132
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ....................................................................................................................................... 136
FIRST AID KIT ..................................................................................................................................................... 136
FIRE HATCHET ................................................................................................................................................... 136
WARNING REFLECTORS ................................................................................................................................... 137
JACK AND TOOLS............................................................................................................................................... 137
SPARE PARTS KIT.............................................................................................................................................. 137
LIMP-HOME BELT ............................................................................................................................................... 137
SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE...................................................................................................................... 137
CHANGING A WHEEL ......................................................................................................................................... 137
JACKING POINTS.................................................................................................................................... 138
HYDRAULIC JACK............................................................................................................................................... 139
TOWING.................................................................................................................................................... 140
EMERGENCY AIR-FILL VALVES ........................................................................................................... 140
EMERGENCY AND PARKING BRAKES ................................................................................................ 141
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS .................................................................................................................. 141
FOG LIGHTS ............................................................................................................................................ 142
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING.................................................................................................................... 142
MUD FLAPS AND SPLASH GUARDS .................................................................................................... 142
BACK-UP CAMERA................................................................................................................................. 142
BACK-UP ALARM.................................................................................................................................... 142
ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS TO OPERATE THE VEHICLE (BASIC LIMP-HOME FUNCTIONS)............ 142
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................................... 142
130
Safety Features and Equipment
EMERGENCY EXITS
ROOF HATCH
Locate and learn how to use all possible
emergency exits. It is good practice to inform
passengers of the location of exits and how to
use them in case of an emergency.
A roof ventilation hatch, designed to be opened
by occupants may be installed in the roof at the
rear of the vehicle. Another optional roof hatch
may be located in the front of the vehicle. The
hatches can serve as emergency exits. In case
of an emergency, push the ventilation hatch
upwards (1). Turn knob ¼ turn (arrow pointing
“TO EXIT”) and then push knob to release the
hatch (2). Push the escape hatch outwards (3).
A decal with operating instructions is located on
the hatch.
SIDE WINDOWS
Some side windows can be opened from the
inside for emergency exit. A decal located on
the bottom of each passenger window indicates
the location of the nearest emergency exit.
Also, blue lights close to the wall in the overhead
storage compartments illuminate the emergency
exit decals. These lights illuminate when the
general lighting switch is on.
EMERGENCY EXIT WINDOWS (X3-45)
18617
To open a side window emergency exit, tilt up
the release bar and push the bottom of the
window outwards, as illustrated below. The
window is hinged from the top and will not fall
out.
A telltale light on the dashboard illuminates
when a window is opened. Refer to Controls
and Instruments chapter for more information.
To close the window, tilt up the release bar and
pull the window back. Push down the release
bar to lock shut.
SIDE WINDOW EMERGENCY EXIT
18391
EMERGENCY ROOF ESCAPE OPENING
Safety Features and Equipment
131
NOTE
In the event of ventilation blower motor failure,
the roof hatch may be used to aid ventilation
by pushing the hatch upwards.
CAUTION
Be aware of reduced vehicle overhead
clearance when driving under overpasses with
the roof hatch open.
To latch escape hatch after use, vent arms must
be pushed upright in FULL OPEN VENT
position. Insert edge firmly between the two
sections of the bracket and then return knob to
original position (arrow pointing “LATCHED”) to
lock the hatch. Finally, pull the hatch in to
closed position, one side at a time.
INTERIOR UNLATCH AIR VALVE
12164
UNLATCH AIR VALVE LOCATION
12209
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
ROOF ESCAPE LATCHING
EMERGENCY ENTRANCE DOOR OPENING
An unlatch air valve located on the front wall,
close to the entrance door allows emergency
depletion of the door and latching cylinders.
Another unlatch valve is located in the front
service compartment and allows opening the
door from the outside. To open the door in an
emergency situation, first turn the unlatch valve
in the direction of the arrows and push (or pull)
the door open. To close the door after
emergency opening, return the valve to its initial
position, open the door using the door cylinder,
then close the door normally.
NOTE
To be able to open the entrance door in an
emergency situation, the entrance door must
first be unlock using the key or lock lever
before unlatching the door from the outside or
the inside.
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (AFSS) (OPTIONAL)
The coach may be equipped with the optional
Automatic Fire Detection and Suppression
System (AFSS).
System operation
When a fire is detected inside the engine
compartment, the system sends a fire alarm
signal to the Protection Panel located in the
Driver’s area near the lateral control panel. The
Protection Panel immediately turns on the fire
“ALARM” lamp and sounds the audio alarm.
After a 15-second time delay the engine is
automatically shut down. The fire extinguisher is
discharged
simultaneously
with
engine
shutdown.
NOTE
The Manual Activation Switch is used
when immediate discharge of the fire
extinguisher and engine shutdown is
desired.
132
Safety Features and Equipment
NOTE
The Protection Panel continuously
monitors system integrity and displays the
information via the “SYSTEM OK” and fire
“TROUBLE” indicators.
Operational sequence (fire)
1. A fire detector or liner thermal detector
detects a fire in the engine compartment and
sends a signal to the Protection Panel in the
driver’s area.
2. The fire “ALARM” lamp on the Protection
Panel will illuminate solid red and an audible
alarm will sound.
5. The red fire “ALARM” lamp and audible alarm
will stay on. The yellow fire “TROUBLE” lamp
will also be on indicating a discharged
extinguisher.
6. The system must be reset and the fire
extinguisher removed and replaced in
accordance with the System Reset portion of
the Kidde Dual Spectrum Operation &
Maintenance Manual.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
(TPMS) (OPTIONAL)
SYSTEM
The coach may be equipped with the optional
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
Description
3. The operator shall bring the vehicle to a safe
stop.
System includes the following elements:
•
Special tire valves;
4. The system automatically shuts down the
vehicle
engine
and
discharges
the
extinguisher into the engine compartment 15
seconds after the fire alarm starts unless
advanced or delayed by the operator.
•
RF sensor inside each tire, fixed to the
valve;
•
3 antennas to receive the sensors RF signal
(one in the front spare tire compartment, one
above the L.H. side rear wheels and one
above the R.H. side rear wheels);
•
A TPMS receiver connected to the antennas
and located in the front electrical
compartment, above the CECM;
•
A TPMS display built in the L.H. dashboard
panel;
•
A “FLAT TIRE” telltale panel indicator.
o If the operator presses the Manual
Activation Switch, all delays will
terminate and the engine shutdown and
extinguisher
discharge
will
occur
immediately.
o If the operator presses and releases the
Delay Engine Stop switch once, the
engine shutdown and extinguisher
discharge will be delayed by an additional
15 seconds.
WARNING
The engine will stop 15 seconds after the fire
alarm starts. The operator must be prepared
to bring the vehicle to a safe stop as soon as
the alarm sounds. Steering may become
difficult after engine shutdown. If more time is
required, the “DELAY ENGINE STOP” switch
may be pressed and released for an
additional 15 second delay.
WARNING
The extinguisher discharge may cause an
obscuring cloud behind and near the vehicle.
The section of the special tire valves located
inside the tire is dome-shaped to allow fixing the
sensor.
Sensors provide continuous tire pressure and
temperature reading.
The normal sensor battery lifespan is 5 years.
The remaining lifespan is displayed as a
percentage in the TPMS display.
NOTE
It is recommended to check the remaining
battery lifespan when changing the tires in
order to replace the sensors at the same time
if they are due for replacement before the next
change.
The screw fixing the sensor to the valve can only
be used once because the threads are powdercoated to lock the sensor in place and prevent
unfastening.
Safety Features and Equipment
The telltale panel indicator illuminates for 3
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON to
check the display operation and the
communication between the display and the
vehicle multiplex system. This confirms the
communication between the TPMS display and
CECM.
Settings Menu
•
Set Wheel ID
133
When entering the menu, the axle 1, wheel 1 is
selected by default as a starting point for the
learning. The user can select another axle with
+/- , move the cursor to the wheel number with
the right arrow and select another wheel with the
+/- or move the cursor down to the start learning
button.
After the start learning button is selected, the
display stores the first transmission it gets from
each sensor ID into the “initial pressure” for that
sensor ID. Then it compares each subsequent
pressures received for that sensor ID with the
initial one and when the comparison shows a
delta pressure exceeding the defined level
required, this sensor ID is assigned to the
selected tire location.
Once a wheel ID has been assigned, the display
increments the number of Wheels done and it
moves the axle/wheel to the next one in the
sequence waiting for another sensor to come up
with a pressure change. Within one learning
session, the display remembers which sensor
has been assigned and it will not assign it twice.
The sequence increments to the next wheel on
the same axle counting wheels from left to right
and then moves to the next axle counting axles
from front to rear.
•
Learn Wheel ID
This menu allows learning new wheel sensors
ID. The user can learn only one wheel, several
wheels or all wheels of the vehicle. The
sequence automatically jumps to the next wheel
such that a user can initiate all wheels without
having to come back to the display between
each wheel.
The display uses a pressure change as the
criteria to recognize which wheel sensor the
operator wants to get assigned to a given
location. The amount of pressure change
required is established at 2 PSI.
A pressure change of about 3 PSI is needed to
wake up a sensor and then an extra amount of
pressure change of 2 PSI is needed to trigger
the display. The operator has to create a
pressure change by at least 6 PSI and then wait
for the display to recognize the pressure
change. The wait time correspond to the sensor
sampling rate.
The display activates the next wheel parameter
each time a wheel is done. This parameter is
use by the vehicle electronic to activate an
audible signal on the vehicle thus providing a
feedback to the user that he can move to the
next wheel.
The spare Tire can be done by selecting the
axle/wheel “spare” which is internally encoded to
15:1.
134
Safety Features and Equipment
• Set Target Pressures
This menu allows the end user fine tuning the
target pressure setting to account for the specific
operating conditions (cold weather operation or
unloaded operation). The end user can readjust
the target pressure within +30% and -20% of the
factory set target pressure but not outside this
range.
The factory set target pressure is always kept in
permanent memory into the TPMS display and
cannot be edited by the end user.
When the user enters a new target value, the
user cannot select values outside the valid
range.
Safety Features and Equipment
•
Alarm Settings
When selecting the Alarm Settings Menu, a sub
menu
containing
Pressure
Alarm
and
Temperature Alarm appears.
•
Display Settings
When selecting Pressure Alarm the screen
pressure alarm shown below appears. A similar
screen is defined for temperature settings. The
cursor can be moved to highlight the number
beside “new value”, “ACCEPT” or “EXIT”. +/allows increasing or decreasing the numbers.
Pressure alarms changes are allowed in steps of
1 PSI in the range from 5 to 20 PSI.
Temperature alarms in steps of 5°F (2°C) in the
range from 150 to 180 °F (64 to 82 °C). Pressing
OK with “ACCEPT” highlighted applies the
change and exits to the previous menu.
Pressing OK when “EXIT” is highlighted exits
without changes.
Units
135
136
Safety Features and Equipment
Languages
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
One fire extinguisher is located under the seats
in the first row on each side of the aisle.
Instructions for use are found on the
extinguishers.
WARNING
Make sure you know how to operate the fire
extinguishers in case of an emergency.
Backlight Intensity
Key Sound
Turns key press sound ON/OFF.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATION
23136
FIRST AID KIT
Fire hatchet
Tire / Axle Configuration
Pressing the up down arrow when the
number of tires is highlighted allows flipping
the number to 2 or 4 which are the only valid
choices.
First-aid kit
FIRST CURB-SIDE OVERHEAD COMPARTMENT
23141a
The optional first aid kit is stored in the first curbside overhead storage compartment. A white
cross over red background decal identifies the
first aid kit location
FIRE HATCHET
An optional fire hatchet may be installed in the
first curb-side overhead storage compartment.
Refer to “Appendix G” for Troubleshooting Guide
on Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
Safety Features and Equipment
WARNING REFLECTORS
A kit containing three triangular reflectors is
provided to warn other drivers on the road in
case of a breakdown. The kit is located at the
ceiling of the first baggage compartment, on the
R.H. side. The reflectors provide visible warning
of an emergency situation. The three reflectors
should be placed as indicated on the box cover.
These reflectors comply with FMVSS 125
(Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards).
137
alternator. The installation of the belt allows the
coach to be driven to a repair facility after only
minor manipulations.
Lower alternator failure:
1. Raise the belt tensioner. Use a breaker bar
with a ¾ inch drive to rotate the tensioner
pulley upward and relieve alternator belt
tension. Remove belt;
2. Install the limp-home drive belt on the drive
and top alternator pulleys first;
3. Complete installation of the limp-home belt
as shown hereafter;
4. Slide the belt on the idler pulley;
5. Gently release the belt tensioner.
WARNING REFLECTORS LOCATION
23376
JACK / TOOLS
A kit for jacking up the vehicle and changing
wheels is stored in the front service
compartment. The kit includes a:
•
30 ton bottle jack;
•
Wheel nut wrench and lever.
NOTE
To prevent the batteries from discharging, the
HVAC system is turned OFF when running on
a single alternator.
LIMP-HOME BELT ON TOP ALTERNATOR
01194
SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE
JACK/TOOLS LOCATION
23377
SPARE PARTS KIT
The vehicle may be equipped with a spare parts
kit (optional). The kit contains parts such as
bulbs, circuit breakers, belts, etc. The spare
parts kit is stored in the first baggage
compartment.
The spare wheel and tire is located in a
compartment behind the reclining front bumper.
In case of a flat tire, turn ON the hazard flashers
and bring the coach to a stop on the side of the
road. Apply the parking brake. Make sure the
coach is parked safely away from traffic. Set up
the triangular reflectors in accordance with
applicable highway regulations.
“LIMP-HOME” BELT
CHANGING A WHEEL
In case of malfunction of the lower alternator,
install the limp-home belt on the upper
To access the spare wheel, lower the front
bumper. To remove the spare, untighten the
138
Safety Features and Equipment
pressure screw holding the tire in place, then
press down on the spring loaded locking pin
located at the top of the retaining bracket and
remove the bracket. Using the strap, pull the
spare out of the compartment (refer to the
following
illustrations).
Rollers
ease
manipulation. Remove the protective cover.
Install the flat tire in place of the spare by
reversing the procedure.
NOTE
Do not forget to have the flat tire repaired as
soon as possible.
TIGHTENING SEQUENCE
13018
NOTE
The jack and tools are located in the front
service compartment.
NOTE
Periodically check the spare’s inflation
pressure. Tire pressure should be the
maximum pressure specified in the chart.
SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE
18415
1. Loosen the wheel nuts about one turn;
2. Raise the vehicle by the closest jacking
point (See Jacking Points in this chapter);
3. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the
wheel;
4. Mount the spare wheel over the studs, being
careful not to damage the stud threads;
5. Screw in the wheel nuts according to the
sequence shown in the following figure and
tighten slightly more and repeat the
sequence a few times to position the wheel
correctly. Once tightening induces wheel
spin, lower the coach for final tightening;
6. Tighten the nuts progressively in the
sequence shown. Final tightening should be
done using a torque wrench. Dry tightening
torque is 450 – 500 lbf-ft (610 – 680 Nm) for
steel as well as for aluminum wheels.
NOTE
Periodically check that the spare is securely
fastened in its compartment.
WARNING
Before driving, be sure the flat tire, track, jack
and tools are securely reinstalled in their
respective compartments. Check that the
bumper is securely closed shut before driving.
JACKING POINTS
Twelve jacking points are located on the vehicle;
three are located on each side of the frame and
two are located under each axle. Refer to the
following illustrations for the location of jacking
points.
JACKING POINTS ON FRAME
18618
Safety Features and Equipment
JACKING POINTS ON IND. FRONT SUSPENSION
139
16139
WARNING
FRONT END JACKING POINTS
18592
REAR END JACKING POINTS
18593
WARNING
Always unload or retract the tag axle before
jacking the vehicle from the front and drive
axle jacking points to prevent damage to
suspension components.
JACKING POINTS ON TAG AXLE
11029
WARNING
The suspension of the vehicle must be in the
normal ride position before jacking.
The jacking points on the tag axle must be
used for raising the tag axle only.
Several kinds of hydraulic jacks can be used.
Only jack at the specified jacking points. Jack
must support the following capacities:
Front axle: 20,000 lb (9 100 kg);
Drive axle: 40,000 lb (18 200 kg).
JACKING POINTS ON DRIVE AXLE
11005
HYDRAULIC JACK
To raise: turn release valve clockwise. Insert
handle in socket and raise by pumping.
JACKING POINTS ON FRONT AXLE
10005
To lower: remove handle and turn the release
valve slowly counterclockwise.
Always keep ram and extension screw retracted
when jack is not in use.
Service: Check oil level when jack fails to raise
to full height. Lower ram completely with release
valve open and jack in upright position, remove
filler plug and refill to level of filler hole with
hydraulic jack oil. Never use brake fluid.
140
Safety Features and Equipment
DANGER
CAUTION
Jack is intended for lifting only. Do not get
under the vehicle or load for any reason
unless it is properly supported with safety
stands and securely blocked.
DANGER
Do not load jack above rated capacity. Prevent
"side loading", make sure load is centered on
ram. Do not push or tilt load off jack.
To prevent damage to the drive train
components, disconnect axle shafts or
driveshaft before towing. Do not attempt to
push or pull-start a vehicle equipped with an
automatic
transmission
or
automated
mechanical transmission.
Failure to disconnect the driveshaft,
remove the drive axle shafts or lift the drive
wheels off the ground before towing can
cause serious transmission damage and
void the warranty.
TOWING
To prevent damage to the vehicle, use the two
tow eyes fixed to the vehicle frame between the
front axle and the front bumper. Use only a solid
link tow bar and a safety chain to tow the
vehicle. If required, connect an auxiliary air
supply to the vehicle so the emergency/parking
brakes don’t apply while towing.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the vehicle structure, it
is not recommended to tow the vehicle from
the rear. In case of damage to the drive train
components, use a low bed semi-trailer to
support the rear end.
TOW EYES UNDER VEHICLE
EMERGENCY AIR-FILL VALVES
The vehicle is equipped with two air system
emergency fill valves to supplement the air
system when air pressure is low and the engine
cannot be operated. One valve is located inside
the front service compartment. The other valve
is located inside the engine compartment.
Both air system emergency fill valves are fitted
with standard tire valve stems. The air systems
can be filled using any standard external air
supply line. The fill valve located in the engine
compartment supplies air for all systems
(brakes, suspension and accessories). The fill
valve located in the front service compartment
supplies air for accessories only.
18401
DANGER
Do not carry passengers while the coach is
being towed.
CAUTION
Make sure axle shafts or driveshaft are
installed correctly after towing. Tighten axle
shaft and driveshaft nuts to the correct torque
settings. Do not invert shafts.
FRONT SERVICE COMPARTMENT
12210
Safety Features and Equipment
141
DANGER
Always apply the parking brake before leaving
the driver's seat.
NOTE
Only use the parking brake to supplement the
service brake to stop the vehicle in emergency
conditions. The stopping distance will be
considerably longer than when using normal
service brake.
NOTE
Before releasing the parking brake by pushing
down the control valve knob, check the
pressure gauges to make sure that the brake
system air pressure is greater than or equal to
95 psi (655 kPa).
NOTE
A beep will sound if the ignition switch has
been turned off without applying the parking
brake. The same beep will sound if pressure
is still applied to the service brake pedal.
NOTE
FILL VALVE IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT
The stoplights will automatically turn on when
the parking brake is applied and the ignition
key is turned to the ON position.
12211
CAUTION
Air filled through the two emergency fill valves
will pass through the standard air filteringdrying system. Do not fill air at any other
location. Do not exceed 120 psi (827 kPa).
EMERGENCY
BRAKES
AND
PARKING
During normal operation, if air pressure in any
brake circuit drops below 40 psi (276 kPa),
spring-loaded emergency brake will be
immediately applied at full capacity to the drive
axle wheels to stop the vehicle.
Spring-loaded parking brake is applied by pulling
up the control valve knob located on the L.H.
lateral console.
Parking brake is not designed to be used as a
service brake. For normal driving conditions, the
control valve knob must remain in the down
position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
The inner lamps only also called high beams
illuminate automatically when the engine is
started and the parking brake is released to
serve as daytime running lights. The daytime
running lights provide added safety by making
the traveling vehicle more visible to other drivers
during the day.
The daytime running lights system turns the
headlights on when:
•
Engine is running;
•
Parking brake is released;
•
The exterior lighting switch is set to the OFF
position or pressed to the first position.
142
Safety Features and Equipment
WARNING
Do not drive with only the daytime running
lights at night because the tail and marker
lights are not turned on in that situation and
the high beams can blind other drivers. For
night driving, turn ON the headlights by
depressing the exterior lighting rocker switch
to the second position.
FOG LIGHTS
Optional halogen fog lights are available. They
provide better visibility in fog and precipitation.
They improve visibility immediately in front of the
vehicle. They also provide added safety.
NOTE
Some states or provinces may restrict the use
of fog lights. Verify local state or provincial
regulations before using.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING
Baggage compartments and front service
compartment lights are automatically turned ON
when the corresponding compartment door is
opened. A pictogram will appear on the status
bar of the Driver Information Display (DID) when
the baggage compartment door is open.
BACK-UP ALARM
The back-up alarm alerts pedestrians and other
drivers when the vehicle is being backed-up.
Take extra precautions whenever backing-up. If
necessary, use a guide to provide directions
when backing-up. Both the alarm and optional
camera are automatically activated when the
transmission is put in the reverse (R) range.
ESSENTIAL
FUNCTIONS
TO
OPERATE THE VEHICLE (BASIC
LIMP-HOME FUNCTIONS)
Even with a defective CECM (Chassis Electronic
Control Module) or a CAN network problem,
essential base functions are maintained to rear
start the vehicle from the engine compartment
and drive in a secure manner.
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS
• Startup: Turn on the ignition in the driver's
area and rear start the vehicle from the
engine compartment,
• Opening the door: Functions normally,
• Closing the door: Manually pull on the door
and it will lock automatically,
• Windshield wipers: Wipers functions at 1st
speed only,
• Headlights: Low beams only,
MUD FLAPS AND SPLASH GUARDS
• Directional signals: Rear and front only,
Mud flaps are installed behind each front and
tag axle wheel in order to minimize dirt on the
lower panels of the vehicle and prevent stones
and debris from being thrown at vehicles
traveling behind the vehicle. Mud flaps are also
installed on front of each front axle wheel to
reduce water splash on rear-view mirrors.
Splash guards may be installed behind each
dual wheel of the drive axle to prevent stone
projectiles from being thrown at the tag axle
wheels.
• Stoplights: 2 upper stoplights + high-mounted
stoplight are functional,
• HVAC: Functional with set point fixed at 70°F
(22°C), evaporator and condenser fixed at
speed 1, defroster fixed at speed 4.
CAUTION
The following directives must be followed.
BACK-UP CAMERA
• Never connect a battery charger when the
ignition is at the ON position on a vehicle
with a CAN defective or certain functions
will start up by themselves,
An optional back-up camera is available which
provides the driver with visual assistance when
backing-up.
• Disconnect the charger before starting the
vehicle, if not the default functions will not
activate,
The monitor may be mounted on the left side
pillar. It switches ON automatically when the
transmission is in the reverse (R) range.
• If the default mode does not activate, try to
turn the ignition OFF while ensuring that
no charger is connected and then restart
the vehicle.
Care and Maintenance
143
CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................... 145
SEAT UPHOLSTERY........................................................................................................................................... 145
PLASTIC AND VINYL........................................................................................................................................... 146
WINDOWS ........................................................................................................................................................... 146
STAINLESS STEEL ............................................................................................................................................. 146
FORMICA............................................................................................................................................................. 146
CARPET............................................................................................................................................................... 146
RUBBER COMPONENTS.................................................................................................................................... 146
FLOOR CLEANING.............................................................................................................................................. 146
EXTERIOR SURFACES....................................................................................................................................... 146
WINDSHIELD ....................................................................................................................................................... 147
LAVATORY MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................... 147
FRESH WATER RESERVOIR ............................................................................................................................. 147
CLEANING CABINET........................................................................................................................................... 148
FILLING THE SUMP TANK.................................................................................................................................. 148
DRAINING THE SUMP TANK.............................................................................................................................. 148
FLUID LEVEL VERIFICATION ................................................................................................................ 148
ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................................................................. 148
TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL ............................................................................................................................... 149
POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL ..................................................................................................................... 150
COOLING FAN RIGHT ANGLE GEARBOX OIL LEVEL ......................................................................................151
DRIVE AXLE WHEEL BEARING OIL LEVEL....................................................................................................... 151
FRONT AND TAG AXLE WHEEL HUBS ............................................................................................................. 151
COOLANT FLUID LEVEL..................................................................................................................................... 151
WINDSHIELD WASHER & HEADLIGHTS WASHER RESERVOIRS .................................................................. 152
OTHER VERIFICATIONS......................................................................................................................... 152
AIR TANK PURGE ............................................................................................................................................... 152
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ....................................................................................................................................... 153
PRIMARY FUEL FILTER...................................................................................................................................... 153
A/C COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT.........................................................................................154
FAN AND ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELTS ............................................................................................................ 154
BACK-UP CAMERA ............................................................................................................................................. 154
AIR FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR ............................................................................................................ 154
A/C AND HEATING SYSTEM AIR FILTERS........................................................................................................ 155
HOSE INSPECTION ............................................................................................................................................ 156
LUBRICATION ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
WHEELS AND TIRES .......................................................................................................................................... 156
WHEEL BEARINGS ............................................................................................................................................. 157
SERVICE BRAKE TEST ...................................................................................................................................... 157
144
Care and Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE TEST ...................................................................................................................................... 157
EXTERIOR LIGHTING VERIFICATION ............................................................................................................... 157
FIRST SERVICE ON NEW VEHICLE ...................................................................................................... 158
ENGINE OIL......................................................................................................................................................... 158
COOLANT SYSTEM STRAINER ......................................................................................................................... 158
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS.......................................................................................................... 159
WALK-AROUND INSPECTION (BEFORE EVERY TRIP) ...................................................................... 161
Care and Maintenance
145
CLEANING
Method Two
The cleaning information provided in this section
is regarded as recommended cleaning
practices. Cleaning results may vary depending
on the condition of the stain. Always clean stains
promptly for best results.
1. Wet the stain with a solution of household
detergent and lukewarm water. Do not soak
the stain;
NOTE
Use only approved cleaning products such as
Prevost A.P.C., all purpose cleaner (Prevost #
683664). Never use stain protection products
on new fabrics.
To prevent permanent
staining of fabrics, clean stains soon after they
occur.
Incorrect treatment of stains can
worsen them. Get help from a cleaning
specialist to remove stubborn stains.
CAUTION
Custom fabrics and materials may require
different cleaning and maintenance practices.
Consult your supplier.
SEAT UPHOLSTERY
Firmly beat the fabric with a blunt object, such
as a wooden paddle, to release dust and dirt.
Vacuum the seat fabric in the direction of the
stitching using an upholstery nozzle.
2. Rub the stain with a damp cloth;
3. Rinse cloth after each application.
CAUTION
Do not use soap, soap powder, ammonia,
soda, bleach or cleaning products containing
any of these compounds.
Beverage Stains
Remove beverage stains by following method
one. If stain persists, repeat method one using
methylated spirits instead of solvent.
Alcoholic Beverage Stains
Remove alcoholic beverage stains by wetting
the stain with water, then cleaning following
method two.
Burns
NOTE
Scrape burnt area using a knife or razor blade
then clean following method two. Consult an
upholstery specialist when dealing with
extensive burns.
The abrasive nature of dirt and grit will reduce
upholstery life expectancy. Vacuum regularly.
Cosmetic Stains
Removal Of Stains And Marks
Depending on the nature of the stain, apply one
of the two methods explained below to remove
stains and marks on wool plush.
Method One:
1. Apply a nonflammable solvent (Trichloroethylene) to stained area with a clean, white
absorbent rag;
2. Clean stain by starting at the outer edges of
the stain and working in toward the center;
3. Blot affected area frequently with a clean,
dry absorbent cloth to prevent stain rings
caused by excess solvent.
WARNING
Use solvents in a well ventilated area. Open
all windows and doors.
Remove stains left by cosmetics by following
method one then method two.
Ink Stains
Remove ink stains following method two. If stain
persists, apply a warm oxalic acid solution.
Rinse with water.
Blood, Urine Or Vomit Stains
Remove such stains by following method two.
Copying Ink - Ball-Point Pen Ink
Treat with methylated spirits, blotting frequently
to avoid spreading stain, followed by method
two.
Marking Ink (Felt-tip Pens)
Treat with Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) followed
by method two.
146
Care and Maintenance
Oil, Grease And Paint
RUBBER COMPONENTS
Remove excess using a knife. Treat with
method one followed by method two. If stain
persists, repeat procedure.
Use only pure water or glycerin to clean stains
on rubber components.
CAUTION
Rust Stains
Remove rust stains by following method two.
Apply a warm oxalic acid solution to stained
area. Rinse with water.
Tar
Soften tar with benzene, then treat using method
one followed by method two.
Chewing Gum
Soften gum with cyclohexane. Carefully scrape
off stains using a sharp knife or razor blade.
PLASTIC AND VINYL
Clean plastic and vinyl trim using a clean damp
cloth or sponge. For vinyl trim marks, use a
lukewarm all purpose cleaner or a mild saddle
soap. Remove water spots and soap traces
using a clean damp cloth or sponge. Dry with a
clean soft cloth.
Remove grease, tar or oil stains with a clean
cloth or sponge and an all purpose or solventtype vinyl cleaner.
Apply a colorless vinyl or leather protective
product to maintain the luster and pliability of the
plastic or vinyl surface.
WINDOWS
Clean the inside of the windows with a solution
of one part vinegar to ten parts water.
STAINLESS STEEL
Use a stainless steel cleaner and follow the
manufacturer's instructions. Stainless steel
cleaning solution may be ordered from Prevost
Car Inc. quoting part number 68-0356.
FORMICA
Remove stains on Formica surfaces with a
household detergent, methylated spirits or
mineral turps. Clean with a mild abrasive and
water solution if stain persists.
CARPET
Vacuum carpets regularly to prolong carpet life.
Never use solvents on rubber components.
FLOOR CLEANING
Clean vinyl floors with a quality nonionic
detergent cleaner. Follow the manufacturer's
recommendations for cleaning.
Remove any excess detergent solution using a
wet/dry vacuum or mop. Rinse floor with a
solution of one part Clorox to ten parts warm
water.
Polish dry floor using a high-speed buffer and a
smooth red 3-M polishing pad.
Mop floor periodically with a solution of 5 per
cent Clorox in warm water.
NOTE
For custom or special floor covering materials,
consult the manufacturer or your converter for
information on how to clean and maintain
these types of floors.
EXTERIOR SURFACES
Frequent washing and waxing of the vehicle
exterior will help protect the finish and luster.
The paint finish is attacked by the abrasive
effects of airborne particles and corrosive
pollutants.
Before washing the exterior of the vehicle, close
the fresh air dampers using the “REC” button
located on HVAC control panel and on the air
intake duct in the evaporator compartment.
Install keyhole protectors to prevent water from
penetrating. Rinse vehicle with water to remove
all loose dirt. Wash vehicle using a quality
brand car wash soap. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations for cleaning. Rinse well with
water.
The vehicle exterior should be cleaned, waxed
and buffed when water droplets no longer form
on the painted surfaces.
CAUTION
Hot water can damage paint. Keep water cool
or lukewarm.
Care and Maintenance
CAUTION
• Make sure cleaning solutions are not
harmful to painted surfaces. Read the
manufacturer's instructions before using.
• Do not spray water jet directly into fresh
air inlet dampers.
• Do not aim high pressure water jet at
radiator doors. This could damage the
radiator fins.
To prevent corrosion, remove caked-on dirt and
road salt from the vehicle underbody using a
high pressure water jet. Clean wheel housings,
bumpers, muffler, tailpipe and brackets.
Carry out corrosion prevention cleaning at least
twice a year. Spray underneath of the vehicle
and let soak before cleaning. Let engine and
exhaust system cool down before cleaning.
147
LAVATORY MAINTENANCE
Flush water in the lavatory is recirculated from
the sump tank. When the sump tank water is
too soiled to be recirculated, the driver can
dump it into a suitable dump location.
Routine draining and filling of lavatory tanks
should be performed by maintenance personnel
only, and should be done before parking the
coach overnight in freezing temperature.
FRESH WATER RESERVOIR
Water from the fresh water reservoir supplies
the washbasin in the lavatory.
DANGER
Do not drink water from the fresh water
reservoir.
Tar Or Oil
Filling The Fresh Water Reservoir
Remove tar or oil as soon as possible with an
approved automotive tar and oil remover or
turpentine. Thoroughly clean area with car wash
soap and water. Let dry, then wax.
Connect the fresh water supply hose to the fresh
water reservoir fill connection located in the
curb-side engine compartment. Fill the reservoir
until the overflow tube leaks, signaling that the
reservoir is full.
Insects
Remove insect stains as soon as possible with
lukewarm soap and water or insect remover.
DANGER
Never put antifreeze in fresh water reservoir;
antifreeze is toxic.
Tree Sap
Remove tree sap or bird droppings with
lukewarm soap and water. Do not allow to
harden.
WINDSHIELD
To prevent windshield wiper streaking, keep
silicone sprays away from windshield. Remove
road film and wax build-up from windows with
lukewarm soap and water or with an alcoholbased cleaning agent. If a chamois is used to
dry and polish glass, use it exclusively for that
purpose.
DANGER
If reservoir has not been drained for an
extended period of time, draining and filling
operations must be repeated three (3) times in
order to clean reservoir and eliminate
contaminated water.
Draining The Fresh Water Reservoir
The fresh water reservoir can be drained by
simply opening the drain cock. Don’t forget to
close the cock when draining is complete.
Wiper Blades
NOTE
To avoid tearing frozen wiper blades, loosen
them before removing. Remove and clean wiper
blades periodically with an alcohol-based
cleaning solution. Clean wiper blades using a
sponge or soft cloth.
The fresh water reservoir is equipped with a
thermal valve which is set to open at about
35oF, thereby automatically draining the
reservoir in near-freezing temperatures.
148
Care and Maintenance
CLEANING CABINET
NOTE
A hose connection and valve is located behind a
small door in the top corner of the rear lavatory
wall, over the mirror. It can be used to attach a
garden hose for lavatory cleaning. To use,
connect a fresh water supply to the connection in
the curb-side engine compartment, identified as
"Cleaning Kit", located next to the fresh water
reservoir fill coupling.
It is unlawful to dump sump tank contents in
any location other than those designated as
such.
To prevent freezing during cold weather, drain the
hose after every use.
When a thorough tank draining is required,
clean sump tank by repeating the draining and
filling operations several times. Close valves
and drop in a packet of commercial toilet
deodorant (Prevost part #900329) in toilet
before starting final filling of the sump tank.
WARNING
FILLING THE SUMP TANK
Open the sump tank overflow cock and connect
a water supply hose to the toilet sump tank fill
connection. The sump tank is full when water
starts flowing through the clear overflow tube.
Close sump tank overflow cock when the tank is
full.
The toilet deodorant contains compounds
which can be very irritating to skin. Use rubber
gloves when handling and then clean toilet
seat.
CAUTION
When cold weather is expected, sump tank
must be drained if the coach is parked
overnight or for an extended period of time.
NOTE
Due to the heat it produces, there is less risk
of freezing in the tanks when the engine is
operating.
NOTE
New coaches are delivered with the sump and
fresh water tanks empty. Fill with water before
putting the coach in service.
FLUID LEVEL VERIFICATION
DRAINING THE SUMP TANK
When recirculating water in the toilet is soiled,
drain sump tank. Pull the drain slide valve lever
and allow contents to drain. Remove the access
cap and flush tank with clean water. To close,
push the slide valve back into closed positon.
CAUTION
Lavatory tanks should be serviced only at
suitably equipped stations.
Periodic inspection of oil and fluids levels is the
most economical and easiest way to help your
vehicle perform at its best. Rigorous oil level
inspection and replacement will greatly help
minimize expensive and unscheduled repairs.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check engine oil level when engine is still warm
and with vehicle parked on a level surface. Shut
OFF engine and wait at least 10 minutes for oil
to drain into oil pan before checking. Check
engine oil level daily or before each trip. Add oil
as required. Do not overfill. Remove dipstick,
wipe clean and fully reinsert to ensure an
Care and Maintenance
accurate reading. Remove dipstick and check
engine oil level.
Do not let the oil level fall below the marking on
the dipstick. Do not overfill so the level is above
the upper marking on the dipstick. Add oil
through the oil filler pipe as required in order to
maintain level within the safe range
149
Allison Automatic Transmission Oil Level
Transmission fluid level may be checked using
dipstick or transmission control pad display. For
more information on how to use the shift
selector display to check the transmission oil
level, refer to Appendix C under “Allison
transmission oil level check using the
pushbutton shift selector” in this manual.
The transmission fluid level dipstick is
accessible through the engine compartment rear
door and is located on the left side of the engine.
To check the transmission fluid level, a "cold
check" and a "hot check" must be performed. A
cold check must be made when the
transmission fluid is between 60oF and 120oF
(16oC and 50oC).
NOTE
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - VOLVO D13 ENGINE
Perform the cold check first to verify the
transmission fluid level before performing the
hot check.
01192
To prevent dirt and foreign matter from entering
the transmission, clean the end of the oil fill tube
before removing dipstick. To remove dipstick,
unscrew filler cap approximately three turns and
pull out dipstick.
VOLVO D13 ENGINE OIL LEVEL DIPSTICK
01195
TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL
DANGER
To prevent personal injury, do not service
transmission wearing loose clothing. Stand
clear of the engine and rotating components
while checking the oil level.
CAUTION
Do not mix fluid types or brands because of
possible incompatibility.
ENGINE L. H. SIDE
•
CAUTION
Use clean fluid and containers when filling
transmission. Never use containers that have
contained water or anti-freeze (Glycol).
01189
Cold Check
Run the engine until the transmission fluid
temperature is between 60oF and 120oF (16oC
and 50oC). With the engine idling, make sure
the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is in neutral (N). Remove and wipe
the dipstick with a clean cloth. Check oil level.
If the oil level is within the COLD RUN band, the
oil level is correct and a hot check can be
performed. If the oil level is on or below the
150
Care and Maintenance
lower line of the COLD RUN band, add oil until
the level lies within the COLD RUN band. If the
oil level is above the COLD RUN band, drain oil
until the level is within the band.
TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL DIPSTICK (TYPICAL)
07050
CAUTION
The oil level rises as oil temperature rises. Do
not add oil above the "cold run" band before
the transmission reaches 180oF to 220oF
(82oC to 104oC).
•
I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION OIL CHANGE
Hot Check
Make sure the transmission fluid temperature is
between 180oF and 220oF (82oC and 104oC)
before performing the hot check. Run the engine
between
1,000
and
1,200
RPM
for
approximately one minute to purge air from the
system. With the engine idling and the parking
brake applied, shift transmission from forward
(D) to reverse (R) and back into neutral (N) to fill
clutch cavities with oil. Remove and clean
dipstick, then check oil level. If the oil level is on
or under the lower HOT RUN line, add just
enough oil to bring up the level to the middle of
the HOT RUN band.
TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL DIPSTICK (TYPICAL)
07049
Replace dipstick and tighten the filler tube cap
until the rubber seal is correctly seated.
CAUTION
Do not overfill transmission fluid reservoir.
Severe damage may result.
I-Shift Transmission Oil Level
Check the transmission oil level at each service
interval. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Check the oil level through the sight glass on the
side of the transmission. Add oil as necessary.
Always use the correct Volvo approved synthetic
oil (Castrol Syntrans SAE 75W85).
•
Vehicle should be on horizontal ground
when oil is changed;
•
Do not check oil level straight after a journey
(incorrect measurement). Undertake the
check once the transmission oil has cooled
down (lower than 104oF or 40 oC);
•
Check oil level using transmission sight
glass (2) ;
FIGURE 1: SIGHT GLASS FOR CHECKING OIL LEVEL
•
Add oil through the oil filling point if
necessary (3) ;
•
Torque tighten fill plug to 26±4 Lb-Ft (35±5
Nm).
POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
The coach is equipped with a power steering
system. The hydraulic fluid tank is located in the
engine compartment behind the engine air
intake pipe and above the alternators.
Check fluid level as follows:
Care and Maintenance
1. Stop engine, open engine compartment
doors and place rear start switch to OFF
position;
2. Unscrew and remove the dipstick located on
top of the fluid tank and wipe with a clean
rag;
3. Replace dipstick in tank, then remove to
check fluid level;
151
4. The oil level is correct once the top of the oil
has reached the bottom of the side oil filling
point or once oil has already started to
escape from the side oil filling point;
5. Replace the seal and screw the side and top
filler plugs back in;
6. Place engine rear start switch to NORMAL
position. Close engine compartment door.
4. Add hydraulic fluid until it reaches the FULL
mark on the dipstick (use Dexron II, Dexron
IIE, Dexron III or Mercon fluid type);
5. Replace and tighten dipstick;
6. Place engine rear start switch to NORMAL
position. Close engine compartment doors.
RIGHT ANGLE GEARBOX OIL LEVEL CHECK
05118
DRIVE AXLE WHEEL BEARING OIL LEVEL
Drive axle wheel bearings are lubricated by the
differential oil. Maintain differential oil at correct
level to ensure adequate lubrication of drive axle
wheel bearings at all times.
FRONT AND TAG AXLE WHEEL HUBS
The unitized hub bearings used on the NDS
range of axles, are non-serviceable items.
Bearings are pre-adjusted, lubricated and have
seals fitted as part of the manufacturing process.
The bearings are greased for life and there is no
need or facility for re-lubrication.
COOLANT FLUID LEVEL
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
14059
COOLING FAN RIGHT ANGLE GEARBOX OIL
LEVEL
Check cooling fan right angle gearbox oil level
as follows:
1. Stop engine, open engine compartment
doors and place engine rear start switch to
OFF position;
2. Remove side oil filler plug;
3. Add oil through the top or side oil filling point
if the oil level has fallen below the side oil
filling point;
Coolant level is correct when coolant is visible
through the surge tank sight glass when cold.
Fill the tank as necessary with the same 50/50
water-antifreeze mixture normally used. Do not
mix two different types of coolant. Refer to the
Maintenance Manual for proper coolant type
specifications or see the label affixed near the
coolant surge tank on the vehicle.
CAUTION
On Volvo D13 engine, use only Extended Life
Coolant (ELC). Do not add supplemental
coolant additives (SCA) to extended life
coolant. Do not use a coolant filter containing
Supplemental Coolant Additives (SCA).
152
Care and Maintenance
CAUTION
During cold weather days, use windshield
washer fluid suitable for freezing temperature
only.
OTHER VERIFICATIONS
It is good practice to regularly inspect the
vehicle for signs of component wear and to
perform safety and maintenance routines.
AIR TANK PURGE
COOLANT LEVEL SIGHT GLASS
05094
WARNING
Hot engine coolant is under high pressure.
Allow engine to cool down before adding
coolant.
WINDSHIELD WASHER
WASHER RESERVOIRS
&
The vehicle may be equipped with up to six air
tanks. Purge accessory and wet air tanks before
each trip. The primary and secondary air tanks
must be purged at every oil change. Oil changes
should be scheduled at least every 12,500 miles
(20 000 km).
HEADLIGHTS
The windshield washer reservoir and headlights
washer reservoir are located in the front service
compartment door. The windshield washer
reservoir has a capacity of 5.3 US gallons (20
liters) while the headlights washer reservoir has
a capacity of 2.6 US gallons (10 liters). Check
fluid level regularly.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT R. H. SIDE
12211
The accessory air tank drain cock is accessible
from the front service compartment.
WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR
18619
The windshield spray jets are located on the
windshield wipers and are angled to spray
towards the center of the windshield.
Adjust the headlights washer nozzles according
to the instructions found in section 23 of the
maintenance manual. You may use water or
windshield washer fluid as well.
The wet air tank drain cock is accessible from
the engine compartment. All air tanks are
equipped with a drain cock underneath the tank.
Refer to the "Lubrication and Service Check
Point Chart" in this chapter for tank locations.
Drain tanks by turning cocks counterclockwise.
Care and Maintenance
FRONT SERVICE COMPARTMENT
153
12210
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Inspect fire extinguishers monthly to insure
operation in emergency situations.
On extinguishers with a pressure gauge, the
needle should be in the green or NORMAL
range. Refill or replace extinguisher if pressure
is below normal;
Check that seal on handle is intact;
Check that hose nozzle is in good condition and
the nozzle is free of obstructions;
FUEL FILTERS WITH VOLVO D13 ENGINE
03085
Keep fire extinguishers clean.
PRIMARY FUEL FILTER
A primary fuel filter is installed on the engine.
This filter may consist of a filter cartridge with a
drain valve at the bottom, or a filter cartridge, a
water separation bowl and may have a fuel
heater built in. It is used to prevent water from
entering the fuel system. The primary fuel filter
should be drained periodically or when the
telltale light on the dashboard illuminates if
equipped with this system. To drain water,
loosen the drain valve below the separator.
Close the drain valve when finished.
The optional Fuel Pro 382 diesel fuel filter
system consists of a permanently mounted fuel
processor, a replaceable filter element, a filter
element cover and collar and a fluid filter base
assembly. This system is installed between the
fuel tank and the fuel pump and replaces the
primary fuel filter. The filter serves as a water
separator as well as a fuel filter. To drain, turn ¼
turn the drain valve below filter, close when
water has been flushed out.
DAVCO FUEL PRO 382 INSTALLATION
03062
154
Care and Maintenance
A/C
COMPRESSOR
ADJUSTMENT
BELT
TENSION
The air conditioning compressors are driven by
V-belts.
Belt tensioning is applied through air bellows
which are adjusted by an air pressure regulating
valve mounted in the engine compartment, right
behind the belt tensioning pressure control
valve. The correct pressure of 45 psi (310 kPa)
is set at the factory. Periodically verify the
pressure at the regulating valve using a
pressure gauge and correct if necessary.
PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE
12200
FAN AND ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELTS
These belts have automatic belt tensioner to
keep the correct tension without adjustment.
BACK-UP CAMERA
The optional back-up camera is located on the
rear cap. To clean the camera's protective glass,
spray with soapy water. Wipe with a clean damp
rag or wiper blade.
WARNING
AIR BELLOWS
01069
For belt replacement, air pressure must be
released from bellows by means of the belt
tensioning pressure control valve. This valve,
mounted close to the pressure regulating valve,
is manually operated. Before handling, set the
rear start switch to OFF and observe all
applicable safety precautions.
•
Refer to the Parts Manual, Maintenance
Manual
or
"Service
Bulletins"
for
recommended belt sizes and tension
settings;
•
Periodically inspect belt and pulleys for wear
or damage;
•
Do not treat belts with any compounds.
Keep belts dry.
To avoid injury, do not clean camera with
transmission in reverse (R). Shut off engine
and apply parking brake before cleaning.
CAUTION
To prevent scratches to the camera protective
glass, do not wipe with dry rag. Use a clean
damp rag.
AIR FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR
A filter restriction indicator (optional) is used to
monitor the vacuum level between the air filter
and engine. A red marker is displayed when the
air filter is clogged. Replace the air filter when a
red marker is displayed or after a maximum of
two years. Reset by pressing on the indicator's
extremity.
The filter restriction indicator is located on the
engine air intake duct
Care and Maintenance
AIR FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR
155
01052
A/C AND HEATING SYSTEM AIR FILTERS
For maximum air conditioning and heating
system efficiency, air filters should be inspected
and cleaned as required in maintenance
schedule to ensure proper ventilation of the
evaporator and heating radiator cores. To clean
filters, back flush with water, then dry with air.
CAUTION
Do not use high pressure water jet to avoid
damaging filter.
CAUTION
DRIVER'S AREA AIR FILTER REMOVAL
22193
Passengers Area Air Filter
The central HVAC system's air filter is located in
the evaporator compartment on driver’s side of
the vehicle. To access, open the baggage
compartment forward of the evaporator
compartment. An access door held shut by six
retaining screws is located in the wall separating
the baggage compartment and the evaporator
compartment. Slide out the filter for maintenance
purposes.
Be sure not to reverse filter upon installation.
Driver’s Area Air Filters
The driver HVAC system's air filters are located
behind the R.H. console. To gain access to the
A/C filters, unscrew the grill located at the top
step of the entrance door steps. Remove the
filters for cleaning or replacement.
NOTE
If the windshield is continuously fogged, check
that the driver’s air filter is not clogged.
PASSENGERS AREA AIR FILTER REMOVAL
22306
CAUTION
Be sure not to install filter in inverted position.
156
Care and Maintenance
Air Filters in the Overhead Compartments
LUBRICATION
Remove, clean or replace the air filter located
behind each overhead baggage compartment
fan.
Grease all lubrication points during scheduled
maintenance. For heavy loads or extended use,
lubricate more often. Refer to the Maintenance
Manual, section 24 for information on
lubrication.
WHEELS AND TIRES
Check for loose wheel nuts. Inspect all types of
rims for cracks. Cracks can appear in many
places but typically radiate out from where a
load is applied. Both aluminum alloy and steel
wheel nuts should be tightened to 450 to 500
foot-pounds (610 to 680 N.m.) torque.
OVERHEAD COMPARTMENT FAN AIR FILTER
22201
HOSE INSPECTION
Inspect hoses for leaks regularly to ensure
efficient, economical and safe operation of the
engine and related equipment. Carefully inspect
all fittings, clamps and ties. To prevent chafing,
make sure hoses are not touching shafts,
couplings, heated surfaces, sharp edges or
other parts. Since hose clamps and ties can
vibrate loose or fail over time, inspect frequently
and tighten or replace as necessary.
Correct leaking hoses immediately. Failure to
correct leaks can cause severe damage to the
equipment, as well as increase operating costs
due to lost fluids. Treat fuel and oil leaks as an
immediate fire hazard.
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage may
result from fire caused by leaking flammable
fluids.
Hose Service Life
Hoses have a limited service life. Thoroughly
inspect hoses annually. Look for surface
damage or indications of twisted, worn, crimped,
cracked or leaking lines. Replace damaged
hoses immediately.
Hoses should be replaced during major overhaul
or after a maximum of seven years service. Be
certain replacement hoses match the original
equipment manufacturer's specifications.
Keep the tires inflated to the recommended
inflation pressure to prolong tire life and for
safety.
NOTE
Recommended tire inflation pressures are
given in the "Coach Final Record", placed in
the technical publications package supplied
with the vehicle.
The cold tire inflation
pressures are on the Department of Transport
certification plate located on the L.H. console
besides the driver’s seat. When special tires
are installed by Prevost on a new vehicle, a
special tire inflation chart is added next to the
certification plate.
WARNING
Do not exceed maximum inflation pressure.
Incorrect tire pressure increases tire wear and
could lead to loss of driving control because
of reduced road handling. Check tire pressure
regularly.
• Vehicles equipped with BERU TPMS
On vehicles equipped with the Beru Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), it is better
to use the TPMS display as the primary
reference to judge when tire pressure need
adjustment.
The TPMS presents pressure readings of each
tire as a +/- deviation from the wanted target.
If a tire reads within +/- 3 PSI no adjustment is
needed.
If a tire reads -4 PSI and below, re-inflate by the
marked amount.
Care and Maintenance
If a tire reads +4 PSI and above , deflate by the
marked amount.
Relying on the TPMS system is better than
relying on a hand gage since the TPMS is
temperature compensated and remain accurate
no matter if the tires are cold or hot.
Tires take up to 3 hours to get down to ambient
temperature after a ride. A common mistake
consist of checking pressure while the tires have
not fully cooled down which leads into underinflated tires. Relying on the TPMS eliminate this
mistake.
Running tires at optimal pressure reduce tire
wear, improve safety and fuel economy.
NOTE
It is more accurate to use the TPMS display to
set the tire pressures than a pressure gauge.
WHEEL BEARINGS
Check wheel bearing cover for overheating
(especially after using the service brakes) during
fuel stops by touching the wheel bearing cover.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING VERIFICATION
Exterior Lighting Test Mode
This useful function allows quick verification of
the vehicle exterior lights.
•
Activating the test mode:
When the vehicle is stationary (parking brake
applied), pull up the multi-function lever 3 times
within 3 seconds to activate the test mode. This
test can be done when the engine is not running
providing that the battery charge is sufficient
(above 24.0 volts).
The telltale panel alarm emits a sound each
second to remind that the test mode is in
progress.
• Stopping the test mode:
To stop the test mode, pull up the multi-function
lever once or turn the ignition OFF or remove
the parking brake.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The test mode is useful to check the
functioning of the multiplex outputs and the
exterior lights. It doesn't test the functionality
of the commands related to the exterior
lighting. For a complete testing, the directional
signal commands, the headlights commands
and the brake pedal have to be checked
before. Once these commands tested,
activate the test mode to check the exterior
lighting.
WARNING
If replacement tires are different from those
described on the certification plate, pressure
must be adjusted as requested in the Tire and
Rim Association Manual.
SERVICE BRAKE TEST
Check for correct pressure build-up.
Stop
engine and check pressure gauge Pressure loss
should be imperceptible with engine stopped
and without brake pedal applied. Air loss should
not exceed 3 psi/minute (21 kPa/minute) with
engine stopped and brake pedal fully applied.
•
Using the test mode:
First, test the functionality of the commands
related to the exterior lighting:
•
Activate the right directional signal and
check that the corresponding telltale
light illuminates.
•
Activate the left directional signal and
check that the corresponding telltale
light illuminates.
•
Press on the brake pedal and check that
the STOP telltale light illuminates.
PARKING BRAKE TEST
Release parking/emergency brake. Pump
service brake pedal until air pressure drops to
65 psi (448 kPa). Make sure the warning buzzer
operates and that the emergency brakes apply
(the control valve knob lifts up). Allow air
pressure to reach 95 psi (655 kPa) before
releasing parking brake.
Driving the vehicle while the parking brake is
applied should not be possible.
157
Once these commands tested, activate the test
mode to check the exterior lighting by pulling up
the multi-function lever 3 times within 3 seconds.
158
Care and Maintenance
Go to the front of the vehicle and check the
lights:
•
First the left and right directional signals.
•
Identification lights and clearance lights.
•
Low beams.
•
High beams.
Go to the left side of the vehicle:
•
Directional signals.
•
Marker lights.
•
Directional signals.
•
Marker lights.
VARIOUS LIGHTS LOCATION
Go to the rear of the vehicle:
ENGINE OIL
•
Directional signals.
•
Identification lights and clearance lights.
•
Stoplights and taillights.
•
Back-up
(option).
lights
and
back-up
Preliminary oil change is not required since the
engine has been test-run at the factory. Change
oil and filter as specified in Section 24 of the
Maintenance Manual.
alarm
IMPORTANT NOTE
To check the back-up lights and back-up
alarm, you must flip the starter selector switch
to REAR START position. (If the engine is
running, do this quick enough so that the
engine does not stop).
Go to the right side of the vehicle (same
sequence as left side).
FIRST SERVICE ON NEW VEHICLE
NOTE
Refer to Maintenance Manual for precise
service schedule.
COOLANT SYSTEM FILTER
The coolant system filter is designed to recover
the soldering residues trapped inside the coolant
lines during their initial assembly. Clean filter
after first 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and then every
50,000 miles (80 000 km). Refer to the
Maintenance Manual under section 05: Cooling
System.
NOTE
If soldering has been performed on cooling
system, clean filter after 3,000 miles (5 000
km).
Care and Maintenance
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
•
Understand
operation;
•
Always maintain the vehicle in good running
condition;
•
Do not drive with low fuel. If the fuel tank
runs dry, the engine will not start until the air
is bled from the fuel system. Refer to
"Maintenance Manual" for more information;
basic
principles
of
vehicle
•
Allow engine to run for at least two minutes
at normal idle before shutting OFF;
•
Engine should be at idle when shifting from
neutral (N) to forward (D) or from neutral (N)
to reverse (R);
•
The automatic transmission does not have a
park (P) position. Place transmission in
neutral (N) position and apply parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped. A warning
buzzer will sound if the engine is stopped
and the parking brake has not been applied
when foot pressure is removed from the
brake pedal;
159
•
Always follow the procedures described in
this manual;
•
Unless stated otherwise, shut OFF the
engine before performing all servicing,
lubrication and maintenance tasks;
•
Do not attempt to push or pull-start the
coach;
•
The vehicle may be damaged if towed with
the axle shafts or driveshaft connected;
•
Two chemical fire extinguishers are under
the first row of passenger seats. In case of
fire, immediately evacuate all occupants.
Occupant safety is the first priority. Do not
attempt to extinguish the fire if there is
immediate danger or risk for personal injury;
•
When driving on ice and snow, accelerate
and decelerate gradually;
WARNING
Report all problems affecting passenger or
driver safety to a Prevost service center or an
authorized service center. Have problems
corrected immediately.
1
Accessories air tank drain cock
21
Primary fuel filter
2
Accessories air filter
22
Secondary fuel filter
3
Steering drag link
23
Power steering fluid tank
4
Height control valve (front)
24
Engine oil filter
5
Steering tie rod
25
Cooling fan gearbox
6
Accessories air tank
26
Allison transmission oil dipstick
7
Steering column U-joints
27
Engine coolant surge tank
8
Steering knuckle pins
28
Coolant filter & conditioner
9
Steering damper cylinder
29
Engine air filter restriction indicator
10
Secondary air tank
30
Engine air filter
11
Kneeling air tank
31
Engine oil dipstick and filler tube
12
Air dryer
32
DEF tank
13
Height control valve (rear)
33
Diesel particulate filter
14
Wet air tank
34
SCR catalytic converter
15
Primary air tank
35
Diesel fuel tank
16
Differential
36
Davco Fuel Pro 382 fuel filter
17
Propeller shaft
37
Power steering pump
18
Tag axle lever pivot
38
Air compressor
19
Transmission
39
Alternators
20
Starter
160
Care and Maintenance
COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION (COMPONENTS REPRESENTATION MAY DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM AN ACTUAL VEHICLE)
Care and Maintenance
161
WALK-AROUND INSPECTION (BEFORE EVERY TRIP)
NOTE
Inspect the coach in a circular manner as shown in the illustration.
Approaching the Coach
Step 2: Front of the Coach
•
Check under the coach for oil, fuel,
coolant leaks or other signs of damage.
•
Check exterior body surfaces for signs
of breaks or damage.
Preparation
•
Drain
accumulated
water
accessory and wet air tanks.
•
Close air tank drain valves.
•
Start the engine and let the air pressure
build up to normal. Stop engine.
•
Switch on hazard warning flashers.
•
Make sure parking brakes are applied.
from
Step 1: Front Left Side of the Coach
•
Check condition of wheel rim. Especially
look for cracks, missing nuts, bent or
broken studs.
•
Check condition of tire: properly inflated,
no serious cuts, bulges, tread wear or
any signs of misalignment; valve stem
not touching wheel or rim; valve cap in
place.
•
Check windshield and headlights
washer reservoir fluid level and add if
necessary.
•
Check for damage and clean if dirty.
•
Check windshield wiper arms for proper
spring tension.
•
Check wiper blades for any damage,
“dead” rubber and attachment to arm.
•
Check to see thst there is no mud,
snow, ice build-up or other obstruction in
front of the ACB radar sensor, if
applicable.
•
Check clearance and identification
lights, they should be clean, operating
and of the proper color. Refer to
“Exterior Lighting Verification” in Care
and Maintenance chapter.
•
Turn on headlights. High and low beams
should be operating and lenses clean. If
equipped, check fog lights. Refer to
“Exterior Lighting Verification” in Care
and Maintenance chapter.
•
Left and right front turn signal lights
clean, operating and proper color. Refer
to “Exterior Lighting Verification” in Care
and Maintenance chapter.
Step 3: Front Right Side of the Coach
•
Check condition of wheel rim. Especially
look for cracks, missing nuts, bent or
broken studs.
162
•
Care and Maintenance
Check condition of tire: properly inflated,
no serious cuts, bulges, tread wear or
any signs of misalignment; valve stem
not touching wheel or rim; valve cap in
place.
Step 4: Rear Right Side of the Coach
•
Check condition of wheels and rims.
Especially look for cracks, missing nuts,
bent or broken studs.
•
Check that baggage and service
compartment doors are properly closed.
•
Check condition of tires: properly
inflated, no serious cuts, bulges, tread
wear or any signs of misalignment;
valve stems not touching wheels or
rims; valve caps in place and no objects
stuck between the wheels.
•
Check stop light, tail light, directional
signal light and back-up light assembly;
operating, clean and proper color. Refer
to “Exterior Lighting Verification” in Care
and Maintenance chapter.
Step 7: Rear Left Side of the Coach
•
Check condition of wheels and rims.
Especially look for cracks, missing nuts,
bent or broken studs.
•
Check that baggage and service
compartment doors are properly closed.
•
If so equipped, check coolant heater
system for fuel leaks.
•
Check condition of tires: properly
inflated, no serious cuts, bulges, tread
wear or any signs of misalignment;
valve stems not touching wheels or
rims; valve caps in place and no objects
stuck between the wheels.
Step 5: Engine Compartment Right Side Area
•
Check engine and surrounding areas for
coolant, oil and fuel leaks.
•
Check fuel/filter water separator and
drain if necessary. Check for leaks.
•
•
Check for proper operation of the
entrance door.
Check wiring harness for signs of
damage.
•
Check steps; clean them if there is any
substance that makes them slippery,
which
makes
coach
entry/exit
hazardous.
•
Check that emergency exit windows and
roof escape hatches can be opened
then close all windows and hatches
securely.
Inside the Coach
Step 6: Engine Compartment
•
Check engine and surrounding areas for
coolant, oil and fuel leaks.
•
Check wiring harness for signs of
damage.
•
Check condition of drive belts.
•
•
Check engine crankcase oil level, add if
necessary.
Verify proper operation of windshield
wiper/ washer.
•
•
Check Allison transmission fluid level
(can also be checked from push-button
shift selector), add if necessary.
Adjust and clean mirrors for adequate
rear view vision.
•
•
Check power steering reservoir fluid
level, add if necessary.
Start engine and check for proper
operation of all gauges and indicator
lights.
•
•
Check coolant surge tank fluid level, add
if necessary.
Check for proper operation of electric
and air horns and back-up alarm.
•
Check air cleaner restriction indicator,
replace air cleaner when red signal
locks in full view.
Perform a brake test. Check both primary and
secondary pressure gauges
Technical Information
163
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS................................................................................................................. 167
CAPACITIES ............................................................................................................................................ 167
FUEL TYPE .............................................................................................................................................. 167
BIODIESEL FUELS .............................................................................................................................................. 167
WHEELS AND TIRES .............................................................................................................................. 168
RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE AT MAXIMUM COLD LOAD.................................................. 168
BELTS....................................................................................................................................................... 168
ENGINE..................................................................................................................................................... 168
VOLVO D13 ENGINE........................................................................................................................................... 168
ALLISON TRANSMISSION...................................................................................................................... 168
VOLVO I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION ........................................................................................................... 169
PROPELLER SHAFT ............................................................................................................................... 169
BRAKES ................................................................................................................................................... 169
BRAKE CHAMBER EFFECTIVE AREA ............................................................................................................... 169
AIR SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................ 169
ANTILOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)................................................................................................... 169
TROUBLESHOOTING AND TESTING ................................................................................................................ 169
AUTOMATIC TRACTION CONTROL (ATC) – ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) ............. 169
STEERING ................................................................................................................................................ 170
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM............................................................................................................................ 170
SUSPENSION........................................................................................................................................... 170
I-BEAM AXLE FRONT SUSPENSION ................................................................................................................. 170
INDEPENDENT FRONT SUSPENSION .............................................................................................................. 170
DRIVE AXLE ........................................................................................................................................................ 170
TAG AXLE............................................................................................................................................................ 170
ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................. 170
COOLING SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................. 171
FUEL SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................... 171
EXHAUST SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................. 171
HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ...................................................................................................... 171
OIL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................. 172
ENGINE................................................................................................................................................................ 172
ALLISON TRANSMISSION .................................................................................................................................. 172
I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION..................................................................................................................................... 172
DIFFERENTIAL .................................................................................................................................................... 172
FAN RIGHT ANGLE GEARBOX .......................................................................................................................... 172
POWER STEERING RESERVOIR....................................................................................................................... 172
PRE-HEATING SYSTEM.......................................................................................................................... 172
164
Technical Information
PLATES AND CERTIFICATION .............................................................................................................. 173
SAFETY CERTIFICATION ................................................................................................................................... 174
DOT CERTIFICATION PLATE ............................................................................................................................. 174
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) .......................................................................................... 174
COACH FINAL RECORD......................................................................................................................... 174
Technical Information
X3-45 OVERALL DIMENSIONS (SIDE ELEVATION)
165
18673
166
Technical Information
X3-45 OVERALL DIMENSIONS (TOP, FRONT AND REAR VIEWS)
18674
Technical Information
DIMENSIONS AND
WEIGHTS
Overall length
(including bumpers)
X3-45
45' (13,7 m)
Overall width
102" (2,59 m)
Overall height
134 3/8" (3,413 m)
Wheelbase
(center of front axle
to center of drive axle)
Floor height from ground
340" (8,64 m)
48 1/2" (1,23 m)
CAPACITIES
Allison Automatic
Transmission (does not
include external circuit)
I-Shift Transmission
Differential oil
Power steering
reservoir
A/C compressor oil
Windshield washer
reservoir
Refrigerant
167
X3-45
6 U.S. gallons (23 l)
6.9 U.S. gallons (26 l)
with retarder
16 U.S. qts (15 l)
20 U.S. qts (18,7 l)
4.0 U.S. qts (3,8 l)
4.5 U.S. qts (4,3 l)
5.3 U.S. gal. (20 l)
Ground clearance
11" (280 mm)
Step height from ground
15" (380 mm)
Step height (other steps)
7" (178 mm)
FUEL TYPE
Headroom
80" (2,03 m)
Entrance door opening
width
30" (762 mm)
Front overhang
70 ¾" (1,80 m)
Diesel engines for 2007 and later model year
vehicles are designed to operate only with Ultra
Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel, which can
contain no more than 15 ppm sulfur.
Rear overhang
107 1/2" (2,73 m)
Front track
85.9" (2,18 m)
Drive track
76.7" (1,95 m)
Rear track (Tag axle)
83.6" (2,12 m)
Turning circle radius
(I-Beam Axle)
47'-3" (14.4 m)
Turning circle radius
(independent suspension)
43'-9" (13.3 m)
Curb weight
36,000 lb (16 327 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (G.V.W.R.)
49,600 lb (22 498 kg)
Front axle Gross Axle
Weight Rating (G.A.W.R.)
16,500 lb (7 500 kg)
Drive axle (G.A.W.R.)
20,500 lb (9 299 kg)
Tag axle (G.A.W.R.)
12,600 lb (5 727 kg)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (G.V.W.R.)
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (G.A.W.R.)
for front, drive and tag axles are listed on a
certification plate located on the L.H. control
panel in driver's section.
CAPACITIES
Volvo D13 Engine oil
(Total with filters)
Fuel tank
(legal capacity equal to
95% of volume)
Cooling system
X3-45
41 U.S. qrts (39 l)
208 U.S. gal. (787 l)
18.7 U.S. gal. (71 l)
24.1 lb (11 kg)
CAUTION
ULSD fuel is necessary to avoid fouling the
engine’s Exhaust Aftertreatment System. Use
of fuel other than ULSD will reduce the
efficiency and durability of the engine.
BIODIESEL FUELS
ULSD-B5 biodiesel may be used. B5 tells you
the percentage of biodiesel mixed in with ULSD.
B5 is 5% biodiesel and 95% ULSD.
Fuel used must meet engine manufacturer’s
specification for biodiesel fuel. Concerning the
use of biodiesel with Volvo D13 engines, refer to
Volvo’s specifications.
Biodiesel fuels are alkyl esters of long chain fatty
acids derived from renewable resources.
Biodiesel fuels made from soybean or rapeseed
oil through the proper transesterification reaction
process are recommended. Other feedstock
source of biodiesel fuels such as animal fat and
used cooking oils are not recommended.
Biodiesel
fuels
meeting
ASTM
D6751
specification and from BQ-9000 accredited
producer, prior to blending can be mixed up to
5% maximum by volume in petroleum diesel
fuel. The resulting mixture must meet the fuel
properties of ASTM D975 specification. Failures
attributed to the use of biodiesel fuel will not be
covered by Volvo or Prevost product warranty.
Also, any engine performance problem related
to the use of biodiesel fuel would not be
168
Technical Information
recognized nor considered as Volvo or Prevost’s
responsibility.
BELTS
Use
WHEELS AND TIRES
Cooling fan drive belt
Accuride steel wheels .........................9” X 22½”
A/C system 05G
compressor
A/C small system ICE
compressor
Alcoa aluminum forged wheels ...........9” X 22½”
Except inner drive axle (steel)..........8¼” X 22½”
Alcoa aluminum forged wheels
(for super single tire) .........................14” X 22½”
Alternator (twin Bosch)
Tires ...................... 315/80 R22.5 load range “L”
Alternator (emergency)
Tires ...................... 365/70 R22.5 load range “L”
Tires (super single) 455/55 R22.5 load range “L”
RECOMMENDED
TIRE
INFLATION
PRESSURE AT MAXIMUM COLD LOAD
The recommended tire inflation pressures are
given in the applicable documents supplied with
the vehicle. In addition, minimum cold tire
inflation pressures are listed on the Department
of Transport (DOT) certification plate, affixed on
the left wall near the driver’s seat.
Vehicle equipped with TPMS: The TPMS target
pressures are factory set to equal the prevailing
tire pressure at delivery time. When tire
pressures are increased to account for higher
vehicle weight, the TPMS set point need to be
increased accordingly.
CAUTION
These tire pressures are established in
accordance with the maximum allowable load
on each axle. A lower pressure is
recommended if the axle load is less than the
above specifications. Weigh vehicle fully
loaded and pressurize according to tire
manufacturer's recommendations. For non
standard tire and wheel specifications, see
Prevost tire pressure tabulation in "Coach
Final Record".
WARNING
Special tire selection may lower maximum
allowable speed limit, even below posted
speed limit. For maximum safety, check with
tire manufacturer.
Model
Multi V-14 Rib
14PK2526
V Belt BX-100
9212-0404
V-Belt A-41
9012-2041
Multi-V-8 Rib
8PK1935
Multi-V-8 Rib
8PK1865
Qty
1
2
2
1
1
NOTE
Belts specifications may vary. For proper belt
selection, always consult your vehicle Coach
Final Record.
ENGINE
VOLVO D13
Volvo D13 engine displacing 12.8 liters. The
engine is an inline six cylinder, four stroke,
turbocharged, air to air charge cooled, diesel
engine with SOHC with 4 valves per cylinder.
Power .....................................................435 HP
Torque..............................1,700 lbf•ft (2304 Nm)
Operating range .......................... 1400-1800rpm
Full dress, dry weight.............................. 2519 lb
ALLISON TRANSMISSION
Allison B500 (B500R with the optional output
retarder) electronically controlled six speed
automatic transmission.
Gear Ratios
1st ...............................................................3.510
2nd ..............................................................1.906
3rd ...............................................................1.429
4th ...............................................................1.000
5th ...............................................................0.737
6th ...............................................................0.639
Reverse......................................................4.801
Converter ....................................................... 1.9
Differential ratio............................................ 3.91
Differential ratio (optional)............................ 3.58
Technical Information
VOLVO I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION
Technologically
advanced
twelve
automated mechanical transmission
speed
Gear Ratios
1st................................................................14.94
2nd ...............................................................11.73
3rd .................................................................9.04
4th .................................................................7.09
5th .................................................................5.54
6th .................................................................4.35
7th .................................................................3.44
8th .................................................................2.70
9th .................................................................2.08
10th ...............................................................1.63
11th ...............................................................1.27
12th ...............................................................1.00
st
Reverse 1 .................................................17.48
Reverse 2nd ............................................... 13.73
Differential ratio ............................................2.50
Maximum input torque..... 1850 Lb-Ft (2500 Nm)
PROPELLER SHAFT
Hayes-Dana SPL250 type tubular shafts. It is
provided with heavy-duty universal joints.
BRAKES
The features of the braking system include a
dual system where the front and rear circuits are
completely independent from each other. The
brakes are air operated disc type brakes with
automatic slack adjusters on front, drive and tag
axles. The emergency/parking brakes are
located on the drive and tag axles only.
BRAKE CHAMBER EFFECTIVE AREA
Front axle .................................................. 24 in2
Drive axle ..........24/24 in2 (service / emergency)
Tag axle.............14/16 in2 (service / emergency)
AIR SYSTEM
Compressed air is provided by a twin cylinder,
31.8 cfm Wabco, gear-driven, water-cooled and
engine oil lubricated air compressor.
ANTILOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
The antilock braking system has one Electronic
Control Unit (ECU) controlling a four channel
system. A wheel slip sensor is mounted at each
front axle and drive axle wheel. The Tag axle
wheels are slave to the drive axle wheels.
169
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) is
maintenance free. Its operating voltage is 24 ±
6 volts DC. The thermal operating range for the
ECM is from -40 to 167°F (-40 to 75°C).
The solenoid control valves are maintenance
free. Their operating voltage is 24 (+4.8, -2.4)
volts DC. The rated current draw is 1.65 amps.
The thermal operating range of the solenoid
control valves is from -40 to 176°F (-40 to 80°C).
TROUBLESHOOTING AND TESTING
For troubleshooting and testing of the vehicle's
anti-lock braking system, refer to Meritor
WABCO Maintenance Manual: “Anti-Lock Brake
Systems For Trucks, Tractors and Buses" or use
dashboard Driver Information Display (DID).
AUTOMATIC TRACTION CONTROL
(ATC) – ELECTRONIC STABILITY
PROGRAM (ESP)
In addition to the ABS function, vehicle may be
equipped with an advanced model of Bendix
EC-60 controller to provide an Automatic
Traction Control (ATC) feature. Bendix ATC
can improve vehicle traction during acceleration,
and lateral stability while accelerating through
curves. ATC utilizes Engine Torque Limiting
(ETL) where the ECU communicates with the
engine’s controller and/or Differential Braking
(DB) where individual wheel brake applications
are used to improve vehicle traction.
The EC-60 advanced model controller also
provides ABS-based stability features referred to
as ESP Electronic Stability Program.
Refer to Maintenance Manual, Section 12: Brake
and Air System for more information on this
system.
CAUTION
Even with ESP-equipped vehicles, the driver
remains responsible for ensuring vehicle
stability during operation.
DANGER
ESP may reduce the vehicle speed
automatically.
ESP can make the vehicle decelerate
automatically. ESP can slow the vehicle with
or without the operator applying the brake,
and even when the throttle is being applied.
170
Technical Information
STEERING

ZF 8098 integral hydraulic assisted steering
gear;

Variable assistance in function of speed is
optional.

Volvo hydraulic pump gear driven from
engine drive.

Hydraulic reservoir and dipstick accessible
from engine compartment.

System pressure: 2175 psi (150 bars).

Steering wheel diameter 20". Tilt steering
wheel and telescopic steering column;
pneumatically locked with foot operated
switch for adjustment.

Number of turns: 5¾.

Outside turning radius: See Dimensions and
Weight.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
2 Shock absorbers;
2 Upper A-arms;
2 Lower A-arms;
2 Torque rods;
2 Steering Levers;
1 Height control valve;
1 sway bar (1¾" diameter).
DRIVE AXLE
4 Bellows (11");
4 Shock absorbers;
3 Radius rods;
1 Panhard rod;
2 Height control valves.
TAG AXLE
2 Bellows (11");
2 Shock absorbers;
3 Radius rods;
1 Panhard rod.

24-volt, negative ground;
ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

12-volt exterior lighting;

Two 28 volts, 120 amp, self-regulated, beltdriven, air-cooled HD 10 Bosch alternators;
Use wheel alignment systems which work with
angle measurements only, such as Josam or
Hunter systems. Alignment specifications are
listed in the following tables:

Four 12 volt, group 31 format maintenancefree batteries connected in series/parallel.
Cold cranking capacity is 1900 amps with a
reserve capacity of 195 minutes;

100 amp battery equalizer.
I-BEAM AXLE FRONT SUSPENSION
Minimum Nominal Maximum
value
value
value
Right camber
-0.250
0.125
0.375
(degrees)
SUSPENSION
Left camber
(degrees)
-0.250
0.125
0.375
Goodyear rolling lobe type air springs (bellows)
are used throughout.
Right caster
(degrees)
2.0
2.75
3.5
Left caster
(degrees)
2.0
2.75
3.5
Total toe-in
(degrees)
0.08
0.13
0.17
I-BEAM
AXLE
(OPTION)
FRONT
SUSPENSION
2 Bellows (12"); for a G.A.W.R. of 16,500 lb;
2 Shock absorbers;
4 Radius rods;
1 Transverse radius rod;
1 Height control valve.
1 sway bar (1¾" diameter).
INDEPENDENT FRONT SUSPENSION
2 Bellows (12") for a G.A.W.R. of 16,500 lb;
FRONT AXLE
(INDEPENDENT SUSPENSION)
Minimum Nominal
value
value
Right camber
0.0
0.150
(degrees)
Left camber
(degrees)
0.0
0.150
Maximu
m value
0.35
0.35
171
Technical Information
 Low level signal at 26 US gallons/98.4 liters.
FRONT AXLE
(INDEPENDENT SUSPENSION)
Right caster
2.35
2.6
(degrees)
 Primary filter 25 microns (standard).
2.85
 Primary fuel filter with
indicator (Volvo D13).
 Fuel pro 382 filter available as an option as a
primary filter.
Left caster
(degrees)
2.35
2.6
2.85
Total toe-in
(degrees)
0.08
0.13
0.17
electrical
water
 Secondary filter 3 to 5 microns.
 Shut-off valve on fuel supply line.
DRIVE AXLE
Minimum
value
Nominal
value
Maximum
value
-0.04
0
0.04
Minimum
value
Nominal
value
Maximum
value
Thrust angle
(degrees)
TAG AXLE
Parallelism
-0.02
0
(degrees)
(*) Use the drive axle as reference
0.02
COOLING SYSTEM
 Extra capacity, copper fin radiator and
aluminum charge air cooler arranged one
behind the other, Valeo made.
 Provided with filling access on the right side
of the coach.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
One all stainless steel exhaust aftertreatment
system including:
 Catalylic converter to reduce NOx.
 FleetGuard assembly made of a DOC (Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst and a DPF (Diesel
Particulate Filter). Noise, vibration and heat
insulated. This assembly is mounted to the
bus structure and is accessible through an
exterior access door.
 Tail pipe diffuser and rain deviation device.
 3 speed fan clutch engine ECU controlled.
 Exhaust pipe with Insulation and a flexible
section.
 Rubber insulated from the body.
 Exhaust to rear left hand top of rear cap.
 Expansion tank above radiator and remote
mounted.
 Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank (60 liters) and
injection system.
 System pressure 14 psi.
 185o F thermostat.
 System capacity 24 us gal.
 Coolant filter.
 Radiator fan: 38 inches fan belt and drive
shaft driven.
FUEL SYSTEM
Polyethylene 208 US gallons/787 liters fuel tank
centrally located.
Equipped with:
 Anti-spill device.
 Safety filler cap on right side of coach.
 Pressure relief valve.
 Electric fuel gauge.
HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
Two air conditioning systems are available: the
large capacity (central) A/C and an optional
auxiliary A/C. The large capacity A/C provides
adequate capacity of conditioned and filtered air
for all climatic conditions. Fresh air is drawn into
the system from the left (driver’s) side of the
vehicle. Return air is taken from the middle of
the vehicle. The driver’s heater and defogger
are controlled separately from the central unit.
An air mixture selector enables air to be drawn
into the system from outside the vehicle or
recirculated. The optional auxiliary A/C is used
to cool air delivered from registers in the
passenger overhead compartments.
AUXILIARY A/C
Air conditioning
capacity
2 tons
172
Technical Information
AUXILIARY A/C
Refrigerant type
Air flow
450 cfm (12,7 m3/min)
COMPRESSOR (for auxiliary A/C)
Number of cylinders
7
Operating speed
700 to 6 000 rpm
Oil capacity
6 U.S. oz. (0,18 l)
Approved oil
SP-20 (PAG)
CENTRAL A/C
Air conditioning
capacity
9 tons
Refrigerant type
134A
Heating capacity
152 000 Btu/h
Air flow
CAUTION
134A
CJ-4 contains less than 1% ash which is key
to achieving maximum diesel particulate filter
cleaning intervals. Use of high ash engine oils
will reduce the cleaning interval on the Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF). DPF regenerates the
combustible soot, but the ash (a product of the
oil lubricant package) slowly accumulates in
the channels of the DPF.
ALLISON TRANSMISSION
Allison Transmission recommends the following
fluids:
o
Castrol
TranSynd™
or
specification equivalent fluid;
TES-295
o
Dexron-III® automatic transmission fluid or
TES-389 specification equivalent fluid.
2 600 cfm (73,6 m3/min)
I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION
COMPRESSOR (for central A/C)
Number of cylinders
Operating speed
6
400 to 2 200 rpm
(2,600 rpm, intermittent)
Minimum speed for
lubrication
400 rpm
Oil capacity
4.5 U.S. qts (4,3 l)
Approved oil
Castrol SW-68 (POE)
NOTE
The above oils are suitable for use with
reciprocating compressors using refrigerant
R-134a and with evaporator temperatures
above -40°F (-40°C).
The I-Shift transmission must be filled with
Castrol Syntrans grade 75W-85 oil.
DIFFERENTIAL
Multigrade gear oil meeting MIL-PRF-2105E:
85W140 is recommended for use in drive axle.
This lubricant performs well over a broad
temperature range, providing good gear and
bearing protection in a variety of climates. If
temperature drops below 10°F (-12°C), 80W90
should be used, and below -15°F (-26°C),
75W90 should be used. In extreme conditions or
for better performance, full synthetic gear oil
should be used.
FAN RIGHT ANGLE GEARBOX
Use only synthetic gear lubricant SAE 75W-90.
OIL SPECIFICATIONS
POWER STEERING RESERVOIR
ENGINE
Use SAE 15W-40 meeting API classification
CJ-4 is required in 2007 and later diesel
engines.
The Volvo D13 engine oil specification is
designated EO-O Premium Plus (or VDS-4).
EO-O Premium Plus oils exceed the new API
service category CJ-4.
Use Automatic Transmission Fluid
Dexron-IIE or Dexron-III for this system.
(ATF)
PRE-HEATING SYSTEM
Depending on options chosen, a coolant heater
may be installed on the coolant circuit. The
heater can be used as a pre-heater or as an
auxiliary heat source.
Technical Information
173
Only the Spheros 104,000 Btu preheater is
available. The heater is controlled by a
programmable timer. See Other Features
chapter for information on how to use the timer.
SPHEROS
Model
Thermo 300
104,000 Btu/hr
(30 kW)
Heating output
Fuel type
Same as engine
4.8 US qts/hr
(4.5 l/hr)
Fuel consumption
Rated voltage
00040
24 V DC
Operating voltage
20-28 V DC
Electric power consumption
without water pump
110 watts
Dimensions
(L)
24.01 (610 mm)
Inch (mm)
(W)
9.69 (246 mm)
(H)
8.66 (220 mm)
Weight
I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION
lb (kg)
41.88 (19)
PLATES AND CERTIFICATION
The main components of the vehicle such as
engine, transmission, axles and chassis are
identified by different serial numbers. It may be
necessary to locate these numbers for warranty
purposes.
VOLVO D13 ENGINE DATA PLATE
00052
The engine data plate is located on the rocker
cover. The engine serial and model number and
a list of the optional engine equipment are
written on this plate. Refer to this information
when ordering replacement parts. Also the
engine data plate certifies that the engine
conforms to federal and any state exhaust
emissions regulations.
ALLISON TRANSMISSION
DRIVE AXLE
00007
I-BEAM FRONT AXLE
00008
07076
174
Technical Information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN)
INDEPENDENT FRONT SUSPENSION
16136
SAFETY CERTIFICATION

Vehicle components meet specifications and
standards as follows:

Material and parts conform to ASTM and/or
SAE standards in effect at the time of
manufacture.

All factory-installed interior materials meet
FMVSS 302 for fire resistance.

Certified according to Provincial, State and
Federal Safety standards (Canadian and
US) BMCSS, FMVSS and CMVSS.

Other applicable certification labels are
affixed to the component.
DOT CERTIFICATION PLATE
This certifies that vehicles manufactured by
Prevost Car Inc. comply with all Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards at the time of
manufacture. Information such as date of
manufacture, model year, gross vehicle weight
rating, tire types and inflation pressure is also
etched on this plate. The DOT Certification plate
is affixed to L.H. control panel.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
00044
The Vehicle Identification Number is stamped on
a plate located on the windshield frame pillar
(driver's side). The VIN is visible from the
outside of the vehicle. Make sure the correct
vehicle identification number is given when
ordering replacement parts. Using the VIN when
ordering parts will facilitate processing.
NOTE
Record the VIN in the vehicle documentation
and keep with company records. The VIN will
normally be used for vehicle registration,
service reference needs and for obtaining
vehicle insurance coverage.
COACH FINAL RECORD
The Coach Final Record is a record of all data
pertaining to the assembly of the vehicle. This
record is shipped to the new customer via a
courier company. Retain this record in the
company records office for reference and safekeeping.
DOT CERTIFICATION PLATE
00016
Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
ABS
A/C
AFSS
ATC
Antilock Brake System / Système de freinage antiblocage
Air Conditioning / Air climatisé
Automatic Fire Suppression System / Système automatique de détection et d’extinction des incendies
Automatic Traction Control (Bendix) / Système d’antidérapage automatique
CECM
CVC
Chassis Electronic Control Module
Chauffage, Ventilation et Climatisation / heating, ventilation and air conditioning HVAC
DCDL
DDR
DEF
DEL
DID
D-MIC
DPF
DTC
DUFS
Driver Controlled Differential Lock / Verrouillage du différentiel
Diagnostic Data Reader
Diesel Exhaust Fluid / Fluide d’échappement diesel FED
Diode Électroluminescente / Light Emitting Diode LED
Driver Information Display / Écran d’affichage du panneau des instruments
Driver Microphone / Microphone du conducteur
Diesel Particulate Filter / Filtre à particules
Diagnostic Troubleshooting Code / Code d’anomalie
Diesel Ultra Faible en Soufre / Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel ULSD
ECM
ECU
EECU
EGR
ESC
ESC
ESP
E+
Electronic Control Module / Unité de commande électronique
Electronic Control Unit / Unité de commande électronique
Engine Electronic Control Unit / Unité de commande électronique du moteur
Exhaust Gas Recirculation / Recirculation des gaz d’échappement
Electronic Stability Control / Dispositif électronique de contrôle de la stabilité
Escape / Échap
Electronic Stability Program (Bendix) / Dispositif électronique de contrôle de la stabilité
Eco-Roll
FAP
FDA
FED
Filtre À Particules / Diesel Particulate Filter DPF
Following Distance Alert / Alerte de distance
Fluide d’Échappement Diesel / Diesel exhaust fluid DEF
GECU
G-MIC
Gear selector Electronic Control Unit / Unité de commande électronique du sélecteur de vitesses
Guide Microphone / Microphone du guide
HVAC
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning / Chauffage, Ventilation et Climatisation CVC
IA
IFS
Impact Alert / Alerte de collision
Independent Front Suspension / suspension avant indépendante
LED
Light Emitting Diode / diode électroluminescente DEL
MPH
Miles Per Hour / Milles à l’heure
PPT
PTO
Premium Tech Tool
Power Take Off / Prise de pouvoir
SCR
Selective Catalytic Reduction / Réduction catalytique sélective
TCM
TCS
TECU
TPMS
TWS
Transmission Control Module / Module de commande de la transmission
Traction Control System / Dispositif d’antipatinage
Transmission Electronic Control Unit / Unité de commande électronique de la transmission
Tire Pressure Monitoring System / Système de surveillance de la pression des pneus
Threshold Warning System / Système avertisseur du seuil de porte
ULSD
Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel / Diesel Ultra Faible en Soufre DUFS
VCADS
VEB
VECF
VECR
VECU
VSS
Outil informatisé de diagnostic
Volvo Engine Brake / Frein moteur Volvo
Vehicle Electrical Center Front
Vehicle Electrical Center Rear
Vehicle Electronic Control Unit / Unité de commande électronique du véhicule
Video and Sound Selector / Sélecteur audio-vidéo
WCL
Wheelchair Lift / Système d’élévation de fauteuils roulants
175
Appendix A – Service Literature
177
SERVICE LITERATURE........................................................................................................................... 178
NOTICE..................................................................................................................................................... 179
DECLARATION OF THE MANUFACTURING DEFECTS TO THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED
STATES ............................................................................................................................................... 179
DECLARATION OF THE MANUFACTURING DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT ..... 179
DECLARATION OF THE MANUFACTURING DEFECTS TO PREVOST .......................................... 179
178
Appendix A – Service Literature
SERVICE LITERATURE
Visit our web sit at www.prevostcar.com for on-line product information and technical publications!
Additional copies of the following service literature are available on request and at low cost. These can be
helpful to mechanics and drivers alike.
*
Maintenance Manual
*
Operator's Manual
*
Parts Manual
*
Service Center Directory
To order, call Prevost Parts toll free 1-800-463-8876 or write to:
PREVOST PARTS INC.
2955-A Watt Street
Sainte-Foy, (Quebec)
Canada G1X 3W1
Specify the complete vehicle serial number. Allow 30 days for delivery
Appendix A – Service Literature
179
NOTICE
DECLARATION OF THE MANUFACTURING DEFECTS TO THE GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED
STATES
If you believe that your vehicle has defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Prevost.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Prevost
Car Inc.
To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA
U.S. Department of transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
DECLARATION OF THE MANUFACTURING DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and if you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Prevost. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2
DECLARATION OF THE MANUFACTURING DEFECTS TO PREVOST.
In addition to notify the NHTSA (or Transport Canada), please contact Prevost at 1-418-831-2046. Or you
may write to:
Prevost
After-sales service department
850 Olivier Road,
Saint-Nicolas (Quebec)
Canada, G7A 2N1
Appendix B – Troubleshooting Guide for Multiplex Vehicles
181
Troubleshooting
Problem/Symptom
Vehicle does not Start
Probable Causes
Rear Start selector switch is
not in the NORMAL position
Master cut-out switch on the
rear electrical panel is in the
OFF position (down)
Actions
1. Check that the rear start selector
switch is flipped up to NORMAL start
position and master cut-out switch is
flipped up to ON and retry cranking
2. Flip the rear start selector switch to
“Rear Start” and start the vehicle from
the rear
If the vehicle does not start from the rear:
CAN
network
(Multiplex)
problem
1. Verify that module A53 is powered:
a) Check the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
menu of the Driver Information
Display (DID). Select FAULT
DIAGNOSTIC and ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM. The message “No
Response
ModA53,
Active”,
indicates a power problem on the
module or a CAN network problem.
Module A53 not powered or
is defective
Engine ECM does not
receive the ignition signal
b) Check / reset circuit breaker CB5
c) Check / replace fuse F65
d) Probe gray connector on module to
see if it is powered.
Engine ECM is not powered
2. Verify that the engine ECM is
powered and get the ignition signal
a) Check / reset circuit breaker CB8
Check / replace fuse F74
b) Check / reset circuit breaker CB2
Check / replace fuse F78
None of the Multiplexed
functions are operating,
including the basic limphome functions (door
opening, flashers, wipers
in speed 1)
Three dashes “---“ appear
in the telltale panel
instead of the outside
temperature
Note: The sunshades are
still
functioning
since
these are not multiplexed
The program version in the
CECM is different than the
program in the I/O modules
and the CECM is forcing all
I/O modules to stay inactive
1. Engage the auto-programming of the
I/O modules: Turn the ignition key to
the OFF position, flip the master cutout switch on the rear electrical panel
to OFF and ON and then turn the
ignition key ON. The letters CAN will
appear in the telltale LCD panel for
about 3 minutes Everything shall get
back to normal once the letters CAN
are replaced with outside temperature
display
2. Try
disconnecting
connector on the
reconnect
3.
the
green
CECM and
If step 1 and 2 are ineffective, try
disconnecting the Master ID module
completely and repeat step 1
182
Appendix B – Troubleshooting Guide for Multiplex Vehicles
Problem/Symptom
Probable Causes
Actions
4. Try
disconnecting
the
CECM
completely, leave it disconnected and
see if the limp-home functions (start
of the vehicle from the engine
compartment, wipers speed 1,
flashers, etc ) are functioning
Many secondary functions
(not essential for driving)
not functioning (interior
lighting,
driver's
area
lighting, wiper speed 2
and intermittent).
Outside
temperature
display in the telltale LCD
panel
displays
three
dashes "---"
The CECM module does not
receive 24 V power.
1. Check / reset circuit breaker CB6 (3rd
from the left on the junction panel)
Check / replace fuse F1
The CAN network is not
working. It could be caused
by a short on the network, an
open circuit, a problem with
the CECM or the CECM
being disconnected from the
network.
2. Operate in limp-home mode by
starting the vehicle from the engine
compartment (REAR START). All
functions essential to drive are
available
Problem
with
the
temperature sensor located
in
the
evaporator
compartment air intake or the
sensor wiring
Instruct the driver to manually control the
temperature by playing with the
passenger set point. Set above 22°C
(72°F) to heat and below 22° C (72°F) to
cool
Module A47 is not powered
or is faulty
1. Check the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
menu of the Driver Information
Display
(DID).
Select
FAULT
DIAGNOSTIC and ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM.
The
message
“No
Response ModA47, Active” indicates
a power problem on the module. (A
CAN network problem would show
the same message but doesn't
produce these symptoms).
Marker
lights
and
clearance
lights
are
turned ON when setting
ignition
to
the
ON
position.
No temperature control in
the passenger area
Passenger temperature
display indicates two
dashes "--"
Entrance door does not
open nor close using the
control buttons
Defroster
functioning
fan
not
Windshield wipers not
functioning in speed 1 or
intermittent
To close and lock the door, pull the door
manually up to its closed position and it
will lock by itself. The door opening button
is still functioning
2. Check / reset circuit breaker CB6
3. Check / replace fuse F5
4. Probe gray connector on module to
see if it is powered.
5. Use the air release valves near the
entrance door and in the front service
compartment to lock / unlock the door
Windshield wipers not
functioning in speed 1 or
intermittent
No power on R23
Check / replace fuse F82
Appendix B - Troubleshooting Guide for Multiplex Vehicles
183
Problem/Symptom
Probable Causes
HVAC condenser fans not
functioning in speed 1
Circuit breaker CB7 was
manually tripped and not
reset
Check / reset circuit breaker CB7
HVAC condenser fans not
functioning in speed 2
Circuit breaker CB7 was
manually tripped and not
reset
Check / reset circuit breaker CB7
Windshield
functioning
Module A46 is not powered
or is faulty
1. Check the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
menu of Driver Information Display
(DID). Select FAULT DIAGNOSTIC
and ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The
message “No Response ModA46,
Active” indicates a power problem on
the module. (A CAN network problem
would show the same message but
doesn't produce these symptoms).
washer
not
Windshield upper section
de-icing
system
not
functioning
Defroster
fan
is
functioning but no heat or
cooling available in the
driver area.
Actions
2. Check / reset circuit breaker CB1
3. Check / replace fuse F12 or F13
4. Probe gray connector on module to
see if it is powered.
Low beam headlights and
front flasher on left side
not functioning
Module A45 is not powered
or is faulty
Electric horn not
functioning
1. Check the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
menu of Driver Information Display
(DID). Select FAULT DIAGNOSTIC
and ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The
message “No Response ModA45,
Active” indicates a power problem on
the module. (A CAN network problem
would show the same message but
doesn't produce these symptoms).
2. Check / reset circuit breaker CB2
3. Check / replace fuse F33 and F34
4. Probe gray connector on module to
see if it is powered.
Low beam headlights and
flasher on right side not
functioning
Module A48 is not powered
or is faulty
1. Check the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
menu of Driver Information Display
(DID). Select FAULT DIAGNOSTIC
and ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The
message “No Response ModA48,
Active” indicates a power problem on
the module. (A CAN network problem
would show the same message but
doesn't produce these symptoms).
2. Check / reset circuit breaker CB2
3. Check / replace fuse F33 and F34
4. Probe gray connector on module to
see if it is powered.
184
Appendix B – Troubleshooting Guide for Multiplex Vehicles
Problem/Symptom
Rear flashers not
functioning
Probable Causes
Module A51 is not powered
or is faulty
Stoplights and center
stoplights not functioning
Actions
1. Check the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
menu of Driver Information Display
(DID). Select FAULT DIAGNOSTIC
and ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The
message “No Response ModA51,
Active” indicates a power problem on
the module. (A CAN network problem
would show the same message but
doesn't produce this symptom).
2. Check / reset circuit breaker CB2
3. Check / replace fuse F80
4. Probe gray connector on module to
see if it is powered.
Engine is overheating and
radiator fan clutch does
not engage
Module A52 is not powered
or is faulty
The A/C compressor
clutch does not engage
1. Check the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
menu of Driver Information Display
(DID). Select FAULT DIAGNOSTIC
and ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The
message “No Response ModA52,
Active” indicates a power problem on
the module. (A CAN network problem
would show the same message but
doesn't produce this symptom).
2. Check / reset circuit breaker CB5
3. Check / replace fuse F65
4. Probe gray connector on module to
see if it is powered.
Evaporator fan not
functioning
Circuit breaker CB3 tripped
1. Check / reset circuit breaker CB3
Module A54 is not powered
or is faulty
2. Check the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
menu of Driver Information Display
(DID). Select FAULT DIAGNOSTIC
and ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The
message “No Response ModA54,
Active” indicates a power problem on
the module. (A CAN network problem
would show the same message but
doesn't produce this symptom).
3. Check / reset circuit breaker CB5
4. Check / replace fuse F67 , F68
5. Probe gray connector on module to
see if it is powered.
HVAC condenser fans not
functioning in speed 1
Module A54 is not powered
or is faulty
1. Check the SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
menu of Driver Information Display
(DID). Select FAULT DIAGNOSTIC
and ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The
message “No Response ModA54,
Appendix B - Troubleshooting Guide for Multiplex Vehicles
Problem/Symptom
Probable Causes
185
Actions
Active” indicates a power problem on
the module. (A CAN network problem
would show the same message but
doesn't produce this symptom).
2. Check / reset circuit breaker CB5
3. Check / replace fuse F67 , F68
4. Probe gray connector on module to
see if it is powered.
Sound system not
functioning
Circuit breaker CB4 or CB11
was manually tripped and not
reset
Check / reset circuit breaker CB4 or CB11
Fire alarm telltale light
and audible alarm always
ON and there is no fire or
high temperature in the
engine compartment
Short-circuited fire sensor or
defective sensor
Prior to start the vehicle, cycle the ignition
key to the ON position, OFF position and
then ON position again and then start the
vehicle. This will deactivate the fire alarm
function. This has to be repeated each
time the vehicle is re-started
The vehicle is parked and
the electrical horn is activated to indicate a fire in
the engine compartment
but there is no fire
Short-circuited fire sensor or
defective sensor
Cycle the ignition key between the ON
and OFF position twice within 3 seconds.
This will deactivate the fire alarm function.
This has to be repeated each time the
vehicle is parked
A single light, a group of
LED lights or another
function of the vehicle is
not functioning
The multiplex outputs are
protected in current by an
internal “soft-fuse”. When an
output is shorted, it turns
OFF and stays OFF until the
"soft-fuse" is reset
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position
and turn to the ON position again. This
resets all "soft –fuses"
No backlighting in the
instrument cluster
Circuit breaker CB10
tripped or fuse F20 blown
Check / reset circuit breaker CB10
The radiator fan clutch
does not function and the
engine is overheating
is
Check / replace fuse F20
1.
Set the ignition key to the ON
position.
2.
Activate the dashboard Telltale Light
Test switch 3 times within 4 seconds.
3.
In the engine compartment, set the
starter selector switch to REAR
START and then start the engine
from the rear.
While in this mode, the rear start pushbutton can be used to manually engage
the fan clutch. The Multiplex system
knows when the engine is already
running, and it will not activate the starter.
186
Appendix B – Troubleshooting Guide for Multiplex Vehicles
Problem/Symptom
Probable Causes
Actions
4.
Press the push-button one time to
engage the clutch in 1st speed, press
a second time to engage in 2nd
speed, press a third time to stop the
fan, press once again to return to 1st
speed.
If the fan clutch does not engage using
this procedure then the clutch is faulty or
the wiring between the multiplex module
and the clutch is faulty. Mechanically lock
the fan clutch as described in section 05:
COOLING SYSTEM of the maintenance
manual.
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes 187
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES (DTC) - ALLISON 4TH GENERATION CONTROLS ..... 188
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES (DTC) OVERVIEW .....................................................................188
TH
DIAGNOSTIC CODES – ALLISON 4
GENERATION CONTROLS...................................................................188
DIAGNOSTIC CODE DISPLAY AND CLEARING PROCEDURE - ALLISON 4TH GENERATION CONTROLS .. 189
DIAGNOSTIC CODE RESPONSE ....................................................................................................................... 190
ALLISON TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES (DTC) AND DESCRIPTIONS ......... 191
ALLISON TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL CHECK USING THE PUSH-BUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR ................... 195
EXITINGTHE FLUID LEVEL DISPLAY MODE..................................................................................................... 195
CONTROL SYSTEM PROGNOSTICS..................................................................................................... 196
OIL LIFE MONITOR ............................................................................................................................................. 196
FILTER LIFE MONITOR....................................................................................................................................... 196
TRANSMISSION HEALTH MONITOR ................................................................................................................. 197
188
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES (DTC) — ALLISON 4TH GENERATION
CONTROLS
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES (DTC) OVERVIEW
Diagnostic codes (DTC) are numerical indications relating to a malfunction in transmission operation.
These codes are logged in a list in the TCM memory with the most severe or most recent code listed first.
A maximum of five codes (numbered d1 to d5) may be listed in memory at one time. As codes are added,
the oldest inactive code is dropped from the list. If all codes are active, the code with the lowest priority
that is not included on the severity list is dropped from the list.
Diagnostic codes (DTC) and code information may be accessed through the pushbutton shift selector or
using an Allison DOC™ diagnostic tool.
The TCM separately stores the active and inactive codes. An active code is any code that is current in the
TCM decision-making process. Inactive codes are codes that are retained in the TCM memory and will
not necessary affect the TCM decision-making process. Inactive codes are useful in determining if a
problem is:
• Isolated ;
• Intermittent ;
• Result from a previous malfunction.
The TCM may automatically delete a code from memory if it has not recurred. If the
condition which generated the code is active, the LED indicator on the selector will be
illuminated simultaneously with the display of the code. If the condition which generated
the code no longer exists, the LED is not illuminated and the code is maintained only as a
historical record of the prior condition. An illuminated MODE INDICATOR (LED) during
normal operation signifies secondary shift mode operation.
DIAGNOSTIC CODES – ALLISON 4TH GENERATION CONTROLS
When the diagnostic mode is entered, the first code (position d1) is displayed as follows:
Exemple: Code P0722
Displayed as: d1…P…07…22
The code list position is the first item displayed, followed by the DTC. Each item is displayed for about
one second. The display cycles continuously until the next code list position is accessed by pressing the
MODE button. The following example shows how DTC P0722 is displayed on the pushbutton shift
selector.
1
P
0
7
2
2
MONITOR
SELECT
d
•
d1 (code list position) – The position which a
code occupies in the list. Positions are
displayed as « d1 » through « d5 » (code list
position 1 through code list position 5).
•
P0722 (DTC) – The diagnostic troubleshooting
code number referring to the general condition
or area of fault detected by the TCM.
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
189
DIAGNOSTIC CODE DISPLAY AND CLEARING PROCEDURE – ALLISON 4TH GENERATION
CONTROLS
Diagnostic codes can be read and cleared by two methods:
o Using an Allison DOC™ diagnostic tool. For specific instructions on how to use an Allison DOC™
diagnostic tool, refer to the User Guide.
o Using the pushbutton shift selector.
To begin the diagnostic process:
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop at a safe location.
2. Apply the parking brake.
To display stored codes:
1. Simultaneously press the
Display Mode.
(Up) and
(Down) arrow buttons five times to access the Diagnostic
NOTE
To access the Oil Level Display Mode, simultaneously press the
(Up) and
(Down) arrow buttons
once. Consult paragraph: « ALLISON TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL CHECK USING THE
PUSHBUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR » at the end of this section.
2. Observe the digital display for code (d1).
3. Press the MODE button to see the next code (d2) – repeat for subsequent codes (d3, d4 & d5).
NOTE
Be sure to record all codes displayed before they are cleared. This is essential for troubleshooting.
NOTE
The Diagnostic Display Mode can be entered for viewing codes at any speed. Codes can only be
cleared when the output speed = 0 and no output speed sensor failure is active
Active indicators (MODE INDICATOR LED) and inactive codes can be cleared manually, while in the
diagnostic display mode, after the condition causing the code is identified.
To clear active indicators and inactive codes:
1. While in Diagnostic Display Mode, press and hold the MODE button for 10 seconds to clear both
active indicators and inactive codes.
2. Begin operating as normal. Have the transmission checked at the earliest opportunity by an Allison
Transmission distributor or dealer.
NOTE
All active indicators are cleared at TCM power down.
Some codes will clear their active indicator when the condition causing the code is no longer detected
by the TCM.
190
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
The Diagnostic Display Mode can be exited by any of the following methods:
o Press simultaneously the
shift selector.
(Up) and
(Down) arrow buttons at the same time on the pushbutton
o Press any range button «D», «N» or «R» on the pushbutton shift selector (the shift will be commanded
if it is not inhibited by an active code).
o Wait until the calibrated time (approximately 10 minutes) has passed. The system will automatically
return to the normal operating mode.
o Turn off power to the TCM (shut off the engine using the ignition key).
NOTE
If clearing a code while locked in a «D» (Drive) or «R» (Reverse) position (fail-to-range), the
transmission will still be in «D» (Drive) or «R» (Reverse) when the clearing procedure is completed.
«N» (Neutral) must be manually selected.
DIAGNOSTIC CODE RESPONSE
The following responses are used in the "Diagnostic Troubleshooting Code List and Inhibited Operation
Description" table to command safe operation when diagnostic codes are sent.
DNS - Do Not Shift Response
Release lock up clutch and inhibit lock up operation.
Inhibit all shifts.
Turn ON the CHECK TRANS light.
Display the range attained.
Ignore any range selection inputs from the shift selector.
DNA - Do Not Adapt Response
The TCM stops adaptive shift control while the code is active.
SOL OFF - SOLenoid OFF Response
All solenoids are commanded OFF (turning solenoids “A” and “B” off electrically cause them to be on
hydraulically).
RPR - Return to Previous Range Response
When the speed sensor ratio or C3 pressure switch test associated with a shift not successful, the TCM
commands the same range as commanded before the shift.
NNC - Neutral No Clutches Response
When certain speed sensor ratio or C3 pressure switch tests are not successful, the TCM commands a
neutral condition with no clutches applied.
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
191
ALLISON TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES (DTC) AND DESCRIPTIONS
CHECK
Inhibited Operation
DTC
Description
TRANS
Description
Light
C1312
Retarder Request Sensor Failed Low
No
May inhibit retarder operation if not
using J1939 datalink
C1313
Retarder Request Sensor Failed High
No
May inhibit retarder operation if not
using J1939 datalink
P0122
Pedal Position Sensor Low Voltage
No
Use default throttle values. Freezes
shift adapts.
P0123
Pedal Position Sensor High Voltage
No
Use default throttle values. Freezes
shift adapts.
P0218
Transmission Fluid Over Temperature
No
Use hot mode shift schedule. Holds
fourth range. TCC is inhibited.
Freezes shift adapts.
P0561
System Voltage Performance
P0562
System Voltage Low
P0563
System Voltage High
P0602
TCM Not Programmed
Yes
Lock in Neutral
P0610
TCM Vehicle Options (Trans ID) Error
Yes
Use TID A calibration
P0613
TCM Processor
No
All solenoids off
P0614
Torque Control Data Mismatch - ECM/TCM
Yes
Allows operation only in reverse and
second range.
P0634
TCM Internal Temperature Too High
Yes
SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P063E
Auto Configuration Throttle Input Not Present
Yes
Use default throttle values
P063F
Auto Configuration Engine Coolant Temp Input Not
Present
No
None
P0658
Actuator Supply Voltage 1 (HSD1) Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0659
Actuator Supply Voltage 1 (HSD1) High
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0667
TCM Internal Temperature Sensor Circuit Range /
Perform
Yes
Use TID A calibration
P0668
TCM Internal Temperature Sensor Circuit Low
P0669
TCM Internal Temperature Sensor Circuit High
P0701
Transmission Control System Performance
P0702
Transmission Control System Electrical (TransID)
P0703
Brake Switch Circuit Malfunction
No
No Neutral to Drive shifts for refuse
packer. TCM inhibits retarder
operation if a TPS code is also
active.
P0708
Transmission Range Sensor Circuit High Input
Yes
Ignore defective strip selector inputs
P070C Transmission Fluid Level Sensor Circuit – Low Input
No
None
P070D Transmission Fluid Level Sensor Circuit – High Input
No
None
P0711
Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit
Performance
Yes
Use default sump temp
P0712
Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Low Input
Yes
Use default sump temp
P0713
Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit High Input
Yes
Use default sump temp
P0716
Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit Performance
Yes
DNS, Lock in current range
P0717
Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal
Yes
DNS, Lock in current range
P071A
RELS Input Failed On
Yes
Inhibit RELS operation
Yes
None
P071D General Purpose Input Fault
192
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
DTC
Description
CHECK
TRANS
Light
Inhibited Operation
Description
P0720
Output Speed Sensor Circuit
P0721
Output Speed Sensor Circuit Performance
Yes
P0722
Output Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal
Yes
DNS, Lock in current range
P0726
Engine Speed Sensor Circuit Performance
No
Default to turbine speed
P0727
Engine Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal
No
Default to turbine speed
Yes
DNS, Attempt 5th, then 3rd
th
DNS, Lock in current range
P0729
Incorrect 6 Gear Ratio
P0730
Incorrect Neutral Gear ratio
P0731
Incorrect 1st Gear ratio
Yes
DNS, Attempt 2nd, then 5th
P0732
Incorrect 2nd Gear ratio
Yes
DNS, Attempt 3rd, then 5th
P0733
Incorrect 3rd Gear ratio
Yes
DNS, Attempt 4th, then 6th
P0734
th
Incorrect 4 Gear ratio
Yes
DNS, Attempt 5th, then 3rd
P0735
Incorrect 5th Gear ratio
Yes
DNS, Attempt 6th, then 3rd, then 2nd
P0736
Incorrect Reverse Gear ratio
Yes
DNS, Lock in Neutral
P0741
Torque Converter Clutch System Stuck Off
Yes
None
P0776
Pressure Control Solenoid 2 Stuck Off
Yes
DNS, RPR
P0777
Pressure Control Solenoid 2 Stuck On
Yes
DNS, RPR
P0796
Pressure Control Solenoid 3 Stuck Off
Yes
DNS, RPR
P0797
Pressure Control Solenoid 3 Stuck On
Yes
DNS, RPR
P0842
Transmission Pressure Switch 1 Circuit Low
Yes
DNS, Lock in current range
P0843
Transmission Pressure Switch 1 Circuit High
Yes
DNS, Lock in current range
P0847
Transmission Pressure Switch 2 Circuit Low
P0848
Transmission Pressure Switch 2 Circuit High
P088A
Transmission Fluid Filter Deteriorated
P088B
Transmission Fluid Filter Very Deteriorated
P0880
TCM Power Input Signal
No
None
P0881
TCM Power Input Signal Performance
No
None
P0882
TCM Power Input Signal Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0883
TCM Power Input Signal High
No
None
P0894
Transmission Component Slipping
Yes
DNS, Lock in first
P0960
Pressure Control Solenoid Main Mod Control Circuit Open
Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) MM System
Performance
Pressure Control Solenoid Main Mod Control Circuit Low
Yes
None
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0963
Pressure Control Solenoid Main Mod Control Circuit High
Yes
None
P0964
Pressure Control Solenoid 2 (PCS2) Control Circuit Open
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0965
Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) 2 System Performance
P0966
Pressure Control Solenoid 2 (PCS2) Control Circuit Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0967
Pressure Control Solenoid 2 (PCS2) Control Circuit High
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0968
Pressure Control Solenoid 3 (PCS3) Control Circuit Open
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0969
Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) 3 System Performance
P0970
Pressure Control Solenoid 3 (PCS3) Control Circuit Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0971
Pressure Control Solenoid 3 (PCS3) Control Circuit High
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0973
Shift Solenoid 1 (SS1) Control Circuit Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0974
Shift Solenoid 1 (SS1) Control Circuit High
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P0961
P0962
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
DTC
Description
CHECK
TRANS
Light
193
Inhibited Operation
Description
P0975
Shift Solenoid 2 (SS2) Control Circuit Open
Yes
7-speed: Allow 2 through 6, N, R
P0976
Shift Solenoid 2 (SS2) Control Circuit Low
Yes
7-speed: Allow 2 through 6, N, R
Inhibit TCC operation
P0977
Shift Solenoid 2 (SS2) Control Circuit High
Yes
7-speed: Allow 2 through 6, N, R
P0989
Retarder Pressure Sensor Failed Low
No
None
P0990
Retarder Pressure Sensor Failed High
No
None
P1739
Incorrect Low Gear Ratio
Yes
nd
Command 2 and allow shifts 2
through 6, N, R
P1891
Throttle Position Sensor PWM Signal Low Input
No
Use default throttle values
P1892
Throttle Position Sensor PWM Signal High Input
No
Use default throttle values
P2184
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit Low Input
No
Use default engine coolant values
P2185
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit High Input
No
Use default engine coolant values
P2637
Torque Management Feedback Signal (SEM)
Yes
Inhibit SEM
P2641
Torque Management Feedback Signal (LRTP)
Yes
Inhibit LRTP
P2670
Actuator Supply Voltage 2 (HSD2) Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2671
Actuator Supply Voltage 2 (HSD2) High
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2685
Actuator Supply Voltage 3 (HSD3) Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2686
Actuator Supply Voltage 3 (HSD3) High
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2714
Pressure Control Solenoid 4 (PCS4) Stuck Off
Yes
DNS, RPR
P2715
Pressure Control Solenoid 4 (PCS4) Stuck On
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2718
Pressure Control Solenoid 4 (PCS4) Control Circuit Open
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2719
Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) 4 System Performance
P2720
Pressure Control Solenoid 4 (PCS4) Control Circuit Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2721
Pressure Control Solenoid 4 (PCS4) Control Circuit High
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2723
Pressure Control Solenoid 1 (PCS1) Stuck Off
Yes
DNS, RPR
P2724
Pressure Control Solenoid 1 (PCS1) Stuck On
Yes
DNS, RPR
P2727
Pressure Control Solenoid 1 (PCS1) Control Circuit Open
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2728
Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) 1 System Performance
P2729
Pressure Control Solenoid 1 (PCS1) Control Circuit Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2730
Pressure Control Solenoid 1 (PCS1) Control Circuit High
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2736
Pressure Control Solenoid 5 (PCS5) Control Circuit Open
Yes
Inhibit retarder operation
P2737
Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) 5 System Performance
P2738
Pressure Control Solenoid 5 (PCS5) Control Circuit Low
Yes
Allow 2 through 6, N, R. Inhibit
retarder and TCC operation
P2739
Pressure Control Solenoid 5 (PCS5) Control Circuit High
Yes
Inhibit retarder operation
P2740
Retarder Oil Temperature Hot
No
None
P2742
Retarder Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit – Low Input
No
Use default retarder temp values
P2743
Retarder Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit – High Input
No
Use default retarder temp values
P2761
TCC PCS Control Circuit Open
Yes
Inhibit TCC operation
P2762
TCC PCS Control Circuit Range / Performance
P2763
TCC PCS Control Circuit High
Yes
Inhibit TCC operation
P2764
TCC PCS Control Circuit Low
Yes
7-speed: Allow 2 through 6, N, R.
Inhibit TCC operation
P2772
Four Wheel Drive Low Switch Circuit Performance
P278A
Kickdown Input Failed ON
No
Inhibit kickdown operation
194
DTC
P2793
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
Description
Gear Shift Direction Circuit
CHECK
TRANS
Light
Yes
Inhibited Operation
Description
Ignores PWM input from shift
selector
P2808
Pressure Control Solenoid 6 (PCS6) Stuck Off
Yes
DNS, RPR
P2809
Pressure Control Solenoid 6 (PCS6) Stuck On
Yes
DNS, RPR
P2812
Pressure Control Solenoid 6 (PCS6) Control Circuit Open
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2813
Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) 6 System Performance
P2814
Pressure Control Solenoid 6 (PCS6) Control Circuit Low
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
P2815
Pressure Control Solenoid 6 (PCS6) Control Circuit High
Yes
DNS, SOL OFF (hydraulic default)
U0001
Hi Speed CAN Bus Reset Counter Overrun (IESCAN)
No
Use default values, inhibit SEM
U0010
CAN BUS Reset Counter Overrun
No
Use default values, inhibit SEM
U0100
Lost Communications with ECM/PCM (J1587)
Yes
Use default values
U0103
Lost Communication with Gear Shift Module
(Shift Selector) 1
Yes
Maintain range selected, observe
gear shift direction circuit
U0115
Lost Communication with ECM
Yes
Use default values
U0291
Lost Communication with Gear Shift Module
(Shift Selector) 2
Yes
Maintain range selected, observe
gear shift direction circuit
U0304
Incompatible Gear Shift Module 1 (Shift Selector) ID
Yes
Ignore shift selector inputs
U0333
Incompatible Gear Shift Module 2 (Shift Selector) ID
Yes
Ignore shift selector inputs
U0404
Invalid Data Received From Gear Shift Module
(Shift Selector) 1
Yes
Maintain range selected, observe
gear shift direction circuit
U0592
Invalid Data Received From Gear Shift Module
(Shift Selector) 2
Yes
Maintain range selected, observe
gear shift direction circuit
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
ALLISON
TRANSMISSION
OIL
LEVEL
CHECK USING THE PUSHBUTTON SHIFT
SELECTOR
Oil level codes are obtained as follows:
1. Park vehicle on a level surface, select «N»
(neutral) on the pushbutton shift selector
and apply parking brake.
2. Press simultaneously the
(Down) arrow buttons once.
(Up) and
3. Oil level codes are displayed in 2 minutes
(e.g. display will flash and 8, 7, 6, 5, ...;
countdown will occur during the 2 minutes)
once the following parameters are met:
o Waiting time, vehicle must be stationary
for at least 2 minutes to allow the oil to
settle;
o Engine at idle;
195
NOTE
Note that the quantities LO 4 and HI 3 are the
largest values displayed and that the actual
variation in oil level may exceed these
numbers.
NOTE
Failure to meet one of the above parameters
will stop the two minute countdown. One of
the codes shown hereafter will indicate the
cause of the countdown interruption. Once all
parameters are met, the countdown will
continue from where it left off.
If the fluid level check cannot be completed, an
Invalid for Display fault is reported. This
condition is reflected by the display of "OL",
followed by “–“, followed by one or two additional
characters. The displayed characters define the
cause of the fault, which may be either a system
malfunction or an improper condition for
conducting the check.
o Oil at normal operating temperature,
between 140°F (60°C) and 220°F (104°C);
CODE
o Transmission in «N» (Neutral);
OL…-…0X
Waiting period is not complete
o Transmission output shaft stopped;
OL…-…EL
Engine speed (rpm) too low
o Oil level sensor present and working.
OL…-…EH
Engine speed (rpm) too high
OL…-…SN
N (neutral) must be selected
OL…-…TL
Sump oil temperature too low
OL…-…TH
Sump oil temperature too
high
OL…-…SH
Output shaft rotation
OL…-…FL
Sensor failure
After 2 minutes, the display will flash one of the
codes shown below:
CODE
O L…O K
O L…L O… 1
O L…L O… 2
O L…L O… 3
O L…L O… 4
O L…H I… 1
O L…H I… 2
O L…H I… 3
O L… – (fc)
CAUSE OF CODE
Oil level is correct
Oil Level is LOw 1 quart
Oil Level is LOw 2 quart
Oil Level is LOw 3 quarts
Oil Level is LOw 4 or more
quarts
Oil Level is HIgh 1 quart
Oil Level is HIgh 2 quarts
Oil Level is HIgh 3 or more
quarts
Oil Level is invalid. Source
of invalid reading is defined
by a two-character fault
code (fc)
CAUSE OF CODE
EXITING THE FLUID LEVEL DISPLAY MODE
To exit the Oil Level Display Mode, press any
range button: «R», «N» or «D» at any time.
196
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
CONTROL SYSTEM PROGNOSTICS
The transmission control system includes the
provision for the user to monitor various
transmission
operating
parameters.
Transmission operating parameters monitored
by the prognostics feature are:
• Oil Life Monitor
• Filter Life Monitor
• Transmission Health Monitor
NOTE
The prognostics package requires the use of
TranSynd™ or an Allison approved TES-295
licensed fluid in the transmission and Allison
High Capacity filters. If any other fluids or
filters are used, Prognostic mode must be
disabled. Prognostic information will not be
accurate with any other fluids or filters and
could result in missed maintenance activities
resulting in transmission damage.
Refer to TES 295 Approved Fluids list, found
under the Service/Fluids heading on the home
page of the Allison Transmission web site.
www.allisontransmission.com
When a specified threshold is detected for any
of
the
serviceable
conditions,
the
is
TRANSMISSION SERVICE indicator
illuminated to alert the operator. Failure to attend
to the service condition and reset the
TRANSMISSION SERVICE indicator within a
defined operating period will result in illumination
of the CHECK TRANS light on the dashboard
telltale panel, indicating the increased probability
that the service condition will develop into a
more serious condition.
To access the Prognostic Mode functions,
(Up) and
(Down)
simultaneously press the
arrow buttons repeatedly. See the reference
table at the end of this section.
Display: The display is a two-digit number,
denoting percentage of the fluid life which
remains. New fluid is displayed as 99%.
The TRANSMISSION SERVICE indicator will
be illuminated, denoting a required change of
transmission fluid, when the remaining fluid life
reaches approximately 1–2 %. The indicator will
be lit steadily upon each initialization of the
TCM, and will remain on steady for
approximately 1–2 minutes after the first
selection of “D” (drive) range each time, until
service is performed and the indicator is reset.
Failure to perform maintenance and reset the
TRANSMISSION SERVICE indicator within a
defined period will result in the illumination of the
CHECK TRANS light on the dashboard telltale
panel and diagnostic code P0897 Transmission
Fluid at Limit will be set.
Reset:
The
TRANSMISSION
SERVICE
indicator can be reset by a message over the
SAE J1939 communication interface, with the
Allison DOC™ for PC diagnostic program, or by
depressing and holding the MODE button for ten
(10) seconds while the Oil Life Monitor function
is displayed. It may also be reset by selecting ND-N-D-N-R-N on the shift selector, pausing
briefly (less than 3 seconds) between each
selector movement, with the ignition on and the
engine not running.
CAUTION
Required calendar-based oil & filter change
intervals (based on month) still apply because
Oil Life Monitor function cannot measure time
while ignition power is OFF.
If the Oil Life Monitor function has not indicated
the need for a fluid change before 60 month
(five years) have passed, it will be necessary
to change the fluid and filters per calendar
requirements and reset the system.
OIL LIFE MONITOR
FILTER LIFE MONITOR
The display message denotes the calculated
remaining life of the transmission fluid. This
value is based on the established life for the
required baseline fluid, and then is continuously
adjusted for cumulative effects of such operating
parameters as operating time, retarder
operation, output shaft revolutions and shift
frequency.
The display message denotes operating status
of the transmission main fluid filter, based on the
measured pressure drop across the filter. The
feature is not functional at transmission sump
temperatures below 40 ºC (105 ºF). Both the
main and lube filters must be changed when the
shows
TRANSMISSION SERVICE indicator
the main filter should be changed.
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
Display: An acceptable filter life status is
displayed as "OK". An unacceptable filter life
status is displayed as "LO".
Once the programmed threshold for maximum
filter pressure drop has been observed and
verified,
the
diagnostic
code
P088A
Transmission Filter At/Over Limit will be
recorded to indicate that the filter has reached
the end of its designed life. At the next
initialization of the TCM, the TRANSMISSION
SERVICE indicator will flash for approximately
1–2 minutes after the first selection of “D” (drive)
range. Thereafter, the indicator will illuminate
and flash upon each TCM initialization,
continuing to flash for 1–2 minutes after the first
selection of a drive range each time, until
service is performed and the indicator is reset.
Failure to perform maintenance and reset the
monitor after a calibration-defined number of
warnings will result in the illumination of the
CHECK TRANS light on the dashboard telltale
panel and diagnostic code P088B will be
recorded to indicate a highly deteriorated filter.
Reset: The feature will reset automatically when
the main fluid filter has been changed and the
pressure drop across the filter no longer
exceeds the threshold value. A manual reset
can be performed by depressing and holding the
MODE button for ten (10) seconds while the
Filter Life Monitor function is displayed. It may
also be reset by selecting N-R-N-R-N-D-N on
the shift selector, pausing briefly (less than 3
seconds) between each selector movement,
with the ignition on and the engine not running.
TRANSMISSION HEALTH MONITOR
The display message denotes clutch life status,
as determined by monitored changes and the
calculated running clearance of the transmission
clutches C1, C2, C3, C4 & C5.
Display: An acceptable clutch life status is
displayed as "OK". An unacceptable clutch life
status is displayed as "LO". The specific
clutch(es) for which the function indicates "LO"
cannot be identified with the shift selector.
TM
for PC-Service Tool displays
Allison DOC
clutch condition as OK or NOT OK for each
clutch, C1 through C5.
197
The TRANSMISSION SERVICE indicator will be
illuminated, indicating the need for clutch
maintenance, when the remaining clutch life
reaches approximately 10%, or if the running
clearance exceeds a maximum value which may
indicate a non-wear-related issue. Thereafter,
the indicator will be lit upon each initialization of
the TCM, and will remain on steady during all
vehicle operation until service is performed and
the indicator is reset.
Failure to perform maintenance and reset the
monitor after a number of warnings will result in
the illumination of the CHECK TRANS light on
the dashboard telltale panel and diagnostic code
P2789 Clutch Adaptive learning at Limit will be
set.
Reset: The feature will reset automatically upon
elimination of the clutch clearance condition
which initiated it. The indicator can also be
manually reset using the Allison DOC™ for PC
diagnostics program if necessary.
Appendix C – Allison Diagnostic Troubleshooting Codes
198
Description
SELECT
MONITOR
"-"
"-"
"O"
"M"
Some
number
from 9
to 0
Some
number
from 9
to 0
Filter Life Monitor
" F"
"M"
Present life of filter is OK
"O"
" K"
Present life of filter is low
" L"
" O"
Transmission Health Monitor
"O"
" K"
Shows "OK" until remaining life of one or more of the
clutch(es) wear enough so that the programming changes
"O"
" K"
One or more of the clutches C1 through C5 have worn
enough to change the program
" L"
" O"
Display of diagnostic codes
"d"
" 1"
(up) &
(down)
arrow buttons pressed
simultaneously
1st press
Allison transmission oil level check
Other codes will be displayed
2
nd
press
Oil Life Monitor
Oil life remaining will range from 99% down to 00%
3rd press
4th press
5th press
Other codes will be displayed
Appendix D – Spheros Preheater Flash Codes
199
OPERATIONAL FAILURE SYMPTOMS VIA FAULT/FLASH CODE
The following table lists the possible faults which can be read by flashing code off of an appropriate timer,
the equipment-on indicator /operation indicator flashes.
Failure Symptom
Probable Cause
Check and Correct
1X Flash (F 01)
No combustion after
completion of start up
sequence.
- Fuel system
- Fuel level
- Type of fuel being used
- Fuel filter
- Fuel line connections (air bubbles in fuel lines)
- Fuel nozzle plugged
- Air intake or exhaust, restricted or plugged
- Incorrect electrode gap
- Combustion air
- Electronic ignition
2X Flashes (F 02)
Flame out during
burner operation no
restart possible
- Fuel supply (shortage of fuel)
- Restriction in the fuel system
- Fuel filter
- Fuel line connections (air bubbles in fuel lines)
- Type of fuel being used
3X Flashes (F 03)
Low voltage for more
than 20 seconds
- Electrical system
- Load test batteries
- Corrosion at connections
- Loose connections
4X Flashes (F 04)
Flame detector
recognizes false flame
signal during pre-start
or shut-down cycle
- Defective flame detector
- Replace flame detector
5X Flashes (F 05)
Flame detector
- Wiring
- Defective flame detector
- Damaged wiring, open or short circuit
- Replace flame detector
6X Flashes (F 06)
Temperature sensor
- Wiring
- Defective temperature sensor
- Damaged wiring, open or short circuit
- Replace temperature sensor
7X Flashes (F 07)
Fuel solenoid valve
- Wiring
- Defective solenoid valve
- Damaged or corroded wiring, open or short
circuit
- Replace solenoid valve
8X Flashes (F 08)
Combustion air fan
motor
- Wiring
- Wrong RPM
- Defective combustion air fan motor
- Damaged wiring, open or short circuit
- Replace combustion air fan
- Replace combustion air fan
9X Flashes (F 09)
Circulation pump motor
- Wiring
- Defective circulation pump motor
- Damaged wiring, open or short circuit
- Replace circulation pump motor
10X Flashes (F 10)
Temperature limiter
- Overheat condition
- Coolant flow
- Defective temperature limiter
- Reset temperature limiter
- Coolant level or flow restriction
- Air trapped in coolant circuit
- Damaged or corroded wiring, open or short
circuit
- Replace temperature limiter
11X Flashes (F 11)
Electronic ignition coil
- Wiring
- Defective electronic ignition coil
- Damaged wiring, open or short circuit
- Replace electronic ignition coil
12X Flashes (F 12)
Heater lock out
- 3 repeated faults/flame-outs or
5 repeated start attempts
- Reinitialize control unit by switching heater on
and disconnecting power.
- Wiring
Appendix E – TPMS Troubleshooting Guide
Possible causes: TPMS ECU not
powered. Wheels/tires have been
changed and sensors ID # has not been
reprogrammed into the display. Wheels
have been installed without sensors.
TPMS ECU does not communicate with
display due to a CAN-D-BUS network
problem. Antennas power is shortcircuited or defective.
NO PRESSURE
DATA
RECEIVED
Cycle the ignition between
the ON and OFF position
then check if TPMS telltale
indicator illuminates for 3
seconds.
NO
Check TPMS ECU
fuse (F26 - 3A)
YES
Check
that
all
antennas are properly
connected using the
“ANTENNA STATUS”
menu.
Reprogram a sensor
using the “LEARN
WHEEL ID” menu.
Remove a tire to
check if the sensor
was installed inside
Disconnect
TPMS
ECU connector and
probe
to
confirm
proper 12V power
Check CAN-D-BUS
network between TPMS
and display
201
202
Appendix E – TPMS Troubleshooting Guide
NOT ALL TIRES
MONITORED
Check
that
all
antennas are properly
connected using the
“ANTENNA STATUS”
menu.
Reprogram
a
sensor using the
“LEARN
WHEEL
ID” menu.
Remove a tire to
check if the sensor
was installed inside.
Possible causes: Wheels/tires
have
been
changed
and
sensors ID # has not been
reprogrammed into the display.
Wheels have been installed
without sensors. One of the
antennas is defective or not
properly connected.
Index
203
110-120 VOLTS CONNECTOR ......................16
BACK-UP CAMERA ...............................16, 142
A
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENTS ...................... 12
ABBREVIATIONS .........................................175
ADJUSTABLE HVAC REGISTERS ................20
AIR SYSTEM ................................................169
BELTS...........................................................168
BRAKES .......................................................169
BRAKE CHAMBER EFFECTIVE AREA ..........169
AISLE MIRROR ..............................................20
C
ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS ..................170
CAPACITIES.................................................167
ALLISON AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION.....................................81, 168
CARE AND MAINTENANCE........... 143
DESCRIPTION OF AVAILABLE RANGES........82
MODE................................................................81
CATALYTIC CONVERTER ACCESS DOOR... 9
CLEANING....................................................145
CARPET..........................................................146
OPERATION ....................................................81
EXTERIOR SURFACES..................................146
PUSHBUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR ..................81
FLOOR CLEANING.........................................146
TRANSMISSION SERVICE INDICATOR..........82
FORMICA........................................................146
ALLISON TRANSMISSION WARM-UP........127
PLASTIC AND VINYL......................................146
ANTILOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) 109, 169
RUBBER COMPONENTS...............................146
TROUBLESHOOTING AND TESTING ...........169
SEAT UPHOLSTERY......................................145
APPENDIX A – SERVICE LITERATURE177
STAINLESS STEEL ........................................146
NOTICE...........................................................179
WINDOWS ......................................................146
SERVICE LITERATURE .................................178
WINDSHIELD ..................................................147
APPENDIX B – TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE FOR MULTIPLEX VEHICLES........ 181
COACH EXTERIOR ................................... 5
APPENDIX C – ALLISON DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLESHOOTING CODES................ 187
COACH INTERIOR ........................... 19
CONTROL SYSTEM PROGNOSTICS ............196
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES
(DTC) - ALLISON 4TH GENERATION CONTROLS
.........................................................................188
APPENDIX D – SPHEROS PREHEATER
FLASH CODES .................................... 199
APPENDIX E – TPMS TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE................................................ 201
AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION AND
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (AFSS) .................37
AUTOMATIC TRACTION CONTROL (ATC) –
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)....
..............................................................109, 169
B
BACK-UP ALARM.........................................142
BACK-UP CAMERA AND MONITOR .............37
COACH FINAL RECORD .............................174
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING........................142
CONDENSER COMPARTMENT (A/C) .......... 10
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS ... 29
COOLANT HEATER COMPARTMENT.......... 11
COOLING SYSTEM......................................171
CRUISE CONTROL........................................ 38
PREVOST AWARE – ADAPTIVE CRUISE
BRAKING...........................................................39
REGULAR CRUISE CONTROL ........................38
D
DASHBOARD ................................................. 48
AIR VENTS .......................................................59
AUDIO-VIDEO SELECTOR FOR THE
PASSENGER’S AREA ......................................56
CONTROL SWITCHES .....................................49
204
Index
DASHBOARD RADIO/MP3/POD/CD PLAYER .58
HVAC CONTROL UNIT.....................................54
L.H. DASHBOARD PANEL ...............................49
R.H. DASHBOARD PANEL...............................52
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS ......................141
DEFENSIVE DRIVING PRACTICES ................2
DIAGNOSTIC DATA READER (DDR)
RECEPTACLE ................................................37
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES
(DTC) - ALLISON 4TH GENERATION
CONTROLS ..................................................188
E
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ................................170
ELECTRONIC DESTINATION SIGN.............. 20
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)
......................................................................109
EMERGENCY AIR-FILL VALVES ................140
EMERGENCY AND PARKING BRAKES .....141
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT ........................131
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ..........................136, 153
FIRE HATCHET ..............................................136
ALLISON TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLESHOOTING CODES (DTC) AND
DESCRIPTIONS..............................................191
FIRST AID KIT ................................................136
ALLISON TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL CHECK
USING THE PUSH-BUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR
........................................................................195
LIMP-HOME BELT ..........................................137
DIAGNOSTIC CODE DISPLAY AND CLEARING
PROCEDURE - ALLISON 4TH GENERATION
CONTROLS ....................................................189
DIAGNOSTIC CODE RESPONSE ..................190
TH
JACK AND TOOLS..........................................137
SPARE PARTS KIT.........................................137
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (AFSS) ..................131
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ............................................................132
WARNING REFLECTORS ..............................137
DIAGNOSTIC CODES – ALLISON 4
GENERATION CONTROLS............................188
EMERGENCY EXITS ...................................130
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING CODES
(DTC) OVERVIEW ..........................................188
ROOF HATCH.................................................130
EMERGENCY ENTRANCE DOOR OPENING131
EXITING FLUID LEVEL DISPLAY MODE.......195
SIDE WINDOWS .............................................130
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS .....................167
EMERGENCY/PARKING BRAKES OVERRULE
CONTROL VALVE.......................................... 37
DRIVER CONTROLLED
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK (DCDL).....................109
ENGINE ........................................................168
LOCKING THE DCDL .....................................110
VOLVO D13 ENGINE......................................168
OPERATION TIPS ..........................................109
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER ...........................127
UNLOCKING THE DCDL ................................110
ENGINE BRAKE ...........................................107
DRIVER'S SEAT – ISRI ..................................21
ENGINE BRAKE – AUTO MODE (WITH I-SHIFT
TRANSMISSION ONLY) .................................108
MECHANICAL ISRI SEAT.................................21
PNEUMATIC ISRI SEAT ...................................22
SAFETY BELTS ................................................23
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
MENUS ...........................................................98
EXHAUST BRAKE ..........................................108
VOLVO ENGINE BRAKE (VEB)......................108
ENGINE COMPARTMENT COMPONENTS.... 7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT............................... 8
DRIVING MODE MENU..................................98
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CURB-SIDE DOOR 8
FUEL DATA.....................................................100
ENGINE COMPARTMENT REAR DOORS........ 8
GAUGES ...........................................................98
ENGINE COOLANT HEATER ......................111
RESET TRIP DATA.........................................101
COOLANT HEATER TIMER ...........................112
TIME/DISTANCE.............................................100
SWITCHING THE HEATER OFF ....................112
VEHICLE MESSAGES ....................................101
SWITCHING THE HEATER ON ......................112
Index
205
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE.114
BRAKE PEDAL .................................................80
ENGINE RADIATOR DOOR .............................9
FRONT ELECTRICAL AND SERVICE
COMPARTMENT............................................ 11
ENGINE WARM-UP......................................127
ENTRANCE DOOR.........................................14
DOOR OPERATION LOGIC .............................14
EMERGENCY ENTRANCE DOOR OPENING .15
ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS TO OPERATE THE
VEHICLE (BASIC LIMP-HOME FUNCTIONS)
......................................................................142
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ...............................142
EVAPORATOR COMPARTMENT..................10
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM ....91
DEF QUALITY – DRIVER WARNING AND
INDUCEMENT ..................................................96
DEF TANK LEVEL – DRIVER WARNING AND
INDUCEMENT ..................................................95
FILTRATION AND REGENERATION UNIT ......91
SCR SYSTEM TAMPERING – DRIVER
WARNING AND INDUCEMENT........................97
FUEL AND DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)
FILLER DOOR ................................................ 13
FUEL SYSTEM .............................................171
FUEL TYPE ..................................................167
BIODIESEL FUELS .........................................167
G
GALLEY .......................................................... 28
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS ..............159
H
HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING...........171
HI-BUOY .......................................................110
HUBODOMETER............................................ 16
I
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION UNIT ..93
IGNITION SWITCH......................................... 31
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM
ACCESS DOOR................................................9
IN-STATION LIGHTING ...............................111
EXHAUST SYSTEM .....................................171
ANALOG INDICATORS ....................................61
F
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .............................. 60
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY...................68
FIRST SERVICE ON NEW VEHICLE...........158
COOLANT SYSTEM STRAINER ....................158
ENGINE OIL....................................................158
FLUID LEVEL VERIFICATION .....................148
COOLANT FLUID LEVEL................................151
COOLING FAN RIGHT ANGLE GEARBOX OIL
LEVEL .............................................................151
TELLTALE LIGHTS ...........................................64
I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION (VOLVO) ............... 84
ACCELERATOR PEDAL...................................85
DISPLAY ...........................................................84
DRIVING ...........................................................87
ECONOMY AND PERFORMANCE MODE.......85
ECO-ROLL MODE (FREEWHEEL FUNCTION)85
DRIVE AXLE WHEEL BEARING OIL LEVEL..151
LIMP HOME MODE...........................................85
ENGINE OIL LEVEL........................................148
PUSHBUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR ..................84
FRONT AND TAG AXLE WHEEL HUBS ........151
STARTING AND STOPPING.............................86
POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL ................150
STARTING THE VEHICLE UPHILL AND
DOWNHILL........................................................86
TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL ..........................149
WINDSHIELD WASHER & HEADLIGHTS
WASHER RESERVOIR...................................152
FOG LIGHTS ................................................142
FOOT-OPERATED CONTROLS ....................80
ACCELERATOR PEDAL...................................81
TOWING ............................................................88
I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION – STARTING
THE VEHICLE AT LOW TEMPERATURES.127
206
Index
J
N
JACKING POINTS ........................................138
NON-DRIVING / STATIONARY MODE MENUS
......................................................................101
HYDRAULIC JACK..........................................139
AFTERTREATMENT.......................................106
K
DATA LOG ......................................................105
KEYS...............................................................31
DIAGNOSTICS................................................103
ENTRANCE DOOR AND EXTERIOR
COMPARTMENT DOORS KEY ........................31
DISPLAY SETTINGS ......................................101
PASSWORDS .................................................107
FUEL FILLER DOOR KEY ................................31
HAND TOWEL DISPENSER KEY.....................31
LAVATORY DOOR KEY ...................................31
PRE-TRIP ASSISTANT...................................104
O
UTILITY AND VIDEO COMPARTMENT KEY ...31
OIL SPECIFICATIONS .................................172
UTILITY COMPARTMENTS KEY......................31
ALLISON TRANSMISSION .............................172
KNEELING SYSTEM ....................................110
DIFFERENTIAL ...............................................172
ENGINE...........................................................172
L
LATERAL CONTROL PANEL.........................34
12-VOLT APPLIANCES SOCKET.....................37
ASHTRAY .........................................................37
CIGARETTE LIGHTER .....................................36
CONTROL SWITCHES .....................................35
FAN RIGHT ANGLE GEARBOX .....................172
I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION................................172
POWER STEERING RESERVOIR..................172
OTHER FEATURES.......................... 89
OTHER PRECAUTIONS .................................. 3
COOLANT HEATER TIMER .....................36, 112
OTHER VERIFICATIONS.............................152
LOW BUOY CONTROL VALVE ........................36
A/C AND HEATING SYSTEM AIR FILTERS...155
MIRROR CONTROLS .......................................36
A/C COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION
ADJUSTMENT ................................................154
PARKING BRAKES CONTROL VALVE............36
TAG AXLE CONTROL VALVE..........................36
TRAILER AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE ......37
TRANSMISSION CONTROL PAD ....................35
UTILITY COMPARTMENT ................................37
LAVATORY MAINTENANCE........................147
CLEANING CABINET......................................148
DRAINING THE SUMP TANK.........................148
FILLING THE SUMP TANK.............................148
FRESH WATER RESERVOIR ........................147
LAVATORY .....................................................28
LOW-BUOY...................................................111
M
AIR FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR .......154
AIR TANK PURGE ..........................................152
BACK-UP CAMERA ........................................154
EXTERIOR LIGHTING VERIFICATION ..........157
FAN AND ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELTS........154
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ..................................153
HOSE INSPECTION .......................................156
LUBRICATION ................................................156
PARKING BRAKE TEST .................................157
PRIMARY FUEL FILTER.................................153
SERVICE BRAKE TEST .................................157
WHEELS AND TIRES .....................................156
WHEEL BEARINGS ........................................157
MICROPHONE JACKS...................................24
OVERHEAD COMPARTMENTS .................... 27
MUD FLAPS AND SPLASH GUARDS .........142
OVERHEAD CONSOLE ................................. 25
ADJUSTABLE AIR REGISTERS.......................26
Index
207
READING LIGHTS ............................................26
TRANSMISSION RETARDER ..........................80
SERVICE BELL .................................................26
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT .............. 20
STEERING....................................................170
P
SUSPENSION ..............................................170
DRIVE AXLE ...................................................170
PASSENGER SEATS .....................................24
I-BEAM AXLE FRONT SUSPENSION ............170
CARD TABLES .................................................25
INDEPENDENT FRONT SUSPENSION .........170
FOLDING TRAYS..............................................24
TAG AXLE.......................................................170
QUICK-LOUNGE SYSTEM ...............................25
SWIVEL SEATS ................................................24
PLATES AND CERTIFICATION ...................173
DOT CERTIFICATION PLATE ........................174
T
TECHNICAL INFORMATION.......... 163
SAFETY CERTIFICATION ..............................174
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)............................................................ 39
PRE-HEATING SYSTEM..............................172
TOUR GUIDE SEAT ....................................... 24
PROPELLER SHAFT....................................169
TOWING .......................................................140
R
TRAILER HITCH............................................. 16
REAR VIEW MIRRORS ..................................15
TRANSMISSION RETARDER................80, 107
RETRACTABLE TAG AXLE .........................111
U
S
UNLOADING TAG AXLE..............................111
SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES.....................2
SAFETY FEATURES AND
EQUIPMENT................................... 129
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................... 1
SCENIC VIEWING SYSTEM CAMERA..........37
SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ..........................137
CHANGING A WHEEL ....................................137
SPARE WHEEL COMPARTMENT.................13
STARTING AND STOPPING
PROCEDURES ............................... 123
UTILITY COMPARTMENTS........................... 20
V
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN) .............................................174
VENTILATION HATCH................................... 27
VOLVO I-SHIFT TRANSMISSION ................. 84
W
WALK-AROUND INSPECTION
(BEFORE EVERY TRIP) ..............................161
WASTE CONTAINER ..................................... 28
STARTING THE ENGINE .............................124
WHEELCHAIR LIFT ACCESS DOORS ......... 15
COLD WEATHER STARTING ........................125
WHEELCHAIR LIFT SYSTEM......................114
JUMP STARTING............................................125
EMERGENCY OPERATION ...........................118
STARTING FROM THE DRIVER'S SEAT.......124
INTERIOR APPOINTMENTS ..........................117
STARTING FROM THE ENGINE
COMPARTMENT ............................................124
OPERATING THE WHEELCHAIR LIFT ..........115
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS ................77
THRESHOLD WARNING SYSTEM (TWS)
ADJUSTMENT ................................................116
HORNS .............................................................79
WHEELCHAIR LIFT AND ACCESS DOORS ..114
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER ...............................77
WHEELCHAIR LIFT INSTALLATION..............121
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS......................78
WHEELCHAIR LIFT REMOVAL FOR STORING
208
Index
OR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES ...................120
WHEELS AND TIRES...................................168
RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE AT MAXIMUM COLD LOAD .......168
WINDOWS ......................................................26
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW...........................27
PANORAMIC WINDOWS .................................26
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement